Home

Buffalo OP-LP-CAM1

1. cccssssseseesteseessessesseesesseeseesoesaesaesesseveevanvanesneseeseesaesansaeeaee 46 Record and Capture Video Feeds 47 Using Camera Policies to Record and Capture Vide o o ccccceeecececeeecececeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeees 49 Camera Policies Advanced Mode sisirin sa aceabevidescvecuoess 51 Add Modify or Delete Camera Configurations cssccssscseesseeseerseeeseeseneeeesseneesesseneseeeseeeeeesesseneesensenensenss 52 PUG Greate ea VV IZ A Ch PAPE AET T T A E T Add an IP Camera Standard MOde ccccceccesceeseeeeeeseeeseeeeeeeeeeeeesaeesaeesaeeeaeeeaeseaeeeaeeaeseaeeaeeeaeesseeseeesaeeeaeeeaees Add an IP Camera Advanced MOde ceceeccesceeseeeneeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeseeseeeeaeseaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeaeseaeeeeeeesneeseeeaeeeaeeeaees Troubleshoot Camera Connection Problems Add a VMS managed Camera Configuration Add a Milestone managed Camera cceccesceescseneeeseeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeesaeeeaeseaeeeaeseaeeaeeaeeseeeneesaeesaeeeaeesaeeneeeaeees Add an OnSSkmanaged CAMera ceccsecceseeseeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeaeeeaeseaeeeaeseaeeeaeeeeseeseeeseeeeeseaeesaeeeaeeeaeees Modify a Camera Configuration i cccccccccccccscssicstssensevseeceedendeecceecieceadeabaesiesceeabcnea ve deasendendeatenisnen nedecsiseaneacsievie Delete a Camera Configuration cccccccecceccesecceeceseeseeseeeeeaeceessecsesseseaeeeeeaecaecaecaesaecaesaeseaseeseaesaesaeeaesaeseseeseateas Import and Export Camera Configurations 0 0 cece
2. Actions From the Actions menu or tool bar of Vault Admin 204 do the following Icon Action Em Launches Mini Vault Stats B3 for monitoring basic Vault activity Secure Unsecure Vaultl20 To secure a Vault means to lock it so ka no further media can be added Shut Down Vaults P18 take a Vault off line Take Vaults off line Ai before performing any type of maintenance to the hardware where a Vault resides Vault Details Icon Address Format Action Change Vault s Propertiesl21 Define Vaults devices databases licensing diagnostics notifications logs and security for Vaults Run a Vault Checkup 234 Quickly check general Vault health Load Reload or Re index Medial5d Bring previously prepared media back on line Prepare Mediak33 or Prepare Existing Medial243 Prepare new or previously used media Unload Medial25 Media can be removed from the Information Repository or labeled as off line and be tracked by the Information Repository Erase Medias Remove all data from a unit of media without reformatting the media Refresh Update the view of the currently displayed data From the Options menu of Vault Adminko4 you can set the Address Formatkedl and Communications Timeouts fes for Vaults gt Communications Timeout gt The active Vaults in the network are represented in the left frame of the Vault Adminl204 main Sf Elie Information a Current Clients
3. lady_HardDisk Information Entire Network it gt Click in the Vault Admin toolbarl203 The Shut Down Vault window appears Shutdown Method 4 Normal Current client transfers are stopped Media may remain in drives New clients are notified of the vault s impending shutdown TO NRA a0 fiat AAA miniak Aine aii d Ge a ton Alle te mention oa Ma Be aAa gt Select an option from the Shutdown Method combo box There are three ways to shut down a Vault and one way to restart a Vault Type of Shutdown Description Normal shutdown is the standard way to shut down a Vault A Normal shutdown stops current client activity after the running transaction completes all database transactions and performs any cleanup activity required but it does not remove media from the drive A Vault restarted after a normal shutdown should not report errors Normal Extended shutdown is the best way to shut down a Vault if it is going to be taken offline for an extended period of time TheBuffalo Surveillance Server waits until running client processes are finished before closing connections to Extended clients Buffalo Surveillance Server then completes all database transactions removes media from drives and performs any required cleanup activity An Extended shutdown is more time consuming than a Normal shutdown Restart executes a Normal shutdown and then restarts the selected Vault Client activity s
4. Query block Spin Type Valid Token Values Type Pathname Label lt character string gt Default Value lt character string gt Blank ValueOk lt Boolean gt Description lt character string gt Name lt character string gt Type Spin Label lt character string gt Default Value lt number gt Description Required Default The Query type The label for the control as it will appear in the application Default The value that will be loaded into the control by default Valid value a string Default Indicates whether the value may be left blank Valid for String and Pathname only Valid values true false Default true The tooltip for the control Default The metadata item s name Required Default The Query type The label for the control as it will appear in the application Default The value that will be loaded into the control by default Valid values a number between the LowerLimit and UpperLimit Default the lower limit Query block Type String Valid Token Values Description lt character string gt LowerLimit lt number gt UpperLimit lt number gt Name lt character string gt Type String Label lt character string gt Default Value lt character string gt BlankValueOk lt Boolean gt Description lt character string gt Description a If the D
5. Watermark The Buffalo Surveillance Server enables you to set High and Low watermarks Watermarks modify when data should be processed as a policy runs in relation to the percentage of available space on source media If a high watermark is greater than 0 zero data is processed only when the percentage of used space on the source media is greater than the entered value In other words when a high watermark is greater than 0 zero if a scheduled policy runs data is transferred only when the amount of data on the source exceeds the high watermark When this happens data processing will continue until the source media is emptied to the level indicated by the Low watermark In short processing begins when a policy executes and the amount of data on the source media exceeds the high watermark and processing stops when the amount of data on the source media reaches the low watermark gt Enter a High watermark to limit processing to until after the level of data on the source media has exceeded the high watermark And or enter a Low watermark to enable the policy to stop processing data when the media s capacity has reached the low watermark level Files and Directories to Include Exclude Once you have denoted the files and directories you want to process you can further refine your session with file and directory filters You can use Include and Exclude filters at the file level and the directory level You can create Exclude filters t
6. Substitutes for any single character and can be combined to denote multiple characters If used in a pathname it cannot replace a forward slash Use for specific alternative spellings substitutes for a single character substitutes for two characters 22 substitutes for three characters and so on Only names with characters equal to the number of used are processed For example cell substitutes for all names containing cell lt one additional character gt For example cells and cello but not cell You can use within or at the end of a phrase For example xl substitutes for only names containing xl lt a third character gt such as xls xlr and so on wom n substitutes for only names containing wom lt a third character gt n such as woman or women carbon fib substitutes for only names containing carbon fib lt two characters gt such as carbon fiber or carbon fibre In the Vault Media Name or Storage Pool fields substitute the appropriate wildcard character for any letter or letters For example lets say you have four Vaults e Accounting e Administrative e Development e Sarbanes Oxley And you want to migrate data only to Vaults named Accounting and Actuarial In the Vault field you would enter Ac and data will be stored only to Vaults beginning with Ac regardless of what comes after c The same type of scenario would pertain if you wanted to use wildcards in the Media Name field Whe
7. va Quantum SDLT 220 Tape Drive Device type Tape drives Manufacturer Quantum Location Bus Number 0 Target ID 2 LUN 0 p Device status Tape Symbolic Name This device is working properly If you are having problems with this device click Troubleshoot to start the troubleshooter L Troubleshoot Device usage Use this device enable tlt ct a tn tt tt RATA gt Under Device Usage click the down arrow and select Do not use this device disable gt Click OK The Tape Drive Properties window closes and the icon for the device in the right pane of Computer Management should now have superimposed upon it 29 Quantum SDLT 220 Tape Drive The tape drive is now disabled Cancel OK Add a Standalone Tape Drive Vault 4 IMPORTANT NOTE If you are using the Buffalo Surveillance Server Vaults and media are preconfigured and prepared automatically there is no need to perform any Vault operations The information in this Vault Admin section is provided for information only Use the Buffalo Surveillance Server Add or Remove Vault Wizard to add a Buffalo Surveillance Server Vault to a standalone tape drive This section leads you through the Add or Remove Vault Wizard in advanced user mode Unless you are an advanced user and have clearly defined reasons for changing the default values it is best to use default values leaving advanced user mode unchecked After addi
8. 4 Pree PET Te e Te ro gt Select or enter the values for the Vault Field Meaning and Directions Enable optional email notifications and the email notification fields listed below Enable email apes When enabled receive an email whenever an event occurs notification of interest for managing a Vault These events include Vault start Vault stop media requests etc and are the same as those recorded for notifications Type the email address of the user receiving email Email recipient eet p notifications about Buffalo Surveillance Server events Field Mail server address Where events are sent Meaning and Directions The address of your mail server Use either IP address or computer name gt Click Send Test Email to test the path A Buffalo Surveillance Server does not test valid parameters here If an invalid IP address or computer name is entered email notifications do not work Define where events are logged Computer Console causes events to be logged ina console that appears on the computer monitor It remains open as long as the Vault is running If the Vault is stopped the console disappears If the Vault is restarted the console disappears and then reappears Window causes events to be logged in a window that appears on the computer monitor This window remains open as long as the Vault is running If the Vault is stopped the window disappears If the Vault is restarted
9. e The Search Results frame displays found videos You can double click a thumbnail to view a low resolution proxy version on the Media Viewer When you want to export only part of a clip the Media Viewer enables you to choose the part for export e The Export Queue frame displays the videos selected for export Export Window Search Export Export Job Configuration Job Status Export destination Job Mame Local F 201 Job Progress Local file system Y Destination Local file syste e Teen OOO Status Export complete File 1 of 1 Job name elected video ideo for each selection Y The Export window is divided into two main sections e The Export Job Configuration frame enables you to select the specific parameters for the videos you will export You can export to a local file system a Rimage system or through FTP Each type of export has its own configuration options Select Start Export when you are ready to export videos e The Job Status frame displays results as videos are being exported How to Search for amp Export Videos Overview Follow the steps below to search for and retrieve videos 1 Launch the Surveillance Video Managerk73 2 Search for and Select Videos amp Clips for Export 2s8 a It is best to avoid using characters that the Buffalo Surveillance Server interprets as wildcards or as otherwise special If you need to use a character literally that the Buffalo Surveillance Serv
10. gt Change the values for Name type Entry name and Rights gt Click OK to save changes gt In the Properties window click OK to save changes Delete a User Group Domain or Everyone gt To delete an entry from the Vault Access Control List select it by single clicking it gt Click The entry will be removed from the list gt Click OK to save changes Load Media Load Reload or Re index Media py IMPORTANT NOTE If you are using the Buffalo Surveillance Server Vaults and media are preconfigured and prepared automatically there is no need to perform any Vault operations The information in this Vault Admin section is provided for information only Loading media means adding media that has at one time been part of the Information Repository but is no longer being tracked to a Vault If you attempt to load unprepared tape media to a Vault the Buffalo Surveillance Server will label it Unknown This label will be replaced with the one that you enter when you prepare the medial234 If you attempt to load unprepared media to a hard disk or Vault the Buffalo Surveillance Server will not recognize the media If you simply need to re catalogue in other words re index media that is being tracked in the Information Repository you must reload it Reloading media means re adding media to the Information Repository that has already been in use and is being tracked When you reload media the Vault uses its
11. Computer Console causes events to be logged ina console that appears on the computer monitor It remains open as long as the Vault is running If the Vault is stopped the console disappears If the Vault is restarted the console disappears and then reappears Window causes events to be logged in a window that appears on the computer monitor This window remains open as long as the Vault is running If the Vault is stopped the window disappears If the Vault is restarted the window disappear and then reappears vits S you select Computer Console or Window in a Windows environment configure Vault service on Windows to open a window on the desktop for diagnostic messages For directions see section Configure Vault Service on Windows to Open a Window on the Desktop for Diagnostic Messages Once configured Vault activity displays A If you close a window or console the Vault stops Buffalo Surveillance Server does not operate without running Vaults File will cause events to be logged to a file If you select this option you will need to enter or lt Browse to the location to which you want events logged gt Click Next gt The Ready to Add window appears Use to review the parameters for the new Vault before actually adding the Vault F Ready to Add Ready to Add Vault Review the summary below before clicking Next Vault name felix_SingleTape3 a Vault type SingleTape Host Id 4 Bus Id 0
12. SN If running a tape library be sure to disable the tape library Medium Changers and the actual tape drives in the library Repeat the disabling process for each tape drive within the library Computer Management Local E i System Tools fa Event viewer EJ Shared Folders E z Local Users and Groups E i Performance Logs and Alerts a Device Manager 2 Storage E Removable Storage Disk Defragmenter Disk Management ic Be Services and Applications Ei 3 Computer Es Disk drives m Display adapters fH DVD CD ROM drives H 6 IDE ATAJATAPI controllers Ely Medium Changers Unknown Medium Changer m Monitors H E Network adapters 4p Other devices Unknown device HY Ports COM amp LPT E Processors E K SCSI and RAID controllers Sound video and game controllers Ei p System devices B RA Tape drives Quantum SDLT 220 Tape Drive 4 Universal Serial Bus controllers Update Driver Enable Uninstall Scan for hardware changes Properties The Tape Drive Properties window appears Tape Drive Parameters Tape Media Capacity Driver Details General va Quantum SDLT 220 Tape Drive Device type Tape drives Manufacturer Quantum Location p Device status Tape Symbolic Name Bus Number 0 Target ID 2 LUN 0 This device is working properly If you are having problems with this device click Troubleshoot to start the trouble
13. Storage Capacity 15 TB Camera Capacity 30 cameras Product Type Data Services Surveillance Platform Type any Expiration 2012 02 01 00 00 00 Host Id 22159694f6 Installed Licenses Serial Type Capacity Expiration Product Type Platform Type 110001 HardDisk 10 TB 2012 02 29 00 00 00 Surveillance Any 110002 HardDisk STB 2012 02 29 00 00 00 Data Services Any 110003 SurveilanceCamera 25cameras 2012 02 01 00 00 00 Any Any 110004 SurveillanceCamera Scameras 2012 02 01 00 00 00 Any Any we OK Cancel Help gt A license file will be sent to you via e mail gt After receiving the license file from lt Vault Name gt Properties gt License tab click the Add button gt From the Add License window select Import License File gt Type or click the Browse button to navigate to the received license file gt Click Ok to complete manual activation Import license file Select License File Browse oK Cancel Help 4 a ee A If you are having problems activating your license visit the Buffalo website for manual activation Security Use the Security tab to add change and delete user group and domain rights for the selected Vault Vault rights override media rights sai gt Open the Vault Admin application In the left pane of the Vault Admin 204 main window select the Vault Vi to modify gt Click eg to launch the lt Vault Name gt Prop
14. lt not complete gt lt none gt lt not selected gt Axis Lobby AXIS 210 rtsp 192 168 5 237 mpeg4 medi lt not complete gt lt none gt lt not selected gt Axis211_RearDeck AXIS 211 rtsp 192 168 1 229 mpeg4 medi lt not complete gt lt none gt lt not selected gt Axis_M1011 AXIS M1011 rtsp 192 168 5 116 axis media lt not complete gt lt none gt lt not selected gt Basler 1300 Front Basler BIP 1300c srtsp 192 168 5 100 mpeq4 lt not complete gt lt none gt lt not selected gt Basler 1300 Basler Front Parking Basler BIP 1000c rtsp 192 168 5 224 mpeg4 lt not complete gt lt none gt lt not selected gt Basler 1000 Raslerfidfr Rasler RIP Adn orksniff197 1A8 5 147 mnend gnnt camnlete gt lt nane gt gnnt selected gt W a rane gt Click to add a camera The Add New Camera window appears Camera Information Name 4 Description i Manufacturer Generic v Model Generic x Find Cameras Video Capture URL rtspii Test User Name Password a Recording Computer lt notselected gt v f D ee j gt Fill in or select the following fields as needed Field Results A user defined value used in the menus and configuration file this is the name of the camera Name and or Location The name entered is for identification purposes only It is best to use a naming convention and a descriptive name Field Descript
15. wit py Remember that a Vault is a storage device used to store files The Vault drives the storage device and provides memory resources for program execution metadata management and continuous monitoring From your suite of product applications open the Network Activity application NetActivity exe From Network Activity access Mini Vault Stats 338 to see high level vault activity information Every client and vault in the Information Repository is represented by a sphere and a label in the Network Activity window Clients appear when jobs are running and the activity is denoted by dynamic lines connecting clients and vaults As a job is running move the mouse pointer over the client symbol to view Job User and Status details If you need to freeze the current display of Network Activity right click and hold the application s title bar q J Network Activity Move Vault Symbols Using Network Activity the Buffalo Surveillance Server generates and places Vault symbols randomly Move the Vaults within the window gt Position the cursor over the symbol until the hand cursor is displayed gt Click and hold the left mouse button and drag the Vault symbol to a new location Under the Advanced menu option find controls that enable you to modify how Network Actimty s view of the network is updated Updating Mode Results Update Fast Increases screen update rate Force Vault Lookup Forces update of view of Vaults in
16. 192 168 111 hp LaserJet 192 168 1 57 Canon Mx870 Show all devices x J Cea ef s PE E E 86 re Attn y meaa oaa Troubleshoot Camera Connection Problems This section is to help diagnose camera configuration problems that may be preventing the Buffalo Surveillance Server from working with the RTSP enabled IP camera If the RTSP URL has been entered and the camera did not work when you clicked Test ensure that O The camera is properly connected to the network You selected the correct manufacturer in the Buffalo Surveillance Server camera configuration U You selected the correct model in the Buffalo Surveillance Server camera configuration Q You entered the correct IP address in the Buffalo Surveillance Server camera configuration Check the camera s documentation to determine how to detect the correct IP address O The correct path was entered by the Buffalo Surveillance Server or you entered the correct path Check your camera s documentation to determine the correct path Alf your camera has security enabled the user name and password in the Buffalo Surveillance Server camera configuration are correct for viewing or managing the camera U The camera is configured to enable RTSP viewing with either MPEG4 or H 264 formats MPEG4 or H 264 are the formats preferred by the Buffalo Surveillance Server Add a VMS managed Camera Configuration To capture video from your VMS you need to
17. Device Id 2 SdLunid 0 Amount of memory per data stream cache 10 00 MB Administrated by Any user Database location C Program Files Testing Database2 Database optimized at 12 00 AM Maximum memory used for database 1 00 GB Maximum number of open database files 100 Activity logging enabled False Enable email notification false Error log pathname C Program Files Testing Logs VaultSvc2 log Console pathname con A Loaira hamtin Pita ai date ed te Rd tated Orta ie DA Mi lt Back next gt cancel p A a Peet ee Oe gt Review the displayed summary and ensure that all of the values are correct gt When ready to add the new Vault click Next The Completed window appears gt Click Finish to exit the Add or Remove Vault Wizard Restart the computer for the new Vault activation To add another Vault or remove a Vault launch the Add or Remove Vault Wizard again A If you do not restart your computer the new Vault will not start or be available for use gt After restarting your computer Launch Vault Adminko4 to prepare medial235 for the Vault just added See the Administrator s Guide gt Vault Admin gt Actions gt Prepare Media for directions Disable SCSI Devices on a Windows Computer To ensure that Windows does not interfere with Buffalo Surveillance Server s management of SCSI tape drives and libraries Medium Changers disable Windows use of these devices This is
18. File Edt view Tools Help fd save ok wizard Recording Policy Name ELE Arecont2805 Sw Arecont Lobby _Ru Sw Axis 211 _Rear Siw Axis Front Parking au Oe Delete Camera Processing Destination Scheduling Advanced g Refresh SE Cameras Log and Report Options Error Log Filename 6R Logs P err Browse Browse Report Options Summary Y R Logs P log Siw axis_Lobby Activity Log Disabled Sw Basler _SideLot Sa Cohu_3930 Performance Options Sa cohu_3960 7 Enable transmission optimization Ea Grandstream Lobb Maintain client vault connection for 500 Files O Bytes Sa Interviews Throttle 100 Siw 1QEye Front Lobby Ube QE ye Side Lot 2 Le Mango_iQeye Sw MobotixLobby_2 fetta trtert ern ite E te stn Or Ste N O ao erioa i i gt Select the options below to configure the policy Error Log Filename The Buffalo Surveillance Server creates an error log file whenever errors are encountered during a job Use it to assist you when troubleshooting problems that arise in the job The Error Log Filename text box can include literal file names or a combination of file name field variables see File Name Field Variables below that will generate filenames for logs gt In the Error Log Filename text box leave the default variables in place or type in the file name that you want to use including an extension or type in a variable name using Filename Fiel
19. Ready to Add Ready to Add Vault Review the summary below before clicking Next Vault name felix_TapeLibrary4 Amount of memory per data stream cache 10 00 MB Administrated by Any user Database location C Program Files Testing Database2 Database optimized at 12 00 AM Maximum memory used for database 1 00 GB Maximum number of open database files 100 Activity logging enabled false Enable email notification False Error log pathname C Program Files Testing Logs VaultSvc2 log 1 lt Le eo lk i A lt Back _Next gt cancel P peer myer UA ever gt Review the displayed summary and ensure that all of the values are correct gt When ready to add the new Vault click Next The Completed window appears gt Click Finish to exit the Add or Remove Vault Wizard Restart the computer for the new Vault activation To add another Vault or remove a Vault launch the Add or Remove Vault Wizard again A If you do not restart your computer the new Vault will not start or be available for use gt After restarting your computer Launch Vault Adminko4 to prepare medial235 for the Vault just added See the Administrator s Guide gt Vault Admin gt Actions gt Prepare Media for directions Disable SCSI Devices on a Windows Computer vite ey IMPORTANT NOTE If you are using the Buffalo Surveillance Server Vaults and media are preconfigured and prepared automatically there is no need to p
20. Total Drives Total Errors Total Media Total Media Offline Total Media Online Total Robotic Arms Total RPC Calls In Total RPC Calls Out Total RPC Packets In Total RPC Packets Out Total Storage Slots Total Volumes Total Volumes Offline Total Volumes Online Type Value udp 192 168 2 15 36842 2008 05 15 13 36 55 2008 05 15 17 40 06 4 99 GB 0 Bytes Hdisk Burns_HardDisk Yes 100014 3 3 1 706 17 432 17 631 1 1 0 1 HardDisk Leen ete E A Set te tn sorte tn od PE hadaa og eh Rim ate Tatar AM Mal Address The network address of the Vault selected and the Vault s port number Boot Time The date and time of the Vault s last startup cycle Current Time The time on the Vault s internal clock This is mapped to the Vault s host computer Free Space The amount of free space available in the Vault Garbage Space The amount of purgeable space in the Vault this will normally be zero on hard disk based Vaults Media Type Additional information about the storage device technology used by the Vault Hard disk based Vaults always have a Media Type of Hdisk while tape based Vaults list the type of tape technology being used such as DLT or LTO Name The name of the Vault selected Secured Whether the Vault is secured or unsecured Serial Number A number created at the time of manufacture that maps to a right to use license Software Version The version of B
21. V Enable activity logging Where should the activity log be stored Browse C Program Files Logs VaultSycActivity2 log How large can the activity log grow No create a new activity lag when the maximum size is reached Error Log Where should the error log be stored C Program Files Logs VaultSvc2 log so00me 3 Overwrite the activity log when it reaches maximum size i S eT PP AT Om Oe OD ee ein cee ae aes nre tan Pr gt Enter or select the following in the Logs window Field Meaning and Directions This checkbox will enable activity logging and the activity log fields listed below If unchecked Buffalo Surveillance Server will not create activity logs Buffalo Surveillance Server supports event auditing providing a security audit trail through activity logs Activity logs include following events Vault start Vault stop file read file write file create file delete media load Enable activity logging media unload and media erase For these events the following information is recorded name and IP of the user who executed the event and the date and time the event was executed Activity logging is optional Buffalo Surveillance Server creates activity logs in tab delimited format Consequently logs can be imported into any application that supports the tab delimited format such as Microsoft Excel This field defines to where your activity logs will be written
22. description model manufacturer pool user_name password video_capture_url live_view_url mgmt_url frame_width frame_height ptz_enable live_view_enable mgmt_enable stream_over_tcp owner end of object rule for Camera policy_name HICE ioo A type version active name description model manufacturer pool user_name password video_capture_url live_view_url mgmt_url frame_width frame_height ptz_enable live_view_enable mgmt_enable stream_over_tcp owner end of object rule for Camera Policy Writer version 1 0 on camcrg ONS false ACT Lobby wn TIC MI SONN TAG Wal ww aamin TV23 4556n Wie sos fl 92 Wie sis 12 Durie g ff 192 0 0 false true true false ww sl O8 6 So 2403 MOTE lOS Bo BHO TTO 6 LOS Bo AAO 8 7 0 TOY ACT Lobby ueame rga wl Ou true TANCES Ib lglony 2M ww ww ww ww user password omae tone L92 LOB 2 38 7 NC ws ww wu 0 0 false false false false wu WAGI koo 2 Z2QLL O2Z O2 O sie 23 Lobby 2 mjpeg policy_name Arecont AV2805 TRE camctg version m Oe active true name Arecont AV2805 description AV2805 model AV2805 manufacturer Arecont Vision pool user_name SERN password video_capture_url Wisiewyere LO Gs dl AAS 25H Biches live_view_url Wires LOA 168
23. gt Click Save Rimage will be activated as an option in the Where do you want to export Details The client computer s view of the path from which Rimage gets the label file for the discs to be burned Client computer refers to the computer on which the Buffalo Surveillance Server client is running a For Buffalo Surveillance Server to interact with the disc label that Rimage will use when creating discs the disc label must already be created The number of user defined fields 0 30 Use these fields to add label merge text to the label that will be used for your media Every field you define here will be added to Export Job Configuration where you can define the contents of each field vits pe lf you enter a number manually you must press the Tab key or the Enter key for the new number to take effect a Ensure that the fields you enter here match the fields on the disc label Rimage will use If the fields do not match disc labels will not print correctly Check this box to keep the same values for all logged in users who use Buffalo Surveillance Server on the current computer the files field in Export Job Configuration Set User Preferences Use the User Preferences window to define some default settings such as if tool tips display if a time code displays in the Media Viewer where the cache folder is located and how large the cache folder is gt In the tool bar of the main window click Tools gt U
24. gt To select the clip you want to export place the cursor where you want the clip for export to begin and then click the left scissor icon then place the cursor where you want the clip for export to end and then click the right scissor icon You can repeat this process to export as many clips from a file as you need However before selecting and exporting a second clip from a file you will need to export the currently selected clip by selecting Export gt Once you have selected the part of the video you want to export click Export The clip will be sent to the Export Queue Export Queue pE wt Q pe Once a clip is in the Export Queue you still have the option of changing which part of the video will be exported Simply click the video in the Export Queue The Media Viewer will again appear After you have made your desired changes click Commit to save changes and then close the Media Viewer window gt Once you have selected all of the videos and files you want to export and they are in the Export Queue click Export at the top of the main window to activate the Export window Follow the directions in the next section Set Export Options and Export Video Files to complete the export process Metadata Extensions Configuration Extended metadata searching in the Surveillance Video Manager requires metadata that can be collected at ingest only if MetadataExtensions cfg is configured correctly for C
25. lt ss gt summary lt Boolean gt system_info lt Boolean gt Default false The path at which the copy of the low resolution proxy video will be saved Default path Enables user to save a preview image at the path entered in save_preview_image_dir_pn Valid values true false Default false The path at which the copy of the preview image will be saved Default path Used only in the policy file The days on which the job will run Use to indicate days that the job will not run For example if the job is to run on Thursday you would enter t Default mtwtfss Used only in the policy file Specifies the time the job should start for each defined start day in start_days Default 00 00 00 midnight Used only in the policy file Specifies the date and time at which the job will be stopped The date and time entered is relative to the start of the job R relative to the start of the job Default RO no stop time Prints the start and finish times of the job and the final statistics to the file indicated by the list_pn option above Valid values true false Default true Ingests system info and other system states Valid values true false throttle lt setting gt timestamp lt alpha gt type lt alpha gt update_run_record lt Boolean gt ves lt alpha gt lt max num files gt version lt number gt Default fa
26. no gt load from mail slot lt yes no gt Argument quit reload lt arguments gt Description e if loading from mailslot mailslot loc e if not loading from mailslot storage loc prepare media now lt yes no gt Arguments for a tape Vault with no mailslot media name Barcode ID description storage pool content searching file de duplication storage loc prepare media now lt yes no gt Arguments for a hard disk Vault media name description storage pool media size content searching file de duplication if not in default location store media in default location lt yes no gt prepare media now lt yes no gt Exits the application Reloads media for the selected Vault Valid arguments media name force reindex of media lt yes no gt Argument secure lt Boolean gt select lt Vault name gt shut lt type of shutdown gt stat timeout lt number gt unload lt arguments gt Vaults vexer lt arguments gt Description Secures unsecures the selected Vault from any media eject or load commands You must have administrator rights to execute this command Valid values e on e off Selects the Vault that will be operated upon Closes the selected Vault You must have administrator access to execute this command Valid values e extended Closes the Vault after all clients and callbacks have been serviced Closes all open databases no
27. true false Default false Currently not supported Creates job history files for each job Valid values true false Default false The maximum number of concurrent files that can be sent Default 1 A description of the policy Default blank Prints diagnostic information to the file indicated by the list_pn option below Valid values true false Default false Specifies which directories to include Multiple dir_spec options can be specified The dir_spec check is made for every directory found This includes the directories contained in the pathname list that the job will traverse Default any dis play_only lt Boolean gt dst_local_only lt Boolean gt dst_media_name lt character string gt dst_media_speed lt character string gt dst_media_type lt character string gt Causes job to search for but not store targeted files Lists the files that would have been ingested Valid values true false Default false Causes job to use only a Vault local to the computer from which service is running Valid values true false Default false Specifies by name the destination media to be used If you don t specify a value in this option the Buffalo Surveillance Server uses the first available unit of media Default any Specifies the destination media to be used according to media speed Valid values e S0 S10 e unspecified
28. 3 2 Licensee may make one 1 copy of the Softw are for archival purposes Licensee may use the Documentation only in connection w ith Licensee s use of the Softw are as authorized in Section 3 1 above Licensee shall have no right to reproduce modify transfer disclose or distribute any Documentation 3 3 Licensee shall not and shall not permit any third party to a reverse engineer disassemble create derivative works and or modify the Softw are b except as specifically set forth below in section 3 4 assign rent lease sell transfer or sublicense the Softw are c electronically transfer or transmit the Softw are d translate the Softw are into another computer language or e copy or otherwise reproduce the Softw are or Documentation other than as specifically authorized in this Section 3 4 Sublicense Licensee may sublicense the Softw are to another party provided that such sublicense is granted on the same terms and conditions as are set forth herein It is the sole responsibility of the Licensee to obtain acceptance of these terms and conditions from any party to whom the Softw are is sublicensed In order to constitute a validly sublicensed copy the Softw are must be reproduced in its entirety and without modification including but not limited to any copyright notice serial number and any other notice affixed thereto 4 OWNERSHIP NOTICE 4 1 The Softw are and Documentation and all intellectual property containe
29. Default Value lt character string gt BlankValueOk lt Boolean gt Description Default The value that will be loaded into the control by default Valid values the number of the entry in the pull down list Default the first choice listed a If the DefaultValue for a Choice block is greater than the number of Choices entered the entire MetadataExtensions block will be ignored The tooltip for the control Default A choice statement that can be selected Must have at least one Choice Can be reused as many times as needed The metadata item s name Required Default The Query type The label for the control as it will appear in the application Default The value that will be loaded into the control by default Valid value a string Default Indicates whether the value may be left blank Valid for String and Pathname only Query block Type Spin String Valid Token Values Description lt character string gt Name lt character string gt Type Spin Label lt character string gt Default Value lt number gt Description lt character string gt LowerLimit lt number gt UpperLimit lt number gt Name lt character string gt Description Valid values true false Default true The tooltip for the control Default The metadata item s name Required Default The Query type The la
30. Description Barcode ID Storage Pool j lt unnamed gt v Size GB R Content Searching Digital Fingerprinting File De duplication Description Enable Security Storage Pool lt unnamed gt v Owner name Domain Users ESC Content Searching Digital Fingerprinting File De duplication Enable Additional Permissions Rights Name Type Full Control Everyone Everyone Security Owner DATE name Domain Users ESC Media Location When to Prepare Additional Permissions Store media in default location v Prepare media at next use v Rights Name Type Enter Pathname rul Control Everyone Everyone Cancel Media Location When to Prepare Load unknown media v Prepare media at next use W Choose Media bi y e vae e N Y Ta on me r Prepare Media window Prepare media window for hard disk media for tape media gt In the Prepare Media window enter values in the fields listed below Only Media Name and Size are required The names you enter for Media Name and Storage Pool appear in the Source tab of Data Service Policiesh7A as well as the Destination tabs of Camera policies 49 and Data Service Policies he Field Description This is the name the Information Repository will use when referencing this media The name is displayed on all media referencing interfaces and reports It is best to use a descriptive name For example y
31. M Remove selected Camera Do you want to add an additional camera Ores No gt The cameras added during the wizard session are listed To remove any camera select it and then click the Remove Selected Camera button gt If you do not want to add another camera select No To add another camera select Yes in order to cycle through the wizard again Click Next gt If you have no more cameras to add the Ready to Save Camera Configurations and Recording Schedules window appears Ready to Save Camera Configurations and Recording Schedules Click Finish to save the Following cameras Rear Entrance at 125 56 2 56 scheduled on M W F 07 00 00 10 00 00 x Remove Selected Camera TION ek ek anede R an AA A A a taa he e A aAA a Am n na aa AD ee Bom A gt The list of cameras ready for saving is displayed To remove any camera select it and then click the Remove Selected Camera button gt Click Finish The Add Camera Wizard closes and the focus is in the main Camera Policies application window wile pe Through configuring a camera and setting a schedule for it to record you created a new recording policy that is listed on the left side of the main Camera Policies application Add an IP Camera Standard Mode The Add New Camera Wizardls53 generally provides the quickest and easiest way to set up an IP camera and start to record video into the Buffalo Surveillance Server Information Re
32. Sensitivity Language Activity imihia About View All Windows View Selected Window Video stop Play 7 fps l San Magista mihn nanie Agantant aanta mianntan dndn aan andan aaRS wn Do ae Sadha MDA adn th Adian aito naan an nA a a hn mae hh a Each camera supports one motion detection area This is the part of the camera s field of view that is covered by motion detection By default the entire field of view is selected You can change the covered area to suit your needs by dragging the borders of the motion detection area frame titled SoleraTec_me above and the entire frame itself so that it covers the area that you want monitored for motion gt Adjust the following parameters to suit your needs AN By default Include is selected and the motion detection area is titled SoleraTec_me Do not change these values Field Function Object Size Enables you to determine how large or small a moving object must be in order to trigger motion detection History Enables you to determine the number of frames against which motion will be measured Sensitivity Enables you to determine how much change will trigger a motion even Displays a histogram of motion activity The amount of activity displayed will be determined by the settings you choose gt When you are finished changing your Motion Detection settings be sure to click Save Supported Cameras T
33. Setting Resolution High original size Medium 320x240 Low 100x75 gt To save an additional copy of the preview image file to a location outside of the Information Repository select Save copy of preview image and type a path after Location Override original file permissions to allow any user to retrieve The Buffalo Surveillance Server adheres to the level of rights and access control that is set for the OS from which files are being ingested Buffalo Surveillance Server adheres to the level of rights and access control that is set for the camera from which files are being captured or extracted Typically only the OS owner and author of the files or a system administrator with Administrative or Root level access privileges will be able to view open and retrieve their own files in the Information Repository gt To grant permission to any users who might want to retrieve files check Override original file permissions to allow any user to retrieve a This feature negates all protection associated with your files anyone in your network environment using the Buffalo Surveillance Server will be able to access your stored files when this feature is activated User Preferences Set Default User Preferences The User Preferences window enables you to set defaults for the application The fields are identical to those on the Processing tab the choices you make in this dialog become the defaults each time you use the Processing Tab See
34. The Recording Schedule window appears Aten ee Aut aA autem eM ale Aft fa el na N Mei emia Mi A a ial a Recording Schedule When do you want to record video Always At selected times SN ae cas Beall tle a N n 10 Sie Geld oe AD and RS Gon Sn Dn tata A nds 0h me t a a MMe BDA ate fe De Bata gt Select Always to record continuously Video is captured into the Buffalo Surveillance Server Information Repository in 5 minute clips gt Click Next The Recording Computer screen appears A Recording Computer What computer will be used For recording video Select Computer w ee tae ne ndan t iada aina ahinan ee ee adin dai i aali o gt Select the computer that should be used for recording video from the drop down list gt Click Next The Ready to Add window appears Ready to Add Review the summary below before clicking Next to add the camera Camera name Rear Entrance Description Panasonic camera at back door onto Ash Street Manufacturer Panasonic Model BL C1114 IP Address 126 34 52 88 User Name lt Empty gt Password lt Empty gt Schedule M W F 07 00 00 10 00 00 Recording Computer Diego gt Review the information To make changes use the Back button to go to the appropriate wizard screen gt Click Next The L
35. What is the name of this Enter a name for the Vault or use the default if the field Vault is already populated with a name you want to use gt Click Next gt The Device window appears Use to select a tape drive or tape library depending on selection in the Description window Device Which tape library do you want to use select one Devices Found lt No storage devices detected on this computer gt a Look for Devices How much memory should be used for each data stream cache 10 00m8 Where can temporary files be stored Browse C fPragram Files WorkingCache2 How much disk space can be used for storing temporary files 100 00GB v hts hn nen er tects hed eMac Mais rt Start tte N St a lt Back next gt cancel ESSE EE AE E O Field Directions gt Select a device If no devices are listed ensure that the tape drive is connected to your computer and powered on If you are adding a Vault to a Windows computer ensure that the device or devices are disabled in the Windows Device Managered Then click Look for Devices Found Devices to refresh the list Some tape libraries do not support automatic detection of their tape drives In such cases the phrase drives need to be identified will appear to the right of the device name When you click Next you will need to select the drives Field How much memory should be used for eac
36. Where activity logs record all Buffalo Surveillance Server activity error logs record only events that have gone wrong Be sure to remember where you are storing your error logs so that you can refer to them should an error condition occur during Buffalo Surveillance Server processing gt Click OK to save the new settings Notifications Use the Notifications tab to set how Buffalo Surveillance Server event notifications are published and to enable the selected Vault s email notification set the email recipient and set the mail server address Events include anything of interest for managing a Vault including Vault start Vault stop media requests etc Notifications are always enabled gt Open the Vault Admin application In the left pane of the Vault Admin 204 main window select the Vault g to modify gt Click eg to launch the lt Vault Name gt Properties window or right click the Vault name and select Properties The Properties window features several tabs each responsible for some aspect of Vault functionality It opens to the General tab gt Select the Notifications tab General Device Database License Security Logs Notifications Diagnostics Email Notification Enable email notifications Email recipient sample company com Mail server address clark Send Test Email Where events are sent Computer Console v Computer Console E i Event Logging f j
37. Where should the activity log be stored gt Use lt Browse to launch the Activity Log Location window Then select a location Field How large can the activity log grow Overwrite the activity log when it reaches maximum size Where should the error log be stored Meaning and Directions This option defines the maximum size to which the activity log will be permitted to grow It is important to limit the size of the activity log because it may be difficult to find needed the information in an overly large activity log This option enables you to overwrite the existing activity log Overwriting the activity log prevents activity log proliferation If you select No for this option a new activity log will be created whenever the current activity log reaches the maximum size you defined in the previous field Error logs are created only when a Buffalo Surveillance Server Vault encounters a problem Error logs include warning and Vault start and Vault stop information Buffalo Surveillance Server supports error logging for every Vault in your Information Repository and error logging is always enabled This field enables you to define where error logs will be stored Where activity logs record all Buffalo Surveillance Server activity error logs record only events that have gone wrong Be sure to remember where you are storing your error logs so that you can refer to them should an error condition occur during B
38. and the time when each capture began Additional information includes Camera Description Host Frame Size Begin Date and Run Time Beneath the camera and video information you will notice a sunken horizontal bar This is a histogram When motion detection information has been captured by a motion detection enabled camera supported by the Buffalo Surveillance Server the histogram indicates the motion detection threshold was reached It enables you to skip past sections of video in which no motion was detected When supported motion detection cameras are utilized this bar is populated with histogram information and will look something like this Line height and color indicate the magnitude of the motion detected based on how your motion detection enabled camera is configured For information about how Buffalo Surveillance Server automatically configures supported cameras see the Customization Settings section titled AXIS Camera Motion Detection Configuration When no motion has reached the detection threshold the histogram will be empty Where no motion detection data has been gathered whether because the camera does not support motion detection or had a technical problem the histogram will be filled with a black bar gt In the Search Results frame click the thumbnail image for the file you want to view or click a point of interest in the histogram Either of these actions will open the Media Viewer with the original video file rea
39. change 225 Domain 223 226 Everyone 223 226 Group 223 226 User 223 226 Rimage Configuration 278 Robotic Arms 262 RPC Calls In 262 RPC Calls Out 262 RPC mechanism message 233 RPC Packets In 262 RPC Packets Out 262 Rules for File Filters and Directory Filters 183 agu Sample Data Service Policy 174 Sample Target amp Process Policy 83 102 Scheduling tab Camera Policies 129 Data Service Policies 193 scheduling windows 386 2012 SoleraTec LLC SCSI devices on Windows disable 369 381 SCSI requirements 340 Search 273 Search Results 286 Secure Vault 209 Secure Unsecure Vault 209 Secured 262 Security 222 Serial Number 262 shadow hard disk reload media 254 shadow hard disk media 250 load 252 Short Message Detail 234 Shutdown Fast 210 Shutdown Vault Emergency Halt 210 Graceful Shutdown 210 preferred manner 210 Shutdown Fast 210 Size 264 Prepare media 237 245 Software License Agreement 8 Software Version 262 Source 160 Source tab Data Service Policies 175 Speed 264 stackers requirements tape 340 Standard Message Detail 234 start vault manually 258 Status 262 264 Storage Pool 128 178 192 264 Prepare media 237 245 Storage Slots 262 Stored Files Completeness and Accuracy 47 158 Stored or Accessed 181 System requirements Network Protocol 340 sT en Tape devices message 233 2012 SoleraTec LLC tape library add 359 license 359 tape media load 253 tape requirements autoloaders 340
40. parameters here If an invalid IP address or computer name is entered email notifications do not work Define where events are logged Meaning and Directions Computer Console causes events to be logged ina console that appears on the computer monitor It remains open as long as the Vault is running If the Vault is stopped the console disappears If the Vault is restarted the console disappears and then reappears Window causes events to be logged in a window that appears on the computer monitor This window remains open as long as the Vault is running If the Vault is stopped the window disappears If the Vault is restarted the window disappear and then reappears vits S you select Computer Console or Window in a Windows environment configure Vault service on Windows to open a window on the desktop for diagnostic messages For directions see section Configure Vault Service on Windows to Open a Window on the Desktop for Diagnostic Messages Once configured Vault activity displays A If you close a window or console the Vault stops Buffalo Surveillance Server does not operate without running Vaults File will cause events to be logged to a file If you select this option you will need to enter or lt Browse to the location to which you want events logged gt Click Next gt The Ready to Add window appears Use to review the parameters for the new Vault before actually adding the Vault
41. simply select the filter by single clicking it and then click 2 Examples of File Filters and Directory Filters Suppose you have a directory that contains several different files types and you want to process all of the files in the directory except jpg files To do this you can create an exclude filter for files with a jpg extension X ipg In this example X denotes exclude asterisk is the wildcard symbol for all jpg is the file extension that is subject to the prefixed symbols In the table below the column on the left lists all of the files in a hypothetical directory The column in the center shows the filter that will be applied The column on the right shows which files will actually be processed Notice that none of the jpg files are processed Filesin specified directory Elevator design 12502 vsd Elevator design rev 20502 vsd Elevator design rev 21502 vsd Part345X xls Part236 xls Part 532 xls Ref guide rev21502 doc Ref guide rev21802 doc Install guide 21502 ind lllustration 532 psd lllustration 236 psd Vacation 1 jpg Vacation 2 jpg Vacation 3 jpg Filter X ipg Files that are processed Elevator design 12502 vsd Elevator design rev 20502 vsd Elevator design rev 21502 vsd Part345X xls Part236 xls Part 532 xls Ref guide rev21502 doc Ref guide rev21802 doc Install guide 21502 ind lllustration 532 psd Illustration 236 psd Filter strings may contain a variety of wildcard sy
42. supports a Hard Disk The Buffalo Surveillance Server uses an assigned portion of a computer s file system disk space when a hard disk based Vault is set up Space in this dynamic media environment can be added or removed very easily using the media management tools in Vault Admin Tape Stackers Changers Auto loaders and Libraries A tape automation system is a single unit of equipment with one or more tape drives and internal shelves or slots in which several units of media are stored Tape automation systems contain robotic systems that move media between storage slots and the drives These units range from single drive systems with just a few tape slots to large truck shipped systems that can accommodate over 100 drives and thousands of tapes Tape automation systems fit into two basic categories e Stackers and changers are sequential automation systems They are designed to change tapes in a sequence from 1 through x e Auto loaders and libraries move media as tasked by the host system SCSI 2 Compliant Auto Loaders amp Libraries This category encompasses almost all tape automation systems created within the last decade Single standalone Tape Drives This device manages a single tape at a time without using robotics Installation Hardware amp Software Requirements Windows Server Not applicable Client e OS Requirements Windows Server 2003 SP2 Windows XP SP3 Windows Vista SP2 32 bit and
43. the failure is most likely due to an unexpected condition such as there already being a copy of the files on the target computer Mitigate most error conditions by setting additional export parameters For example to overwrite files on a networked computer select Always overwrite files or Overwrite file only if the stored file is newer Export to FTP site gt Click Export at the top of the window The Export window is displayed The left hand pane enables you to specify the export job configuration Export Job Configuration FTP site user name ion Folder at FTP site bd Start Export Fields for Export to FTP site Job Configuration gt Set the criteria for the following fields Field Meaning and Directions Define where files are exported to Export Destination gt Select the FTP site option Field Meaning and Directions py When FTP site is selected the fields available change to support FTP A user defined field that associates a name with the job Job name The name entered here appears in job logs gt Type a job name The FTP host name or address FTP site address gt Type the host name or address User name required to log into the FTP site FTP site user name gt Type the user name to log into the site Password required to log into the FTP site FTP site password gt Type the password to log into the site Destination directory to store
44. 100 false false SR Logs P act EmdProcessNone FgProcessNone true true Medium false ww true Camera Tab Designate the Camera This tab enables you to select or enter the target camera for your recording policy This may be either an RTSP IP enabled camera or one managed by a VMS system A Video capture from VMS systems may not be available depending on your hardware device and depending on your product license A To be able to view and record live video feeds you must ensure that RTSP is enabled on your IP camera See your camera s documentation for details on enabling RTSP eS This topic assumes that you are using Standard Mode for Camera Policies If you are using Advanced Model51 see Camera Tab Advanced Modelt08 caner Name Arecontl a Description JAVZISSDN Manufacturer Arecont Wsion Model AVZISSDN Recording Computer gt ry TS3 Buffalo not found The first field of this tab displays all configured RTSP and VMS managed camera targets If you want to add and configure a camera for use with multiple policies see Add Configure and Delete Cameras 3 gt Select the camera to be used for this policy The Camera Info fields are populated automatically with the information entered when the camera was initially configured Add Camera Information gt The camera options available depend on the Camera selected siis py If you need to change the conf
45. 64 bit Windows 7 SP1 32 bit and 64 bit Windows Server 2008 SP2 32 bit and 64 bit e Processor Requirements Intel Dual Core 2 20 GHz or better e Hard Drive Requirements 10 GB of available space to install and run the product Memory Requirements 2 GB of RAM Third Party Requirements Apple QuickTime 7 7 1 VideoLAN s VLC media player VLC 1 1 11 Apple QuickTime is recommended for viewing production videos and VLC is recommended for viewing surveillance videos eX It you are using VLC media player it must be installed in the default location Macintosh ServerNot applicable Client e OS Requirements Mac OS X 10 5 8 or newer e Processor Requirements Intel Dual Core 2 20 or better e Hard Drive Requirements 10 GB of available space to install and run the product e Memory Requirements 2 GB of RAM Third party Recommendation VideoLAN media player VLC 1 1 10 TLK eX It you are using VLC media player it must be installed in the Applications folder Linux ServerNot applicable Client e OS Requirements Red Hat 7 2 or better Fedora Core 12 or better e Processor Requirements Intel Pentium IV 3 40 GHz or better e Hard Drive Requirements 10 GB of available space to install and run the product e Memory Requirements 2 GB of RAM e Third party Requirements None Product Licensing Get started with Buffalo Surveillance Server by purchasing a product license Product License Product li
46. A Source Criteria Destination Scheduling Advanced gt dA Derno__ComplianceClean vault By Demo__DailyBackups2PersonalFiles lt lt any gt b Demo__DailyBackups2WorkingPool D Demo__Inactive2LongTerm Media Name AT Demo__PersonalFilesClean lt any gt lt I Demo__Virtualization2LongTerm dy Demo__WorkingPool2Compliance Storage Pool lt ud Demo__WorkingPoolZLongTerm Buffaloss ude Demo__WorkingPoolClean ABP Evac_Purge Media Type Media Speed lt any gt Y lt any gt v lt gt ar rr PE a ee Pie a Pe R SFE ee iz wus v py A triangular caution symbol as superimposed on a policy icon in the left frame indicates that the policy is not active Offline Media During a data service job offline media will be used only if Include offline files is selected on the Advanced tabh If Include offline files is not selected attempting to use media that is offline may result in a No resources available error if suitable media cannot be found Load Balancing You can denote a specific storage pool as part of the destination criteria for jobs The Buffalo Surveillance Server s clients locate the Vault or Vaults that contains the denoted storage pool and stores the defined files to it If there are multiple Vaults with media belonging to the storage pool defined for the initial job clients pick the one with the most available free space on it This keeps the entire Information Reposito
47. Alternative Frame Size 0 gt x a Enable PTZ Enable stream over TCP Recording Computer lt notselected gt v Cancel Help V Active OK mE PARI EPA eR PS Bt PO PO PP ee E a gt Fill in or select the following fields as needed Field Results A user defined value used in the menus and configuration file this is the name of the camera Name and or Location The name entered is for identification purposes only It is best to use a naming convention and a descriptive name Description A user defined value used in the menus and configuration file this is a description of the camera Field Camera Pool Manufacturer Model Video Capture URL Live View URL Results A camera pool is a user defined virtual grouping of cameras to search video from specified cameras For example a camera pool called Doors that includes all of the cameras that cover the doors of your establishment When you need to see who s come or gone select the Doors camera pool as a search criteria and only video captured from cameras in the Doors camera pool are included There is no limit to the number of camera pools your Buffalo Surveillance Server solution may have The manufacturer of the camera The Video Capture URL populates automatically A user defined value this is the camera s model number Video Capture URL populates automatically The
48. Arecont Office Arecont Vision AVZ21SSDN rtsp 192 168 1 231 h264 lt not complete gt lt none gt lt not selected gt a is AVS AVS Uriel Mpix 133 rtsp 192 168 5 238 mpeg lt not complete gt lt none gt lt not selected gt Axis 210 Rear View milestone 192 168 3 13 Axis 21 lt not complete gt lt none gt lt not selected gt Axis Front Parking AXIS 210 rtsp 192 168 5 226 mpeg4 medi lt not complete gt lt none gt lt not selected gt 4 Axis Lobby AXIS 210 rtsp 192 168 5 237 mpeg4 medi lt not complete gt lt none gt lt not selected gt Axis211_RearDeck AXIS 211 rtsp 192 168 1 229 mpeg4 medi lt not complete gt lt none gt lt not selected gt Axis M1011 AXIS M1011 rtsp 192 168 5 116 axis media lt not complete gt lt none gt lt not selected gt Basler 1300 Front Basler BIP 1300c rtsp 192 168 5 100 mpeg lt not complete gt lt none gt lt not selected gt Basler 1300 Basler Front Parking Basler BIP 1000c rtsp 192 168 5 224 mpeg lt not complete gt lt none gt lt not selected gt Basler 1000 RaslerAdnic Rasler RIP Adf rksn ff197 1AA 5 147imnand gnnt camnlete gt lt nane gt ennt selerted gt A Camera Allocation In Camera Configurations window from the Tools menu select Camera Allocation This is an informational window to show how many cameras are licensed how many cameras are being used and how many cameras are available for each recording computer Use this in
49. BA Media BuffaloSS_1 BuffaloSS_2 BuffaloSS_3 BuffaloSS_4 i snag A Drives a atn gt Click the plus box in front of a Vault name to open the subcategories associated with the Vault and to activate the icons in the Vault Admin toolbar 205 Certain icons in the toolbar will be active only when a Vault Media or Drive is selected Advanced View Some features within Vault Admin have an advanced view option that presents details about the item being queried gt Select View gt Advanced from the Vault Admin menu to activate this option Basic Media Concepts py IMPORTANT NOTE If you are using the Buffalo Surveillance Server Vaults and media are preconfigured and prepared automatically there is no need to perform any Vault operations The information in this Vault Admin section is provided for information only Buffalo Surveillance Server Vaults use media to store all files that are protected and managed by the Information Repository You use Vault Admin to manage media in your Information Repository It is important to understand some basic concepts about media before the actual steps of media preparation and management are attempted Buffalo Surveillance Server managed media can be in a physical form such as individual computer digital tape cartridges or it can be in a virtual form such as a portion of hard disk assigned for use by the Information Repository The list of media that the Buffalo Surveillance
50. Days ss4 window will appear Select the days you want jobs to run Y gt Adjacent to the At what time of the day text box click to set the specific time of day at which you want the job to run The Timebs window will appear Select a start time gt Determine whether the job should be stopped before it is completed Set a job to stop before it is completed if another process will otherwise conflict with the Buffalo Surveillance Server job If you select Yes the Durationks window will appear I Option 2 Repeatedly at a defined interval This option enables you to create jobs that will run repeatedly at the interval that you set for as long as the policy is active To stop a policy that has been set to run repeatedly you must deactivate change or delete the policy When you select this option the scheduling tab will look as follows When should the job run Repeatedly at a defined interval How often should this job run Every 48 Hour s lt r r r S Should the job be stopped before it is completed No lt soir totic teas te Themen Alt Mts nto Y gt Adjacent to the How often should this job run text box click to set the interval at which you want the job to run The Time Interval Bs window will appear Select an interval gt Determine whether the job should be stopped before it is completed Set a job to stop before it is completed if another process will otherwise conflict
51. Default unspecified Specifies the media type to be used for a job Valid values e Hdisk hard disk e 8mm Eight millimeter tape e Dds Digital data storage Dit Digital linear tape e Ait Advanced intelligent tape SuperAit Vxa Exabyte Vxa tape e Travan Travan tape e Lto Linear tape open MagOptical Read write optical dst_storage_pool lt alpha gt dst_vault_name lt character string gt dst_volume_format dst_volume_name dst_volume_pack dtu_type lt alpha gt lt yyyy gt lt mm gt lt dd gt lt hh gt lt mm gt lt ss gt or dtu_type L lt level gt e NullDevice e unspecified Default unspecified Specifies the name of the destination storage pool Use for no storage pool name Default any Specifies the destination Vault name If not specified the first available Vault will be used Default any Currently not supported Currently not supported Currently not supported Ingests files based on time and date or job level Valid values e AO Absolute Old Selects files with a dtu date_time_use equal to or before the specified date Enter the year as a 4 digit number e AN Absolute New Selects files with a dtu equal to or after the specified date Enter the year as a 4 digit number RO Relative Old Selects files with a dtu equal to or before the relative specified date RN Relative New S
52. Devices Found lt No storage devices detected on this computer gt lt gt How much memory should be used for each data stream cache 10 00MB Where can temporary files be stored j C JProgram Files Workingcachez How much disk space can be used for storing temporary files i 100 0068 v lt Back __Next gt cance i ee gt Enter the following in the Device window Field Directions gt Select a device If no devices are listed ensure that the tape drive is connected to your computer and powered on If you are adding a Vault to a Windows computer ensure that the device is disabled in the Windows Device Managerbed Then click Look for Devices to refresh the list Devices Found gt Select How much memory should be used for each data stream cache This setting defines how much How much memory virtual memory is set aside for incoming and outgoing should be used for each data during file storage and retrieval A larger cache data stream cache may improve performance but will do so at the expense of using more virtual memory A selection of 10 MB is usually sufficient Field Where can temporary files be stored How much disk space can be used for storing temporary files Directions This setting enables you to define where the working cache will be located The default location is lt install dir gt WorkingCache When Buffalo Surveillance Server is processing file
53. FReload M To lie TETA cecsesceseustesanbavents sh cdtasi lea sdeveastiieadanaves MJ AG We eases e205 aches aces ncecea lect axers suncceast ch yess cheseccadus saat dsaecacecestaessascuseescetstesefaaccutateseyessesdacqczscstactccazsaeetss Erase O i E A E EEE Start Vaults Manually ooi Col e e E ptions Address T E E E S Options Communications Timeout E De tals a E E E EA E E E E WAP ORATION iieri antarana aiana aaaea aaa Ara aA EaR A Riera Edara anta aAa SEACA ia kaadaa HAAVA KA maA FEARS TA EE EAKE RdA na Current Clients Media conca a E EEE RAE DAE E EEEN EEA E ETER E E ET ETTE Vault Admin Command Line for Advanced Users VaultAdmMinCI s ssussussusuureurenenruneuneunnnnnunnunnnnnnrnnnnnnnn 267 Search for Review and Export Surveillance Videos and View Live Feeds SVM 273 How to Search for amp Export Videos OvervieW a essnusnnnnnennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 276 Launch the Surveillance Video Manager cccccccecsseeseceseeeeceaseeeeeauseeeeeaaeeeesnagseeeenans 277 Configure Rimage to Publish VideOS c s ssssseeecececcsessseeeeecececeaceaseeeeeseeeecacenseeeeeees 278 Set User Preferente Si ociisiciscscesidecsveshiecessatiecveiekisenseshdeeus ebieesesatleckuevbiseustusdeestisbinestartdecseasdle 281 View Live Video FOCUS i ccisacceinck caedeiccetsceececeateiacaes nee deat tense raceenieneeetsoecne Sees eee 284 Search for Review and Select Vide OS cccceeeecceeseceeececeeeeeeeeeeee
54. IMAH 254 sche mgmt_url Wines 192 168 1 246 frame_width 0 frame_height 0 ptz_enable false live_view_enable true mgmt_enable true stream_over_tcp false owner u end of object rule for Camera Arecont AV2805 Create Modify or Delete Recording Policies Recording policies run on an assigned computer They define when video is recorded or captured and where it goes in the Information Repository Policies contain process parameters that include media camera and data destination values The policy you create is listed in the left panel of the Camera Policies window in the policy selection frame and is saved as part of the active configuration oe Recording policies are visible to all computers in the Information Repository that are running the Camera Policies application and that have appropriate permissions If at any time after you add a policy you find that it no longer meets your needs you can always modify or delete it by following the directions below pe Duplicate policy names are permitted gt Create a Policy ss gt Modify a Policy se gt Delete a Policy 87 Creating a Recording Policy Overview For most users the quickest and easiest way to set up a camera and schedule and record video is to use the Add Camera Wizardl 53 If you cannot use the Add Camera Wizard for example if your camera information is not included in the manufacturer or model list you can create a recording
55. Next gt cancel Bat PnP Am em a Pee arm SR gt Enter or select the following in the Logs window Field Meaning and Directions This checkbox will enable activity logging and the activity log fields listed below If unchecked Buffalo Surveillance Server will not create activity logs Buffalo Surveillance Server supports event auditing providing a security audit trail through activity logs Activity logs include following events Vault start Vault stop file read file write file create file delete media load Enable activity logging media unload and media erase For these events the following information is recorded name and IP of the user who executed the event and the date and time the event was executed Activity logging is optional Buffalo Surveillance Server creates activity logs in tab delimited format Consequently logs can be imported into any application that supports the tab delimited format such as Microsoft Excel Field Where should the activity log be stored How large can the activity log grow Overwrite the activity log when it reaches maximum size Where should the error log be stored Meaning and Directions This field defines to where your activity logs will be written gt Use lt Browse to launch the Activity Log Location window Then select a location This option defines the maximum size to which the activity log will be permitted to grow It is important t
56. Policies Create Policies to Manage Data in the Information Repository Once files are in the Information Repository you can use Data Service Policies to create policies to migrate duplicate or purge them Policies control which files are affected during a particular migrate replicate or purge job when the job starts where the files are to be stored how often the job runs when it stops and all other aspects of the job Initial and subsequent storage devices do not have to be of the same technology so you can easily build configurations that include disk to tape D2T disk to disk to tape D2D2T or virtually anything to anything Unlike other policies that run on the computer on which they are created every Data Service policy you create affects the entire Information Repository and all Data Service policies appear and can be edited in any instance of Data Service Policies Policies can be broad or narrow You can create replicate policies that provide multiple instances of the stored files that can be accessed for retrieval Or you can create migrate policies that move files from one Vault to another For files that are no longer needed you can create purge policies to manage the scheduled purging thus keeping your Vaults free from unnecessary clutter A single Vault can contain any number of policies that when coordinated migrate and duplicate files through a complex storage hierarchy that can span multiple sites a The Data Service
57. RTSP URL of the camera that enables the Buffalo Surveillance Server to capture video feeds gt In the first text box displays the IP address for the selected camera The second text box populates automatically with a known camera manufacturer and model Test the RTSP URL by clicking Test If the test fails see Troubleshoot Camera Connection Problems for troubleshooting steps If the camera is not listed and you are unsure of your camera s RTSP URL check with the camera s manufacturer View live video feeds using the Live Viewer application or the Surveillance Video Managerles4 By default this option is enabled The RTSP URL allows a live view from your camera gt In the first field enter the IP address or hostname for the selected camera The second field is populated automatically when you select a camera manufacturer and model You can also enter the entire URL manually You can test the RTSP URL by clicking Test If the test fails see Troubleshoot Camera Connection Problems for troubleshooting steps Field Management URL User Name Password Alternative Frame Size Enable PTZ Enable stream over TCP Recording Computer Active Results If your camera is not listed and you are unsure of your camera s RTSP URL check with your camera s manufacturer Enables camera management from a web browser when this type of functionality is supported by the camera If you select the checkbox the fields
58. Root Pathname Valid only at the beginning of a string Enable Transmission Optimization This feature enables the client to constantly monitor its processes and select the network transmission protocol that best suits the files being processed To get up to a 20 increase in performance it is generally best to leave this option checked However depending on your particular network configuration you may find that you can get better performance by un checking this option If your Information Repository seems to be slower than you would expect run a few timed tests to see which setting will work best for your Information Repository gt To enable this feature check Enable transmission optimization Maintain Client Vault Connection Vault connection sharing determines how many files are sent from the source Vault to the destination Vault in a single connection The higher the number of files or bytes transferred the longer the connection between the source and destination Vault will be maintained Access to a particular Vault resource Such as one drive of a multi drive storage device used by a process on one client will be restricted and inaccessible to other clients in the network for the duration of the connection To understand how this setting can affect a configuration imagine an environment where a single Vault with a single tape drive is used to service several Buffalo Surveillance Server clients When a client is configured w
59. Server can utilize is constantly being expanded and every type of media has features that make it suitable for a particular purpose For example hard disk is a good medium to initially process files to because there is no latency associated with it It is ready to accept data as it is sent from network clients and it can service several clients at the same time Media is organized hierarchically e The highest level of the hierarchy is the Vault itself e Media units are the next level and they coincide with logical media units such as individual tapes or portions of hard disks e The volume level is lowest Volumes are sections of media units They can be as large as the media itself or as small as desired On some media there can be one or several volumes on a unit There can be one or more units of media in a Vault There can also be multiple Vaults on a single host computer depending on its performance and resources The Buffalo Surveillance Server uses a concept called storage pools to describe one or more pieces of media that are linked together for a common use All Buffalo Surveillance Server managed media is configured with common elements including e Label e Header Data Storage Area e On Media Catalog e Physical tape Media and or Hard Disk Media e Virtual Media Media Retention and Purging Administrators can eliminate outdated data on media using any one of several methods The various methods are NOT restric
60. The deleted files will not be moved Or gt Check the checkbox to set the policy to manipulate files marked as deleted Vault Admin Overview Manage Vaults and Media pe IMPORTANT NOTE If you are using the Buffalo Surveillance Server Vaults and media are preconfigured and prepared automatically there is no need to perform any Vault operations The information in this Vault Admin section is provided for information only Vault Admin is used to manage Vaults and media in the Information Repository Install and use it anywhere in the network Understanding Vault operation is key to managing an Information Repository There are several facets to Vault management most having to do with preparing and managing media Vault Admin is designed to support the day to day tasks associated with managing Vaults See Basic Media Conceptsko to learn about storage media File View Actions Options Help ARH ESIISA QO Taea A Vault Name Type Status Secured Media FreeSpace Location S Test HardDisk Test T Test HardDisk HardDisk OK Yes 40 765 41GB 192 168 1 Z Information Current Clients A Media o Drives Virtual 01 Virtual 02 Virtual 03 Virtual 04 Virtual 05 Virtual 06 Virtual 07 Virtual 0s Virtual 09 gt Virtual 10 JIE AO a eee ew we ye ee esas The Vault Admin main window is divided into two panes e The left pane displays the list of the tracked Vaults and views like a common file manager
61. VMD area page for Position No 1 will appear VMD area for Position No 1 Area 1 Wnite 2 Blue 3 Green Status on OOFF oN OOFF ON OOFF Each color coded section represents one motion detection area You can define up to four areas ae wile Af you set Preset position select options settings on the VMD area tab will be ignored gt Change the covered areas to suit your needs by 1 deleting current areas and 2 creating new ones by dragging your cursor across the area you want covered gt Setting the Detection sensitivity gt Click SET to save and activate your settings Supported Cameras The Buffalo Surveillance Server currently supports all RTSP enabled Panasonic 202 series cameras Manage Data and the Information Repository Data Service Policies and Vault Admin This section covers the applications you need to manage the Information Repository and the data it contains This includes creating Data Service policies and managing devices and Vaults in the Information Repository e See Data Senice Policies Create Policies to Manage Data in the Information Repository h5 to learn how to use Data Service Policies to create powerful migrate duplicate and purge policies to automatically manage data in the Information Repository e See Vault Admin Manage Vaults amp Medial204 to learn basic media concepts as well as how to use Vault Admin to manage Vaults and media Data Service
62. Works in conjunction with camera_frame_width Default 0 The width of the video frame Works in conjunction with camera_frame_height Default 0 Enables SVM to receive and display live feeds from the camera Valid values true false Default true The RTSP URL used to live view video from the camera Default path The manufacturer of the camera Default Generic Enables camera management from a web browser when this type of functionality is supported by the camera Valid values true false Default true The URL used to manage the camera Default URL Token Value model lt character string gt name lt character string gt password lt character string gt policy_name lt camera name gt pool lt character string gt ptz_enable lt Boolean gt Description A user defined value this is the camera s model number Default Generic Required Must match the policy_name A user defined value used in the menus and configuration file this is the name of the camera Default The password for the camera when a password is required to access the camera Default Required Must match camera_name If you created your configuration using the Surveillance Video Manager this value is generated by the Surveillance Video Manager from camera_name Indicating the beginning of a camera block the name for the policy that defines camer
63. about how Buffalo Surveillance Server automatically configures supported cameras see the Customization Settings section titled AXIS Camera Motion Detection Configuration When no motion has reached the detection threshold the histogram will be empty Where no motion detection data has been gathered whether because the camera does not support motion detection or had a technical problem the histogram will be filled with a black bar 00 56 31 The pointer on the timeline indicates which part of the clip is being displayed Click hold and drag the pointer to progress or rewind the video Click to the left of the pointer to rewind the video one second at a time Click to the right of the pointer to advance the video one second at atime When you click and hold in either direction the pointer will move automatically one second at a time The number to the left is a time code that indicates where the pointer is in the video and which part is being displayed The number to the right indicates the total length of the video The vertical green line to the left indicates where the clip begins The vertical green line to the right indicates where the clip ends Only the segment of video between the vertical green lines will be exported By default the lines mark the beginning and the end of the video they can be adjusted using the scissor icons pe If you set the beginning of the clip to within one second of the beginning of the file and one
64. add the configurations for cameras managed by those systems to your Information Repository When you add camera configurations the Buffalo Surveillance Server tracks them and they are listed on the Camera tab of every Camera Policies application on any networked computer comprised by the Information Repository a Video capture from VMS systems may not be available depending on your hardware device and depending on your product license gt Add a Milestone managed Cameral71 gt Add an OnSSI managed Camera Configuration 74 Add a Milestone managed Camera Before you configure cameras managed by Milestone XProtect you ll need to know the name or the IP address of the server where your Milestone installation resides as well as a user name and password of a Basic User to access the Milestone database A Video capture from VMS systems may not be available depending on your hardware device and depending on your product license LS You must be in Advanced Model 51 to perform this procedure To add a Milestone managed camera gt From the View menu on the Camera Policies menu bar select Enable Advanced Mode gt From the toolbar click g to open the Camera Configurations window The Camera Configurations window appears File Edt Tools Help ll se fhad J Delte Camera Name Manufacturer Model Video Capture URL Status Camera Pool Recording Computer Description Axis 210 Rear View milestone 192 168 3 13 Axis 21 lt not com
65. at which the job will be stopped The date and time entered is relative to the start of the job Default 0 0 0 0 0 0 no stop time Prints the start and stop times and final statistics of the job to the file indicated by the list_pn option above Valid values true false Default true Throttling controls the amount of bandwidth used by jobs and therefore the speed at which files are sent to Vaults Throttle values are relative to Information Repository capacity and range from 1 to 100 A lower setting reduces the amount of available bandwidth that will be used Valid values 1 100 Default 100 The policy type of the policy file Only ds is valid for Data Service policies Specifies the number of files F or number of bytes S to store per single Vault connection Valid values e F files e S bytes e1 Default F500 The version number of the currently installed command line application Only the current version number is valid This number will change with new releases Currently not supported 1Note Timing tokens are mutually exclusive Only one timing token may be set In other words you may set either absolute_start or repeat_interval or start_days AND start_time Sample Data Service Policy If you were to export a policy it would look similar to the following Start of object rule for policy name Long Term Storage policy_name Long Term Storage type
66. available for the parameters you have chosen in the Vault Media Name or Storage Pool fields will be displayed If no Vault media or storage pool is chosen only the media types from media available within the Information Repository will be displayed Media Speed Storage technologies supported by the Buffalo Surveillance Server are categorized by their performance The Media Speed setting is useful for processing data of lower importance or less rigorous recovery time objectives Media Speed enables you to specify what media will be used based on media performance For example if S4 is an option and you select it only S4 media will be utilized pe Although only S4 media will be used the names displayed in the other fields will not change Hard disk is considered a high performance media and is assigned a high rating S8 Slower tape technologies are lower performance and are assigned a lower rating SO You can set either Media Type or Media Speed but not both gt Click the pull down control arrow under the Media Speed label and then select a performance rating The Buffalo Surveillance Server will display only the media speeds that are available for the parameters you have chosen in the Vault Media Name or Storage Pool fields If no Vault media or storage pool is chosen only the speeds from media available within the Information Repository will be displayed Miscellaneous Options gt Check Keep files grouped together
67. beginning of a string Ne Number of errors Nr Number of retries Nb Number of bytes written AN Number for files written Error Log Filename The Buffalo Surveillance Server creates an error log file whenever errors are encountered during a job Use it to assist you when troubleshooting problems that arise in the job The Error Log Filename text box can include literal file names or a combination of file name field variables see File Name Field Variables below that will generate filenames for logs gt In the Error Log Filename text box leave the default variables in place or type in the file name that you want to use including an extension or type in a variable name using Filename Field Variables below Or gt Use lt Browse to define a new location and type in the file name that you want to use including an extension Filename Field Variables The file path can include a literal file name or a combination of variables that will generate filenames for reports Variables make it much easier to distinguish between reports and to find particular reports For example if you enter a path with a literal file name C Program Files BUFFALO Logs Job_Report log the system will generate the report destination folder Logs if it does not already exist and a report named Job_Report log Similarly if you enter a literal file name say DataErrors log a log named DataErrors log will be generated On the other h
68. block statements describe the controls that will appear on the application These can include any number of string fields check boxes spin controls pathname fields and choice controls Each Block can have any number of Query blocks Its best to ensure that the IngestMdExt block and SearchMdExt contain the same Query blocks since the Buffalo Surveillance Server will search for only ingested metadata However if you prefer the Query blocks contained in SearchMdExt can be limited to a subset of those you have in IngestMdExt In this case you will be able to search only based on the Query blocks listed in SearchMdExt AN lf a Query block contains an error the entire metadata extension block IngestMdExt or SearchMdExt will be ignored Metadata Extension Block Structure The following example is only for the sake of illustration Note that tokens can not be used in Query blocks indiscriminately Each Query block supports only specific tokens See Valid Token Values for Query Blocks below for details Kblock identifier gt This identifies the beginning of the Block This is the opening brace for the Block Query lt token gt lt value gt lt token gt lt value gt lt token gt lt value gt lt token gt lt value gt lt token gt lt value gt lt token gt lt value gt Query lt token gt lt value gt lt token gt lt value gt lt token gt lt value gt lt token gt lt value gt lt token gt lt value gt
69. by square brackets Exclusive range searches are denoted by curly brackets Sorting is done lexicographically For example mod_date 20020101 TO 20030101 will find files whose mod_date fields have values between 20020101 and 20030101 inclusive wile I Range searches are not reserved for only date fields Wildcard A Boosting a term OR AND amp amp NOT Boolean operators Description You can also use range searches with non date fields For example title accounting TO sarbanes Will find all files whose titles are between accounting and sarbanes but not including accounting and sarbanes Boosting enables you to control the relevance of a document by boosting the value of the specific term you are searching for To boost a term use the caret symbol with a boost factor a number at the end of the term you are searching for The higher the boost factor number the more relevant the returned term will be By default the boost factor is 1 Although the boost factor must be positive it can be less than 1 for example 0 2 For example if you are searching for corporate compliance and you want the term compliance to be more relevant boost it using along with the boost factor next to the term You would type the following corporate compliance 4 This will make documents with the term compliance appear on the list as more relevant You can also boost phrase terms by enclosing a phra
70. camera is displayed in the title bar of its view frame Change save or delete a live view layouth43 Change Save or Delete a Live View Layout The first time opened the Live Viewer is set to display four feeds from two cameras arranged as 2x2 two rows of two across You can change the default Live Viewer display by modifying renaming deleting and then saving the new layout The Live Viewer remembers the last display and gives you the option to open it the next time you use Live Viewer To change the Live Viewer display gt Click the View drop down list at the top of the right hand viewer control panel gt Select the view configuration you want The first number represents the number of live views across in the row the second number represents the number of rows from top to bottom You can view a maximum of 16 feeds 4x4 at a time To save a Live Viewer layout gt Right click the Layouts folder under the Entire Network area in the top right portion of the control panel and select Save Layout As gt In the Save As dialog box enter a name for the layout and a description gt Click OK The layout name you entered is listed under the Layouts folder in the Control Panel To rename a Live Viewer layout gt Right click the layout s name listed under the Layouts folder and select Rename Layout gt Enter the new name for the layout To delete a Live Viewer layout gt Right click the layout s name l
71. camera s focus gt In the Focus section of the control panel on the right use the Auto button to activate the camera s autofocus feature Use the Near button to focus on near objects in the foreground Use the Far button to focus on objects in the background Focus Auto View a feed from a camerali4 View feeds from a camera poolli4h Change save or delete a live view layouth43 Motion Detection Camera Configuration When you add an RTSP enabled IP camera that provides motion detection information and gathering of that information is supported by the Buffalo Surveillance Server the system automatically configures camera settings and automatically preserves motion metadata along with captured video This data is then used by the Surveillance Video Manager SVM application to create histograms of detected motion See the appropriate section for your camera e AXIS Camera Motion Detection Configurationh4a e Panasonic Camera Motion Detection Configurationlsh AXIS Camera Motion Detection Configuration When you use Camera policies 491 to add an RTSP enabled AXIS IP camera that utilizes versions 2 or 3 of AXIS VAPIX API the Buffalo Surveillance Server automatically configures AXIS camera settings and automatically preserves motion detection metadata along with captured video This data is then used by Surveillance Video Manager SVM to create histograms of detected motion Default settings will be sufficient to meet most
72. cameras on my network to populate the information below Select the manufacturer and model Select Manufacturer v Select Model v What credentials are needed to access this camera User Name Password Camera Not Listed PO 8 i te PP nf Pe or te 2 Or Peo PoP A gt To add camera information either click the Find Cameras button or from the pull down lists Select the manufacturer and model If you click the Find Cameras button a Search Results window appears showing a list of cameras found on the network If your camera is not on the list select the Show all devices check box for any additional cameras on the network and other devices to display If your camera still does not display use the Select the Manufacturer and model pull down list option and type the IP address or you can add it manually in Camera Configurations In the Search Results window cameras in use appear grayed out and available cameras for configuration have an asterisk in the first column Select a camera and click OK or double click the camera item for the camera information to configure IP Address Manufacturer Model 192 168 1 13 AXIS 6032 192 168 1 55 px4 Web 192 168 1 11 hp LaserJet 192 168 1 57 Canon Mx870 Show all devices Ca _ Cea ee Jf Ae MD eth ae A mh a ae aami a Aei a ny v pe If the camera manufacturer or model is not listed use
73. changers 340 libraries 340 stackers 340 tape vault 216 add 372 license 372 remove 384 Target amp Process Policies overview 49 Test Run Output results but do not actually move files 202 Throttle 136 202 Time 181 Token Value Pairs 79 90 165 Tool Tips 121 123 Total Drives 262 Errors 262 Media 262 Media Off line 262 Media On line 262 Robotic Arms 262 RPC Calls In 262 RPC Calls Out 262 RPC Packets In 262 RPC Packets Out 262 Storage Slots 262 Volumes 262 Volumes Off line 262 Volumes On line 262 Total Errors 264 266 Total Loads 264 266 Track media after unloading 256 257 Trouble 338 Mini Vault Stats 338 TTY Where Messages Will Be Sent 232 Type 262 264 266 Type of Objects 180 Type of Shutdown 210 404 Buffalo Surveillance Server i UNIX Opening a Buffalo Surveillance Server GUI Unload Media 255 Unsecure Vault 209 Update media if needed 257 user agreement 8 User Preferences 121 123 281 284 Camera Policies 123 User rights delete 223 226 V vault 127 178 192 hard disk 214 Secure 209 shut down 210 start manually 258 tape 216 Unsecure 209 Vault Admin 204 Current Clients 263 Drives 266 Information 262 Media 264 Mini Vault Stats 338 Vault Admin Command Line Vault Admin Options 260 Communications Timeout overview 259 Vault Checkup 234 Vault Details Advanced view 261 Overview 261 VaultAdminCl 267 vaults add new 251 adding 345 removing 345 virtual hard d
74. character gt such as xls xlr and so on wom n substitutes for only names containing wom lt a third character gt n such as woman or women carbon fib substitutes for only names containing carbon fib lt two characters gt such as carbon fiber or carbon fibre In the Vault Media Name or Storage Pool fields substitute the appropriate wildcard character for any letter or letters For example lets say you have four Vaults e Accounting e Administrative e Development e Sarbanes Oxley And you want to migrate data only to Vaults named Accounting and Actuarial In the Vault field you would enter Ac and data will be stored only to Vaults beginning with Ac regardless of what comes after c The same type of scenario would pertain if you wanted to use wildcards in the Media Name field When you use a wildcard in the Vault field only media and storage pools associated with the selected Vault are displayed in the Media Name and Storage Pool fields For example if you enter j in the Vault field only Media and Storage Pools in Vaults beginning with j will appear in the Media Name and Storage Pool fields The functionality is similar for Media Name For example if you enter Ni only storage pools beginning with Ni will be displayed in the Storage Pool field bt f py See Advanced Wildcard Functionality for a complete list of and more complete information about wildcards Source Fields Vaults are the basic units of st
75. computer s hard disk This option enables you to set how often the database will Time daily when be optimized To ensure that Buffalo Surveillance Server database is optimized and your Information Repository continue to function optimally the database for every Vault is optimized daily This option enables you to limit how many files may be open simultaneously Having more files open enables Buffalo Surveillance Server to search faster However more files require more Information Repository resources Maximum open files License Field Meaning This option enables you to limit how much virtual memory Maximum virtual the database will use For best Information Repository memory used performance choose a value that does not exceed 75 of the physical memory on the computer gt Click OK to save the new settings Obtain a licensed product from Buffalo You can purchase a licensed product online For more information see Product Licensing From Vault Properties use the License tab to manage Vault licenses The Summary group displays your license totals for the selected Vault The Host Id group displays the Vault Host Id The Host Id information is used to activate your product key The Installed Licenses group displays all the individual licenses assigned to a Vault The license statistics shown are Serial Type Capacity Expiration Product Type and Platform Type Click the Add button to open the Add License wind
76. devices that can be locked via software the front panel and all access panels are locked when the Vault is operating in secure mode wile Before any media operation can be performed such as preparing medias a Vault must be unsecured Follow the steps below to secure or unsecure a Vault gt In the left pane of the Vault AdminkoA window select the Vault A to secure or unsecure by highlighting its name Entire Network eB Jac arcos f F Inforrati ont gt When the toolbar icons become active click in the Vault Admin tool baro The Vault Security window launches Vault s Security State Unsecured v Media may be added to and removed from vault based on access permissions to the media gt Use the combo box menu and select either Secured or Unsecured gt Click OK to complete the process Shut Down or Restart Vault pe IMPORTANT NOTE If you are using the Buffalo Surveillance Server Vaults and media are preconfigured and prepared automatically there is no need to perform any Vault operations The information in this Vault Admin section is provided for information only Shut Down Vault enables you to shut down or restart a selected Vault You must shut down a Vault before you modify its host computer Follow the steps below to shut down or restart a Vault gt In the left pane of the Vault Adminko4 window select the Vault a to restart or shut down by highlighting its name
77. displayed The client computer is displayed along with the domain and Full Domain Name subnet names Host Name Only The client s host name and port number are displayed NY J pe Right clicking the mouse anywhere on the active window activates a Refresh button Use this button to redisplay the active clients any time Options Communications Timeout If Buffalo Surveillance Server is unable to connect with a computer in the network or communications are interrupted during a job Buffalo Surveillance Server will wait a predefined period of time before completely dropping the connection This period of time is called the communications timeout The Communications Timeout feature enables you to set a higher or lower timeout wait value to better suit network conditions should communications between various Buffalo Surveillance Server components fail or hang during a job Network failures are usually due to network conditions that occur from time to time To make changes to the connection time out value follow the steps below gt Select Options gt Communications Timeout from the menu at the top of the Vault Admin bod main window gt Click the value you wish to set as the new time out value for the Information Repository Values are relative Address Format gt Communications Timeout gt 0 Shortest 1 2 v 3 Default 4 ou oO Nn 9 Longest 10 Never A The Communications Timeout value impacts several In
78. enable the Buffalo Surveillance Server to capture motion metadata you will set up motion alarms gt To get started open your Panasonic Network Camera management web interface Network Camera WV NS202A WV NS202A Live Setup Multi screen fo Ao no nH om BO g mm mm Wi Image type JPEG ZOOM AUTO MODE TORTEN ee oe gt Select Setup The Setup page will appear NTP Camera title Setup menu Time amp date setup Time display Time amp date aren marae Date time display format Daylight saving Summertime Camera setup Multi screen setup Alarm setup Link Access LED Authentication setup OSD Position Alarm status update mode Server setup Alarm status port Network setup Automatic installation of Viewer software Schedule setup Maintenance SD memory card wans SCs 28 v May 24 2010 14 wi 12 m 24 hours v Mmm DD YYYY 2 on Upper left_ i Polling 30sec isis 1 65535 on Real time OOFF gt Select Camera setup The Camera setup page will appear Network ra WV NS202 WV NS2 JPEG MPEG 4 Cam Function Live JPEG setup Setup menu Refresh interval JPEG Basic setup R x image capture size image quality Multi screen setup Alarm setup MPEG 4 setup Authentication setup Server setup MPEG 4 transmission Network setup Internet mode over HTTP Max bit rate per 1
79. enter the pathname of the directory you want to shadow into the Information Repository gt Leave Force Re Index set to Only re index if needed Buffalo Surveillance Server will index the media if necessary You can use forced re indexing to ensure that your media is re indexed gt Click OK to complete the process A new unit of media will appear in the media list Load Tape Media You can load media only to existing Vaults If you have not yet added Vaults you can do so using the Add or Remove Vault Wizard gt Ensure that there is a new unit of media in the storage device How to do this will vary depending on the hardware that you are using See the documentation for your hardware for assistance gt In the left frame of the Vault Adminko4 main window click in front of the Vault B into which you wish to load media gt Click and highlight Be Media gt Click an in the Vault Admin tool barl20 to launch the Load Media window The Load Media window will appear Media Location Load unknown media v Choose Media Unknown_1 v Force Re Index only re index if needed v A A oa a Ae gt Select an option from the Media Location combo box Select Load unknown media when you want to load a unit of media that is already physically loaded into the Vault s storage device Select Load from storage slot when you want to load a unit of media from a known storage slot within the Vault
80. events Vault start Vault stop file read file write file create file delete media load media unload and media erase For these events the following information is recorded name and IP of the user who executed the event and the date and time the event was executed Activity logging is optional Buffalo Surveillance Server creates activity logs in tab delimited format Consequently logs can be imported into any application that supports the tab delimited format such as Microsoft Excel This field defines to where your activity logs will be written This option defines the maximum size to which the activity log will be permitted to grow It is important to limit the size of the activity log because it may be difficult to find needed the information in an overly large activity log This option enables you to overwrite the existing activity log Overwriting the activity log prevents activity log proliferation If you select No for this option a new activity log will be created whenever the current activity log reaches the maximum size you defined in the previous field Error logs are created only when a Buffalo Surveillance Server Vault encounters a problem Error logs include warning and Vault start and Vault stop information Buffalo Surveillance Server supports error logging for every Vault in your Information Repository and error logging is always enabled This field enables you to define where error logs will be stored
81. files without having to first wait for the retrieval of large original video files a The Buffalo Surveillance Server is unable to generate thumbnails and low resolution companion files Process Video Components is selected by default and cannot be disabled gt To generate a low resolution companion files select Generate low resolution proxy If you do not select this option the proxies will not create However you can always view the regular video files contained in the Information Repository gt Use the Low resolution proxy quality field to select a resolution setting for the proxy video companion file to generate A lower setting produces a smaller file Setting Resolution and Audio Compression e same frame size as original High e high video quality e audio is compressed to QDesign 44kHz Medium e 320x240 frame size Setting Resolution and Audio Compression e medium video quality e audio is compressed to QDesign 44kHz e 320x240 frame size Low e low video quality e audio is compressed to QDesign 14 kHz gt To save an additional copy of the low resolution file select Save copy of low resolution proxy and type a path after Location gt To generate a preview image select Generate preview image If you do not select this option preview images will not create gt Use the Preview image quality field to select a resolution setting for the preview image to generate A lower setting produces a smaller file
82. for information only Use the Buffalo Surveillance Server Add or Remove Vault Wizard to add a Buffalo Surveillance Server Vault to a tape library This section leads you through the Add or Remove Vault Wizard in advanced user mode Unless you are an advanced user and have clearly defined reasons for changing the default values it is best to use default values leaving advanced user mode unchecked After adding a Vault see the Vault Admin Prepare Medial23 section to add media to your Vault and information repository a All devices running the Buffalo Surveillance Server must be time synchronized If they are not unexpected results may occur wie py If you are running the wizard in standard mode some of the windows shown below will not be included a Before adding a Vault to a tape library in a Windows environment disable the tape library and tape drives within the tape library in the Windows Device Manager so Windows does not interfere with Buffalo Surveillance Server s management of the device For directions on how to disable a tape library see the section titled Disable a SCSI Devices on a Windows Computerlse9 vite L A you want to change Vault settings including security logs notifications diagnostics memory allocation for devices database optimization parameters and licensing after you have installed a Vault see the section titled Vault Properties 217 gt Launch 34 the Add or Remove Vault Wizard The Welcome window
83. hand if you enter a path with variables Separated by an underscore for the file name say R Logs P_from_ H_on_ D_at_ T the system will generate the report destination folder Logs and a report named Monday Night Set_from_Rex lt host name gt _on_ lt date gt _at_ lt time gt where policy name host name date and time are populated with the actual details from your Information Repository and job Following are the variables you can enter in the order you prefer When using multiple variables separate them from each other with an underscore _ Variable Description P or Pn Policy Name H or Hn Host Name D Date yyyy mm dd Dy Year Dm Month Dd Day T Time hh mm Th Hour Tm Minute Ts Second R or Rn Root Pathname Valid only at the beginning of a string Activity Logging Activity logs provide logistical information about jobs Enable activity logging when you want the Buffalo Surveillance Server to create activity logs Refer to the logs after a job runs they are stored in a specified location gt Set Activity Logging to enabled The activity log text box becomes active gt In the activity log text box leave the default variables in place or type in the file name that you want to use including an extension or type in a variable name using Filename Field Variables below Or gt Use Browse to define a new location and type in the file name Filename Field Variables Th
84. longer meets your needs or you can de activate a policy at present and re activate it at a later time when needed To delete a policy gt In the Policy Name pane click the policy to delete gt Click x gt Click H to save all policy settings and implement the policy py If you delete a policy while a job is running based on that policy the job will stop as soon as it is finished processing the current file To make an active policy inactive gt In the Policy Name pane double click the policy gt In the Modify Selected Policy window de select the Active check box Import or Export Recording Policies This section is intended for advanced users Buffalo Surveillance Server policy importing and exporting functionality allows you to save policies restore policies and copy sets of policies from one computer to another After creating a set of policies Export them to a policy file Later if you want to re implement the set of policies or implement them for the first time on another computer simply Import them Use the import and export functionality to take a snapshot of the working policy configuration bring new computers on line test different policy configurations or restore user corrupted policy configurations By default recording policies are exported to CameraPolicies cfg Data service policies are exported to DataSvesSve cfg Although each policy editor uses only one policy set at a time multiple policy
85. metadata you ingest using Camera policies will be searchable using the Surveillance Video Manager Therefore metadata extensions for Camera policies and the Surveillance Video Manager are all covered here together wht e f The Metadata tab and metadata search options will appear in the Camera Policies application and the Surveillance Video Manager respectively only if there is a MetadataExtensions cfg file in lt install dir gt Config The MetadataExtensions cfg file must be on every computer on which a user would edit or modify the recording policy If not the metadata values could be lost When you create configure and implement a MetadataExtensions cfg file the Metadata tab will appear in Camera Policies It will contain the Query blocks listed in the IngestMdExt block see details below Sample String Label This field can be left blank or pre populated with a value Sample Pathname Label This field can be left blank or pre populated with a value Sample Choice Label Sample Choice v V Sample Checkbox Label Sample Spin Label 26 annta aiima ntria e aiaa aa nent nani aan Metadata search options will be available in the Surveillance Video Manager to enable searches using metadata associated with already captured videos a When you ingest metadata special characters normally interpreted as wildcards l amp are not interpreted as wildcards When
86. needs You can however manually configure several parameters that affect performance st ae oe pe Be sure to see your AXIS cameras specifications to determine if your camera supports motion detection Lf This section is intended for advanced users only and documents only the AXIS network camera configuration affected by the Buffalo Surveillance Server For general and in depth information about the AXIS network camera configuration web interface please see your specific AXIS camera documentation A Except for Image Compression and Motion Detection settings do not modify pre set Buffalo Surveillance Server configuration settings for your AXIS camera as doing so may prevent the Buffalo Surveillance Server from capturing motion detection data gt To get started open your AXIS camera management web interface AXISA AXIS 210 Network Camera Live View Setup Help i Basic Configuration Basic Configuration g Instructions Weare Before using the AXIS 210 Network Camera there are certain settings that should be 1 Users made most of which require Administrator access privileges To quickly access these 2 TCP IP settings use the numbered shortcuts to the left All the settings are also available 3 Date amp Time from the standard setup links in the menu 4 Video amp Image Note that the only required setting is the IP address which is set on the TCP IP page All other settings are optional Please see the onlin
87. of the cameras that cover the doors of your establishment When you need to see who s come or gone select the Doors camera pool as a search criteria and only video captured from cameras in the Doors camera pool are included There is no limit to the number of camera pools your Buffalo Surveillance Server solution may have Additional Target Camera fields for RTSP IP enabled cameras Field Manufacturer Model Video Capture URL User Name Password What it does The manufacturer of the camera The Video Capture URL populates automatically A user defined value this is the camera s model number Video Capture URL populates automatically The RTSP URL of the camera that enables the Buffalo Surveillance Server to capture video feeds gt The text box displays the IP address for the selected camera If the camera requires a user name and password to be accessed this is the username This field works in conjunction with Password If the camera requires a user name and password to be accessed this is the password This field works in conjunction with User Name Field Alternative Frame Size Enable stream over TCP Recording Computer Video Recording Options What it does The height and width in pixels of video images Use this field if you want to define a frame size that is different from the camera s default The first field is for width the second field is for height Causes the RTSP captu
88. of media for use by a Buffalo Surveillance Server Vault Some of these parameters cannot be changed unless you reformat the mediaka3 The Prepare Media window is slightly different for each type of media Before you can prepare media you must already have Vaults added to your Buffalo Surveillance Server Information Repository See the Buffalo Surveillance Server Configuration s45 sections for information and directions for adding Vaults The Vault to which you want to add media must be unsecured 208 before any media preparation will be permitted wht e py When executing Vault and media operations the Buffalo Surveillance Server may appear as if it is not responding However when the Buffalo Surveillance Server completes its given task it responds normally Follow the steps below to prepare media gt In the left pane of the Vault AdminBo2 window click in front of the Vault to add media gt Select the media s name next to the Media icon Bi gt Click in the Vault Admin tool baro The Prepare Media window appears pe The options in the Prepare Media window are based on the media type of the Vault selected For example if the Vault is being prepared for data tape media then tape media options display If the Vault is being prepared for hard disk media the Prepare window will display options for disk media General Information General Information Media Name Media Name
89. of media grouped by storage pool name for a common use Additional media can be added to storage pools at any time and searches can be limited to single storage pools comprising countless units of media regardless of which Vaults the media resides on URL URL is short for Uniform Resource Locator A URL is a resource identifier that specifies where an identified resource is available Buffalo Surveillance Server uses the URLs of RTSP enabled IP cameras to connect them to Buffalo Surveillance Server Vault A Vault consists of a storage device used to store files and a computer host that drives the storage device and provides computing and memory resources for program execution metadata management and on going monitoring and management A Vault can utilize hard disk single tape tape autoloaders tape libraries and optical media as storage resource A single computer can host up to four Vaults depending on the resources and capabilities of the computer and the scale of the hosted storage device All computers in the Information Repository that contain Vaults and any VMS system that video is captured from must be synchronized to the same time source for the Information Repository to function correctly Vault Catalog Vault catalogs reside in Vault memory and contain a listing of all of the files and metadata stored to media on the Vault and that is off line but still being tracked Version Number Buffalo Surveillance Server us
90. of media to search from the pull down list or type a media name and a wildcard Limit your search to only a specific storage pool gt Select the storage pool from the pull down list or type a storage pool name and a wildcard gt With user defined search metadata criteria click Add for additional search criteria Add as many search criteria blocks with as much additional criteria as you need to obtain the level of refinement you want x ae t py The Buffalo Surveillance Server supports searches using wildcards For details see the section titled Advanced Wildcard Functionality gt After setting search criteria click Search to execute a search of all of your stored videos for videos that matched the criteria you have defined Results will appear in the Search Results frame Search Export Search Results s v pe When no thumbnail image is available a placeholder image will appear The same placeholder image is used as SVM is retrieving thumbnails whe A Unless you have checked Load images immediately when scrolling in User Preferencesles thumbnail images will be loaded only when you stop scrolling Search Results Search results comprise several types of information The thumbnail image you see is captured from the beginning of the captured video To the right of each thumbnail in bold green text you will find the name of the camera that captured the video the date the video was captured
91. of names that compose a path is separated by a symbol called a delimiter such as a forward slash or a colon A leaf refers to the component of the file name between delimiters For example in C development test Build132 xls the forward slashes are delimiters and development test and build132 xls are leafs When entering pathnames in Buffalo Surveillance Server only the forward slash may be used as a pathname delimiter If a file is located in the current working directory on your computer it is referred to by only its filename Permissions Rights Permissions also known as rights refers to rules that determine how users aka roles are permitted to interact with given files or Vaults RTSP RTSP stands for Real Time Streaming Protocol RTSP is a network control protocol for use in entertainment and communications systems to control streaming media servers RTSP is used to establish and control media sessions between end points Clients of media servers issue VCR like commands such as play and pause to facilitate real time control of playback of media files from the server Secondary Storage Secondary storage is synonymous with external storage and auxiliary storage It refers to data storage that is not currently in a computer s primary hard disk storage or memory Source Source refers to the location from which data is captured ingested or extracted Storage Pool A storage pool is one or more pieces
92. or Everyone gt To change existing permissions see Change a Security Entry gt To delete existing permissions see Delete a User Group Domain or Everyone gt Assign a Media Location This option not available in the Prepare Existing Media window It is available only in the Prepare Medial234 window gt Use When to Prepare to assign a Preparation Time Select from the choices available Preparation Time Results Prepare media at next Buffalo Surveillance Server will operate without preparing use the media until a job is started that requires the media Buffalo Surveillance Server will load the specified media unit into a drive and format it Prepare media now gt Click OK to set your options Add a New User Group or Domain gt Click The Add Entry window will appear Add New Entry Name type User v Entry name Rights Full Control v NA atd Ale e andian ohn lt Sethe TIO aaa oth meds sale MEDIA he So ain BeA a gt Select a Name type This indicates the type of rights gt Enter an Entry name This is the name that will appear under Name wus K pe The name you enter must be valid on the computer on which the Vault is running gt Select the Rights for the new user group domain or everyone This is the actual rights granted to the given user group domain or everyone Right Meaning Full Control Enables the user group domain or everyone to h
93. or Remove Vault Wizard s43 This setting defines how much working cache space Buffalo Surveillance Server will be permitted to use for temporary files The working cache should be large enough to hold multiple large video files The default size is 100 GB gt Click OK to save the new settings Use the Database tab to change when the selected Vault is optimized set the maximum number of files that can be open at a single time and set the amount of virtual memory the selected Vault uses gt Open the Vault Admin application In the left pane of the Vault Admin 204 main window select the Vault a to modify gt Click eg to launch the lt Vault Name gt Properties window or right click the Vault name and select Properties The Properties window features several tabs each responsible for some aspect of Vault functionality It opens to the General tab gt Select the Database tab Security Logs Notifications Diagnostics General Device Database License Storage Database pathname F Program Files Database Resources Time daily when database is optimized 12 00 M am v Maximum open files 100 v Maximum virtual memory used 1 0068 i 4 ox cance Hes gt Select the values that you prefer for the Vault from the following Field Meaning This field can be defined only when installing a Vault It Database pathname indicates the location at which the database is stored on the host
94. second of the end of the file the entire original full resolution file will be exported Clicking the small golden triangle Hi enables you to select an embedded time display type when they are available for the video you are working with The scissor icons enable you to select clips from the vdeo Numbers indicate beginning and ending times Click the left icon to denote the beginning of the clip Click the right icon to denote the end of the clip You can select and export multiple clips from a single instance of the Media Viewer The control on the left when available Jog shuttle enables you to fast forward or fast reverse the video clip Simply click drag and hold the orange control left or right to respectively rewind or fast forward The control on the right Playback speed enables you to run the video faster or more slowly Simply drag the orange control left to play more slowly or right to play more quickly The Media Viewer also supports the following case sensitive keyboard navigation Action Key Combination Move one second forward gt right arrow Move one second backward left arrow Skip forward 30 seconds Shift gt right arrow Skip backwards 30 seconds Shift left arrow Toggle play pause Space Bar Skip to in point Shift I Action Key Combination Skip to out point Shift O Set in point I Set out point o Increase playback speed J Decrease playback speed L Stop playback K
95. that is connected to the desktop Download and Install surveillance software for desktop client Add camera configuration information Folder for saving video Phoenix LAN Port LAN Porti v gt Click OK gt Visit the Buffalo Technology website to download a copy of the client software gt Ensure that Buffalo Surveillance Server will not be blocked by your local firewall software A All devices running the Buffalo Surveillance Server must be time synchronized If they are not unexpected results may occur gt From Camera Policies gt View menu select Enable Advanced Mode gt In the toolbar click g to open the Camera Configurations window The Camera Configurations window opens Save e Add x Delete CameraName Manufacturer Model Video Capture URL Status Camera Pool Description gt Click to add a new camera configuration The Add New Camera window appears Camera Information Camera Type IP camera v Name l Description Camera Pool lt none gt J Manufacturer Generic v Model Generic v Video Capture URL rtspiif v Live View URL rtsp Z Management URL http f er Name Password Alternative Frame Size 0 Fs Enable PTZ Enable stream over TCP Recording Computer lt notselected gt Vv M Active NA emake nan tee enter Carer Ratan thom te Dana ia Shinty Mae LN i tee
96. the Camera Configuration window to add the camera rather than this wizard See Add an IP Camera Standard Model63 gt In the IP address text box type the host name or IP address in dot notation gt Type the user name and password for the camera if they are required to access it gt Click the Test Camera button to start a viewer to test whether the supplied information is correct What if my camera is not listed in the Add Camera Wizard If your camera is not listed in the Add Camera Wizard you ll need to add the camera s information manually using the Camera Configurations window for IP cameras See Add an IP Camera Standard Model s for this procedure gt Click Next The Description window appears Description What is the name of this camera For example Front Lobby Enter a brief description of this camera gt Enter a meaningful name that lets you identify the camera You may also enter a brief description gt Click Next The Recording Schedule window appears MAY Recording Schedule When do you want to record video Always At selected times gt Indicate when you want to record video e Select Always record video continuously e Select At selected times to record only on certain days or at certain times of the day gt Click Next If selecting to record video at selected times an additional Recording Schedule window opens Recording Sched
97. the Processing tabla for more details about the fields Note You must be in Advanced Model5 to set default User Preferences video Processing Options X Generate low resolution proxy Low resolution proxy quality Medium v Generate preview image Preview image quality Low smallest size v File Processing Options Override original file permissions to allow any user to retrieve aene sy s Maika A nthe ai a Aaa Ma ai MOP aan a h md AER a aaea Be A gt To set defaults select Tools gt User Preferences from the menu at the top of the respective window Destination Tab Define Capture Destinations Lf Note This tab is only displayed if you are using Advanced Model 51 The Destination tab enables you to determine the Vaults media and or storage pools where your video files are recorded or captured Read this section before you set Vault Media Name Storage Pool Media Type and Media Speed parameters Camera Processing Destination Scheduling Advanced Vault lt any gt Media Name lt any gt Storage Pool lt any gt Media Type Media Speed lt any gt lt any gt Miscellaneous Options Keep files grouped together on the same media Store on local vaults only If you leave any field set to the default lt any gt the Buffalo Surveillance Server will use all of the parameters for the given field in the Information Repository F
98. the amount of virtual memory used for each data stream cache can be changed vite py SCSI device is read only It indicates the hardware in use and where it is located in the network gt Select the values that you prefer for the Vault from the following Field Virtual memory used for each data stream cache Location where temporary files can be stored Amount of disk space that can be used Meaning This setting defines how much virtual memory is set aside for incoming and outgoing data during file storage and retrieval A larger cache may improve performance but will do so at the expense of using more virtual memory The total amount of space used equals the number of data streams multiplied by the selected cache size So if you select 10 data streams and 10 MB of cache the Vault will set aside 100 MB of total virtual memory for caching data A selection of 10 MB is usually sufficient This setting enables you to define where the working cache will be located The default location is lt install dir gt WorkingCache When Buffalo Surveillance Server is processing files it sometimes creates temporary files These enable Buffalo Surveillance Server to work more quickly and efficiently and are especially important when you are clipping video files Temporary files are kept in the working cache a The changes you make here will override the values you entered when you first added the Vault using the Add
99. the files Destination folder at FTP site gt Type the destination path and directory the files should be exported to gt After setting the parameters click Start Export to export videos Buffalo Surveillance Server begins to export files and a job status box appears in the Job Status pane While the job is running Stop is active If you click Stop while Buffalo Surveillance Server is exporting files the export is stopped and not all of the files in the Export Queue are exported However files that have already been completely exported will remain on the target computer Click Dismiss to close the job status box Export to Rimage This section deals with setting Retrieval Options for exporting to Rimage The options for export to Rimage appear when Export to Rimage is selected Er pe Export to Rimage works only if the Rimage system and Buffalo Surveillance Server export are configured properly If you have not done so already configure Rimage export using Rimage Export Configuration a When exporting to the Rimage do not stop Buffalo Surveillance Server until all jobs have finished If stopped it does not remove temporary files and they will need to be removed manually To manually remove temporary files go to the Rimage Export folder and remove lt user name gt _ lt uid gt gt Click Export at the top of the window The Export window displays Export Job Configuration ha Start Export Fields for Set Re
100. the focus is in the main Camera Policies application window i 1 pe Through configuring a camera and setting a schedule for it to record you created a new recording policy that is listed on the left side of the main Camera Policies application Create a Recording Policy For most users the quickest and easiest way to set up a camera and schedule and record video is to use the Add Camera Wizardl 53 If you cannot use the Add Camera Wizard for example if your camera information is not included in the manufacturer or model list you can create a recording policy in Basic Mode manually as explained below Also if you want to set up and define additional recording configuration options you can use the Advanced Models of the Camera Policies application To create a recording policy Standard Mode 1 Launch the Camera Policies 4 application 2 The Camera tablio4 should already have focus Select the video recording or capturing options you desire 3 Select the Scheduling tabli28 to choose whether to schedule recurring jobs or individual jobs 4 Click H to save all policy settings and implement the recording policy To create a recording policy Advanced Mode 1 Launch the Camera Policies 49 application 2 The Camera tabho should already have focus Select the video recording or capturing options you desire 3 Select the Processing tabli2 to define video and file processing options 4 Select the Desti
101. the left pane and enabling Advanced Mode which lets you configure additional advanced recording policy options e Tools Provides access to Camera Configurations If you are using the Camera Policies in Advanced Mode this menu also lets you access the User Preferences i23 dialog The Camera Policies toolbar includes the following buttons kd 4 C xn vits Saves all policy settings Opens the Add Camera Wizard so that you can easily configure a camera and schedule it to record video Adds a new policy Deletes the selected policy Refreshes the view so that the latest version of each policy is displayed Provides access to Camera Configurations N Important Tips The first time you launch Camera policies before you have created any policies the Policy Name pane is empty Before accessing any of the tabs create a policy s5 When working with camera policies there can be multiple recording policies per camera but it is not recommended to have multiple policies active and running at the same time for a single camera A triangular caution symbol superimposed on a policy icon in the left pane indicates that the policy is not running A policy does not run if its Active checkbox is de selected if the camera associated with it is not marked as active or if there is no recording computer selected to run the policy Camera Polices are visible to all computers in the Information Repository that are
102. this wizard with administrative rights To continue click Next gt Click Next gt The Add or Remove window appears vite FN If there are four Vaults installed on the computer where the wizard is run from then Add new Vault to this computer is disabled In that case delete a Vault before adding a new one o Add or Remove What task do you want to complete Add a new vault to this computer O Remove an existing vault from this computer Run this wizard in advanced user mode lt Back Next gt Cancel a a ttt ett gt Select Add a new Vault to this computer Select Run this wizard in advanced mode if you are an advanced user and want to set parameters instead of using defaults settings The rest of this section assumes that Run this wizard in advanced user mode has been selected gt Click Next gt The Description window appears f ge lt gt Description What type of device will be used to store the data Hard Disk v What is the name of this vault lt Back Next gt Cancel PN ON tti R ih Mannima gt Enter the following in the Description window Field Directions What type of device will gt be used to store data selacuhaie DISK What is the name of this Enter a name for the Vault or use the default if the field Vault is already populated gt Click Next gt The Device window advanced mo
103. to launch the lt Vault Name gt Properties window or right click the Vault name and select Properties The Properties window features several tabs each responsible for some aspect of Vault functionality It opens to the General tab gt Select the Device tab Security Logs Notifications Diagnostics General Device Database License Storage Resources Maximum files kept in a directory 100 Default location to store media lt Install_dir Media Connection Resources Maximum number of data streams 10 Virtual memory used for each data stream cache 10 00MB Working Cache Location where temporary files can be stored lt install_dir WorkingCache Amount of disk space that can be used 100GB OK J Cancel Help gt es om ct alin tt tenn Raa aE en nN AS NRE RDA gt Select the values that you prefer for the Vault from the following Field Meaning Maximum files keptina_ Data is stored in files in the Vault More files enable you directory store more data per unit of media but more files also slow down Information Repository performance Choose a value that meets but does not exceed your needs The following table details the number of files that correlates with each value Field Default location to store media Maximum number of data streams Virtual memory used for each data stream cache Location where temporary files can be stored Meaning Value Number of Fil
104. use date Default Processes files based on the date and time stored on the Vault Valid values e AO Absolute Old Selects files with a dtu date_time_use equal to or before the specified date Enter the year as a 4 digit number e AN Absolute New Selects files with a dtu equal to or after the specified date Enter the year as a 4 digit number Token Value error_log lt pathname gt exclude_dir_spec lt pathname gt exclude_file_spec lt pathname gt file_spec lt pattern gt hostname lt host name gt include_offline lt Boolean gt job_type lt alpha gt Description e RO Relative Old Selects files with a dtu equal to or before the relative specified date e RN Relative New Selects files with a dtu equal to or after the relative specified date e Inactive Do not use date Default Specifies the path for the error log file If you specify dewtty error messages will display on the default output device Supports token substitution Default path for the configuration file R Logs P err Default path for the command line dev tty Omits directories Accepts multiple instances Default no directories excluded Omits files Accepts multiple instances Default no files excluded Sets the criteria for files that are to be processed This token value pair can be specified multiple times to include multiple file
105. used as a destination even if offline media is selected it is not used Attempting to use media that is offline may result in a No resources available error if suitable media cannot be found Using Camera Policies to Record and Capture Video The Camera Policies application enables you to set up RTSP and VMS managed camera targets and then create policies that run unattended on a scheduled basis You can e Configure RTSP enabled IP cameras 63 to create policies 84 that automatically record video directly into the Buffalo Surveillance Server Information Repository e Configure VMS managed cameras 71 to create policies 84 to capture video into the Buffalo Surveillance Server Information Repository ay Video capture from VMS systems may not be available depending on your hardware device and depending on your product license Automated scheduled recording jobs are controlled by policies that are defined by parameters you set using the Camera Policies application These policies control which video feeds are captured when jobs start in which Vaults videos are stored how often jobs run when jobs stop and many other aspects of jobs The main Camera Policies window is divided into two main panes the right pane contains the tabs you will need to populate to create a policy and the left pane provides an overview of all of the recording policies in the Information Repository Overview information includes the Policy Name Ca
106. want to view and the layout of the viewer window the number of rows and columns of camera views displayed at one time There are also controls to access the pan tilt zoom and focus of cameras if cameras support it and if the control is enabled when configuring the Camera Policies application The Live Viewer main menu bar includes a File menu to close the application a View menu to access commands for tool tips save rename and delete layouts and a Help menu The view frames in the left side of the window display the live feeds from the cameras selected By default the Live Viewer is set to display feeds from four cameras arranged in two rows of two across Change that default layout by using the View drop down list at the top of the right hand control panel In the Live Viewer each camera view frame includes a Title bar Right click on the camera Title bar to display a right click menu with the following menu items Wiper Select for Wiper sub menu containing duration options for the wiper to clean Duration options are 10 seconds 1 minute 15 minutes and 30 minutes 1 hour and 2 hours Also access the Stop menu item Displays only if camera has wiper functionality Day Night Mode Select for the Day Night Mode sub menu containing mode options of Day Night and Auto If Auto is selected the camera automatically adjusts to determine the correct mode Displays only if camera has Day Night Mode functionality Select H
107. website to download a copy of the surveillance software client software for desktop client gt Ensure that Buffalo Surveillance Server will not be blocked by your local firewall software a All devices running the Buffalo Surveillance Server must be time synchronized If they are not unexpected results may occur Connect your IP camera gt Refer to the camera s user manual to install configure and initially and determine its IP access the camera address gt Use the camera s discovery software or other mechanism to determine its IP address and write it down You need it for the next step Add a camera gt From the suite of Buffalo Surveillance Server applications on your configuration and A schedule video computer open the Camera Policies application recording gt Click the Add Camera Wizard button ae on the toolbar The Welcome screen appears Welcome to the Add Camera Wizard This wizard helps you add and schedule a new camera You may need to run this wizard with administrative rights To continue click Next Nee ARN Ree hh ermine faite afta Attn Ann aA NAR mh aterat aad tm Rens AIM meme gt Click Next The Camera Information window appears Camera Information Find cameras on my network to populate the information below Select the manufacturer and model Select Manufacturer v Select Model vi What is the IP Address What credentials are
108. you to see it and Network Activity Vault Stats See Mini Vault Stats B3 Buffalo Surveillance Server System Requirements The Buffalo Surveillance Server fully manages data in an Information Repository comprising computers equipped with diverse OSs including Microsoft Windows ka Linux 343 and Macintosh OS X 34A All data attributes including streams access forks access control lists and rights are preserved by the Information Repository Regardless of which OS you are running you will need a keyboard and monitor to run the Buffalo Surveillance Server If you are running a Buffalo Surveillance Server application you will also need a pointing device such as a mouse If you are using a single button mouse press Control click where the documentation states right click wile 2 Buffalo Surveillance Server processes will run less than optimally if your hardware does not meet or exceed requirements pe The appearance of Buffalo Surveillance Server applications will vary slightly depending on the platform on which they are installed For example where the Window s application menu displays Exit the Macintosh application menu displays Quit vits pe Retrieval of files requires TCP IP Ethernet Network Protocol Supported Configurations Buffalo Surveillance Server Vaults support many different types of storage hardware The following table covers a few of the device technologies that the Buffalo Surveillance Server
109. 002 a le ott Block Size Unspecified z Johnny Harddisk Content Search Disabled Lady Har dDisk Current Location 3 Lady_Tapelibrary Date Time Formatted 2007 12 03 12 00 14 i Information Date Time Last Accessed 2008 02 19 21 53 03 amp Current Clients Date Time Last Written 2008 02 19 21 53 03 SB Meda Description r J7yrLegal_2 File De duplication Disabled ED Longterm_2 Free Space 98 98 GB Drives Garbage Space OBytes S Tape 82 Home Location 3 E Office_Hd Media Name 7yrLegal_2 A QA_Hulk_HardDisk Owner MarkA Development H Storm_HardDisk Random Access No JH Tron_HardDisk Size 99 15 GB Speed 54 Status OK Storage Pool 7yrLegal Total Errors 0 Total Loads 4 Type Dit AA ethene ct thine Se ee ee eee ee eee Access Control 1 ACL The first of sixteen controls that can be assigned to the selected unit of media Barcode ID tape media only The barcode number or label assigned to the media selected If the storage device has a barcode reader the data for this field is assigned by the physical barcode label on the media and any other information in this field is ignored by the Information Repository Block Size The block size used by the media unit selected Content Search Indicates whether content search is enabled Current Location tape media only The location at which the media is located currently Date Time Formatted Information about the most recent time
110. 16 different permission levels The permissions information entered creates an access control list ACL for the unit of media For new media all users on the network are granted rights to use media by default To restrict specific users or groups from having access to a given unit of media you must restrict rights by deleting Buffalo Surveillance Server default rights and adding new limited rights for the specific groups and or users you want to restrict Field Description pe Buffalo Surveillance Server reads rights from top to bottom For example if the Documentation group is denied rights and JohnDoe appears in the list below Documentation even if JohnDoe is granted full rights he will not have any rights if he is a member of the Documentation group On the other hand if JohnDoe appears above the Documentation group and JohnDoe is given full rights he will retain full rights even if he is a member of the Documentation group and the Documentation group is denied rights Also note that Vault rights and media rights are hierarchical with media rights being subordinate to overall Vault permissions gt To add new permissions see Add a New User Group Domain or Everyone gt To change existing permissions see Change a Security Entry gt To delete existing permissions see Delete a User Group Domain or Everyone gt Assign a Media Location This option is active only when you are preparing new media in th
111. 264 Migrate 2012 SoleraTec LLC 402 Buffalo Surveillance Server Owner 264 Prepare media 238 246 P Pathname 264 Pathname usage 12 physical media 207 load 251 253 reload 254 Polices Export 89 164 Policies Import 88 164 policy create 85 160 Data Service sample 174 delete 87 163 file structure 89 165 modify 86 161 Target amp Process sample 83 102 Post Processing Commands 197 Prepare Existing Media 243 Prepare Media 235 at next use 240 247 Barcode ID 236 244 Change 238 246 Content Searching 237 245 Description 237 245 Digital Fingerprinting 238 246 File De duplication 238 246 Media Name 236 244 now 240 247 Owner 238 246 Read 238 246 Remove 238 246 shadow hard disk 238 246 Size 237 245 Storage Pool 237 245 Write 238 246 Pre Processing Commands 197 Privileged Users 13 Process Video Components 121 Processing tab Camera Policies 121 Purge Create a Policy 160 Modify a Policy 161 R Random Access 264 Read Prepare media 238 246 Refresh view of polices 159 Re index Media 250 Reload Media 250 physical media 251 virtual media 251 reload physical media 254 reload shadow hard disk media 254 reload virtual media 254 Remove Prepare media 238 246 remove media 255 remove tape and disk vaults 384 removing vaults 345 Repeatedly at a defined interval 130 195 Replicate Create a Policy 160 Modify a Policy 161 Report Options 132 199 rights
112. 64 is a loss less format that takes 30 to 70 less storage space gt In the Recording Computer field select from the drop down list a computer that captures a video feed from your camera gt Select the Active check box if you want to make the camera available for capturing video if a policy references it or leave it inactive gt Click OK to close the Add New Camera dialog box gt Click to save the new camera configuration and add it to your Information Repository Add an OnSSI managed Camera Before you configure cameras managed by OnSSI you ll need to know the name or the IP address of the server where your OnSSI installation resides as well as a user name and password of a Basic User to access the OnSSI database a Video capture from VMS systems may not be available depending on your hardware device and depending on your product license LS You must be in Advanced Model51 to perform this procedure To configure an OnSSI managed camera gt From the View menu on the Camera Policies menu bar select Enable Advanced Mode gt From the toolbar click g to open the Camera Configurations window The Camera Configurations window appears File Edt Tools Help J la Save of Add x Delete Camera Name Manufacturer Model Video Capture URL Status Camera Pool Recording Computer Description i TQeye IQM32N D IQinVision IQM32N onssi 192 168 3 17 Demo_1 h 264 lt notcomplete gt lt none gt lt not selected gt IQEye
113. 7 compliance you would enter 2007 compliance Otherwise Buffalo Surveillance Server will search for all instances of 2007 compliance and 2007 compliance wit e f Y The wildcard operators below will not work for file directory filtering and file searches Wildcard Any single character in a name Zero or more characters inaname Description Substitutes for any single character and can be combined to denote multiple characters If used ina pathname it cannot replace a forward slash Use for specific alternative spellings substitutes for a single character substitutes for two characters substitutes for three characters and so on Only names with characters equal to the number of used are processed For example cell substitutes for all names containing cell lt one additional character gt For example cells and cello but not cell You can use within or at the end of a phrase For example xI substitutes for only names containing xl lt a third character gt such as xls xlr and so on wom n substitutes for only names containing wom lt a third character gt n such as woman or women carbon fib substitutes for only names containing carbon fib lt two characters gt such as carbon fiber or carbon fibre Substitutes for zero or more characters Can be used in truncation and for multiple characters If used ina pathname it cannot replace a forward slash Use f
114. Add a New User Group Domain or Everyone 223 gt Change a Security Entry 223 gt Delete a User Group Domain or Everyone b26 Add a New User Group Domain or Everyone gt Click The Add Entry window will appear Add New Entry Name type User v Entry name Rights Full Control v NA atd Ale e andian ohn lt Sethe TIO aaa oth meds sale MEDIA he So ain BeA a gt Select a Name type This indicates the type of rights gt Enter an Entry name This is the name that will appear under Name wus K pe The name you enter must be valid on the computer on which the Vault is running gt Select the Rights for the new user group domain or everyone This is the actual rights granted to the given user group domain or everyone Right Meaning Full Control Enables the user group domain or everyone to have full control Enables the user group domain or everyone to store and retrieve Store Retrieve data Enables the user group domain or everyone to retrieve but not PeIrevg store data N Blocks the user group domain or everyone from doing anything one with data gt Click OK gt Use o or to respectively move the new entry up or down in the list to change the priority the new entry is given in relation to other users groups and domains pe Buffalo Surveillance Server reads rights from top to bottom For example if the Documentation
115. Although only S4 media will be used the names displayed in the other fields will not change Hard disk is considered a high performance media and is assigned a high rating S8 Slower tape technologies are lower performance and are assigned a lower rating SO You can set either Media Type or Media Speed but not both gt Click the pull down control arrow under the Media Speed label and then select a performance rating The Buffalo Surveillance Server will display only the media speeds that are available for the parameters you have chosen in the Vault Media Name or Storage Pool fields If no Vault media or storage pool is chosen only the speeds from media available within the Information Repository will be displayed Criteria Tab Set File Eligibility Definitions After you have selected a data source you can further refine which specific files are moved by configuring parameters under the Criteria tab If you leave all the fields on this tab empty all of the files that reside on the source media are migrated replicated or purged To select files from specific locations or of specific types use filters as described below Selection Options Type of Objects Files and Directories v Host Name Content Time Dont use date ff File Size 0 bytes w Minimum Miscellaneous Options Watermark High 0 Low 0 Files to Include Exclude Directories to Include Exclude eSESIER Ea Hee Typ
116. Buffalo Surveillance Server Version 5 6 19 by BUFFALO Administrator s Guide This page left blank intentionally Table of Contents Welcome 7 Software License AGQreeMe nt ce cceeeecceecccceececeseceeececeeeeeececueneeceseceeseecuseeeeeeeeueneeeeseeeeeeess 8 MOMMA CE Information essiensa eked ds cased Jee hyena cdibacludincasecetl dacs idan eaaa aiaa bianda anaana dadanan 11 Documentation OVErVieW ccccccccesesesesssssssseesssessessessssessssssesssssssssssssssessssssesssssssesseeeees 12 Getting Started 15 Quick Start for IP Camera Users cceseecceeeceeeeeensescecceceeeeeenseneececoeeeeeensenescceeoeseenenseess 16 Quick Start for VMS System USers 0 0 0 ee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeseseseseseeeseseseseseseseseseseseeenas 27 HOW Oso se5 2 2a eaea Ee aa EEE ae eee E AEE Oaa 34 Launch an Application ccssscseeseseeseeseessesessessesseeseeseesoesnesoesaesaevaevaeseesessneseasaesousaesaesseeseuseesaesausausaesaevanvanss 34 Add and Schedule an IP Camera ssscsscecceeeseeeeesseeeeeeeeeneeneneeneeneenaeseasaesaeesessaeeaeeaesaesaesaeeaeseeneeneeneeseeseeseesenseesoes 34 Create a Recording Policy ccscssssseseeeesesnessesseseeveessnsseeseesnesaesoessesesseesoesoesaesaesaesaevaevonvaneaneaneneesnesaesansaneaee 44 Create a Data Service POliCy cccssseseeensnsnesneseeseevsesenssneseennssaesoesesesseesoesnesoesaesaesaesaevonvaneanesnesnesnesaesansaneaee 45 Search For and Export Surveillance Videos
117. Choices aces A choice statement to select Valid only for 8 Choice Must have at least one Choice These are the default values that load into the control Valid values Default Value lt depends on token gt e String type a string e Pathname type a string Token Value Description lt character string gt Label lt character string gt LowerLimit lt number gt Name lt character string gt Type lt alpha gt Description e Checkbox type true false e Spin type a number between the LowerLimit and UpperLimit e Choice type a number Default values e String type e Pathname type e Checkbox type true checked e Spin type the lower limit e Choice type 1 xt i f When typing a number into a spin control manually press the Tab key or the Enter key for the new number to take effect This is the tooltip for the control Default The label for the control Default Valid only for Spin The lower limit for the spin control Default 0 The item s name Required Default Defines the type of control Valid Values e String e Checkbox e Spin Token Value UpperLimit lt number gt Description e Pathname e Choice Default none The upper limit for the spin control Valid only for Spin Default lower limit 100 Sample ExportExtensions cfg This is a sample of an ExportExtensions cfg file E
118. Hela version TON active true content_filter _ data_paths ai deleted_files false diag faillse display_only false dst_Vault_name me dst_media_name gal diSiGmsinoisdg cmp ool TaT dst_media_speed Unspecified dst_media_type Unspecified dst_volume_format Unspecified dst_volume_name aaia Glie_BiceOes T dt stored i error_log SR Logs P err hostname nen include_offline false job_type migrate Ihiar aa ZR Logs P log min_file_size 0 max_file_size 18446744073709551615 src_Vault_name Pe src_media_name Ue SECmS Oma gem pool Mees src_media_speed Unspecified src_media_type Unspecified src_volume_format Unspecified src_volume_name tis volume_use Unspecified out_of_band true post proc lend ss pre_proc_cmd as Slate og ys mtwtfss start_time O2Os src_high_water_mark 0 src_low_water_mark 0 stop_time 0 0 0 0 0 0 summary true throttle 100 veS F500 verbose false Source Tab Specify Where Files Come From After you add a policy the next step is to define the source from which files will be migrated replicated or purged Source indicates from which Vault media storage pool media type and or media speed you will migrate duplicate or purge files Vault lt any gt v Media Name lt any gt v Storage Pool lt any gt v Media Type Media Speed lt any gt lt any gt R O ee If you leave any field set to the default lt any gt the Buffalo Surveillance Server will process all of the informatio
119. In that case delete a Vault before adding a new one Gs Add or Remove What task do you want to complete Add a new vault to this computer O Remove an existing vault from this computer Run this wizard in advanced user mode tenho cit lt Back Next gt Cancel n at CP tte Dentin inet gt Select Add a new Vault to this computer Select Run this wizard in advanced mode if you are an advanced user and want to set parameters instead of using defaults settings The rest of this section assumes that Run this wizard in advanced user mode has been selected gt Click Next gt The Description window will appear f ge lt gt Description What type of device will be used to store the data Standalone Tape Drive What is the name of this vault felix_SingleTape3 lt Back Next gt Cancel settee tert tect cet in tects tnt ttt gt Enter the following in the Description window Field Directions What type of device will z be used to store data gt Select Standalone Tape Drive What is the name of this gt Enter a name for the Vault or use the default if the field Vault is already populated with a name you want to use gt Click Next gt The Device window appears Use to select a tape drive or tape library depending on the selection in the Description window e 4 z z f a Device e Which standalone tape drive do you want to use select one 3
120. OF THE TERMS OF THIS AGREEMENT CLICK THE DO NOT ACCEPT BUTTON AND THE INSTALLATION PROCESS WILL NOT CONTINUE RETURN THE PRODUCT TO THE PLACE OF PURCHASE FOR A FULL REFUND OR DO NOT DOWNLOAD THE PRODUCT In consideration for use of the Softw are Licensee hereby agrees to the follow ing terms and conditions 1 DEFINITIONS 1 1 Documentation shall mean the documentation provided in connection w ith the Softw are 1 2 Effective Date shall mean the date on which Licensee opens the package dow nloads the product or uses equipment that contains the product 1 3 Softw are shall mean the object code of the Programs Utilities included on the delivered digital media 2 TERMINATION 2 1 This Agreement may be terminated by Licensee at any time by destroying the Softw are together with all copies thereof This Agreement w ill also terminate automatically and w ithout notice if Licensee fails to comply with any termor condition of this Agreement Termination of this Agreement shall terminate Licensee s license to the Softw are All other terms and conditions of this Agreement shall survive termination in perpetuity 3 LICENSE GRANT 3 1 Company grants to Licensee a nonexclusive nontransferable license to use one 1 copy of the Software in object code form only on one computer and the Documentation w hich use shall be limited to Licensee s internal use The Softw are and Documentation are licensed and not sold to Licensee
121. OK to save the values that you have selected The days will appear in the On what days of the week text box Duration Window Follow the directions below to set a maximum time that a job should be allowed to run Select job duration Hours Minutes Seconds od o jo A Y v o C 3 a a ol on ny de oh gt Enter the number of hours minutes and seconds the process will be allowed to run gt Click OK The Should the job be stopped before it is completed text box on the Scheduling tab will display how long the job will run before it is terminated a This feature will stop a job according to the parameters that you set even if the job is not finished Period of Time Window Follow the directions below to enable Buffalo Surveillance Server to search for files that have been modified within a defined period of time Select period of time Year Month Day Hour Min Sec See S E I 2 owe we ewe ee ew ree ee ee eee eee we OY Iae ww gt Enter a period of time in terms of years months days hours minutes AND OR seconds You may enter any combination or up to a maximum period of lt 10 Years lt 100 Months lt 1000 Days lt 100000 Hours lt 1000000 Minutes and lt 1000000 Seconds wie 2 lt means less than or equal to gt Click OK The text box from which you started will display the value that you have entered Time Interval
122. Oele eae EN gt Click 3 to see a list of drives within the Vault and information about the drives gt Click to highlight a particular drive from the directory tree or from the right frame to see detailed information as listed below about the selected drive Entire Network Item Value fE Arnold_Hardbisk Access Control 1 World Read Write E Niemen Block Size 4 00 kB a Current Gherts Current 0 Rate OBytes sec ped Location 1 gt M Manufacturer SoleraTec Virtual 2 Media in Drive Reference_1 gt Virtual 3 Total Errors o Virtual 4 Type HardDisk se int tenth teh teeth litte tnt lt tte a tt tc Access Control 1 ACL The first of a possible sixteen controls that can be assigned to the selected unit of media Block Size The block size employed by the media when it is accepting data Current I O Rate The rate at which data is being written to media Last Cleaning tape media only The last time that a unit of media has been physically cleaned Location The slot number in the drive that the unit of media occupies Manufacturer The name of the company that manufactured the drive Media in Drive The name assigned to the unit media Total Errors The number errors a unit of media unit has generated Total Loads tape media only The total number of times a unit of media has been physically loaded into the drive Type The type of drive Vault Admin Command Line for Advanced Users Va
123. P a T P N yT N gt Choose an option from the When to Erase pull down list When to Erase Results The unit of media will be erased just prior to the next Erase media at next use as time it is used in a job The unit of media will be loaded into a drive and erased Erase media now immediately gt Click OK to activate your selection Start Vaults Manually vite py IMPORTANT NOTE If you are using the Buffalo Surveillance Server Vaults and media are preconfigured and prepared automatically there is no need to perform any Vault operations The information in this Vault Admin section is provided for information only When managing an Information Repository there may be times when Vaults do not start automatically You will need to start them manually To start a Vault follow the steps for your OS below E Windows Use Windows Services to start Vaults and to perform other Vault related OS operations i f py You may need Windows administrator rights to perform certain tasks General information about using Services is provided by Microsoft Click Action gt Help on Services window toolbar gt From your Window s Taskbar click Start gt All Programs gt Control Panel gt If you are displaying the Category View click Performance and Maintenance If you are displaying the Classic View skip this step and go to the next gt Click Administrative Tools The icon and name are identical
124. Service Policies This section is intended for advanced users Buffalo Surveillance Server policy importing and exporting functionality allows you to save policies restore policies and copy sets of policies from one computer to another After creating a set of policies Export them to a policy file Later if you want to re implement the set of policies or implement them for the first time on another computer simply Import them Use the import and export functionality to take a snapshot of the working policy configuration bring new computers on line test different policy configurations or restore user corrupted policy configurations By default recording policies are exported to CameraPolicies cfg Data service policies are exported to DataSvcsSve cfg Although each policy editor uses only one policy set at a time multiple policy sets exported to policy files can be used Create name and use any file naming convention for policy files and be sure to keep track of where policies are exported to if it is a location other than the default location the user s home directory wht A py Before restoring a set of policies to a computer that currently has policies set up be sure to delete all of the current policies before importing other policies otherwise imported policies are added to current policies A Data Service policies are incompatible with other client policies and vice versa If you try to import a Data Service policy into a
125. TO Mite tee CK ML cancel lt gt Enter a name for the policy gt Enter a description that tells you something about the policy so that you can know what it does without having to open it gt Select a Policy Type Policy Type Action Moves files from one location to another WZ fa Migrate pe When migrating from tape media files are marked as deleted not actually deleted until the media is reused and files are overwritten This enables migration jobs to finish in a timely manner Copies files from one Vault to another retaining the original stored Duplicate copy Permanently deletes files from the Information Repository When you select Purge for files on a unit of tape media a flag indicating that the files on the tape are deleted is logged in the database log index However the files are not actually removed from the tape until you run Erase Selected Mediaks and media is reused and files are Purge overwritten In contrast files on hard disk media are purged immediately a Do not run purge policies on critical data that you might want to preserve Once data is purged it is gone forever gt Ensure the policy is active or de select the Active check box if you do not want the policy to run When the Active check box is de selected the as symbol is superimposed over the policy icon in the Policy Name pane gt Click OK The window closes the policy name and description appear in the P
126. Vault Stats Mini Vault Stats provides a high level perspective of vault activity through a graphical display of Vault performance when data is transferred from clients or between Vaults on the network To access Mini Vault Stats e From Network Activity double click a Vault label or symbol 1 From Network Activity move the mouse pointer over a Vault symbol and right click 2 From the shortcut menu select Mini Vault Stats On the Mini Vault Stats window the Files per Second monitors performance of data transfer between vaults and the Mbytes per Second displays data transfer from clients The display at the bottom right of the Mini Vault Stats window shows Nominal Media Request or Trouble e Nominal Everything is okay e Media Request Request for offline media to be reloaded e Trouble Indicates a serious problem Vault Performance Files per Secon Vault Name Media Technology Mbytes per Second Security Status es a For more information see Network Activity B33 Launch Mini Vault Stats gt From Network Activity hover the mouse cursor over the symbol for the Vault for which you want to launch Mini Vault Stats the cursor will change from an arrow to a pointing hand gt Right click the symbol using the right mouse button gt Select Mini Vault Stats from the available options The Mini Vault Stats window appears gt Move Mini Vault Stats to a location on your monitor that allows
127. Viewer the Live View URL check box must be selected and the IP address must be entered in the first field of the Video Capture or Live View URL when adding the camera configuration AN To be able to view and record live video feeds you must ensure that RTSP is enabled on your IP camera See your camera s documentation for details on enabling RTSP A Most cameras can manage a single live feed while video streams are being captured More than a single live feed on any given camera affects performance The Live Viewer window is divided into two main areas the Control panel on the right side contains controls to select the camera feeds to view and the layout of the viewer window the number of rows and columns of camera views displayed at one time There are also controls to access the pan tilt zoom and focus of cameras if cameras support it and if the control is enabled when configuring the Camera Policies application The Live Viewer main menu bar includes a File menu to close the application a View menu to access commands for save rename and delete layouts a Tools menu for User Preferences and a Help menu The view frames in the left side of the window display the live feeds from the cameras selected By default the Live Viewer is set to display feeds from four cameras arranged in two rows of two across Change that default layout by using the View drop down list at the top of the right hand control panel In the Live Viewer eac
128. Window Follow the directions below to set the interval at which the jobs will be run The job will run at the interval that you enter until you change it To stop a job that is using the repeat setting you must edit or delete the policy Select time interval Hours Minutes Seconds f 24 0 f A b d Se we eee NR ee E eee gt Enter the interval in hours minutes and seconds at which the job is to run The clock for the interval begins as soon as you save the policy So if you want a job to run every three hours enter 3 00 00 If you want the job to run once a day enter 24 00 00 Every two days 48 00 00 For example if you enter 3 30 30 the job will repeat every three hours thirty minutes and thirty seconds from the time that you first save the policy So if you save your policy at exactly 12 00 AM the job will run at 12 00 AM 3 30 30 AM 7 01 00 AM 10 31 30 AM 2 02 00 PM etc If you enter 72 00 00 and start the job on Monday at exactly noon it will again run on Thursday at exactly noon gt Click OK The job interval will be displayed in the text box from which you started Time Window Follow the directions below to select a time Select Time 12 v 00 am NOS Caplin on Bele Ai AI nm Ri Mile a lin dida gt Select an hour a minute and AM or PM From left to right the first field displays the hour of day the second the minute the third AM or PM gt C
129. _1080P onssi 192 168 3 17 Demo_1 h 264 lt not complete gt lt none gt lt not selected gt Mobotix Lobby 2 onssi 192 168 3 17 Demo_1 h 264 lt not complete gt lt none gt lt not selected gt x lt 3 J FF I Pe PrP ee Pee gt Click to add a new camera configuration The Add New Camera window appears 75 Camera Information Camera Type IP camera v Name Description Camera Pool lt none gt v Manufacturer Generic w Model Generic v j Video Capture URL rtsp j 3 Live View URL rtsp 3 Management URL http User Name Password Alternative Frame Size 0 e C Enable PTZ C Enable stream over TCP Recording Computer not selected gt Vv M Active m PE E cee emt an aa E A PAA oe een aes ae ae el A aos cael aS O Ore A ee ee gt Select OnSSI managed camera from the Camera Type dropdown list The relevant fields are displayed Camera Information Camera Type Sass Err asi ue Name l Description Camera Pool lt none gt Target Camera Server Address l User Name Password Camera Video Type MJPEG v Recording Computer lt notselected gt Active PA PP ant 8 OP eT A 9 ae Change gt In the next two fie
130. a parameters Default A camera pool is a user defined virtual grouping of cameras that enables you to search video from only specified cameras There is no limit to the number of camera pools your Buffalo Surveillance Server solution may have and apart from hardware limitations there is no limit on which and how many cameras you may add to a camera pool Default PTZ stands for pan tilt zoom This setting enables the pan tilt and zoom functionality for the camera when PTZ functionality is supported by the camera For PTZ to work this option must be selected Valid values true false Default false Token Value stream_over_tcp lt Boolean gt type lt character string gt user_name lt character string gt version lt number gt video_capture_url lt url gt Description Causes the RTSP capture to stream data over a TCP connection rather than over a default HTTP connection Default false The policy type of the file Default camcfg The user name of the camera when a user name is required to access the camera Default The version number of the currently installed application Only the current version number is valid This number will change The RTSP URL used to capture video from the camera Default Sample Cameras cfg File Generated from Camera Config policy_name ACT Lobby Eype version active name
131. a live view layoutl143 Control camera pan tilt zoom and focus 143 Live Viewer User Preferences Use the Live Viewer User Preferences to define default settings for the Live Viewer window Access the Live Viewer User Preferences from the Live Viewer Tools menu select User Preferences Enable tool tips Enable tool tips A check mark by this element indicates that tool tips for the Live Viewer display De select to turn tool tips off Manual record cache folder Specify where to store Live Viewer recordings Click the Browse button to navigate to the cache location using the Browse for Folder dialog box Preferred Viewer Select the type of video viewer to drive the play back of videos with in the order to use the media players QuickTime first then VLC QuickTime only VLC first then QuickTime or VLC only Video Stream Delay This selection determines how fast video feed streams to your camera view frame in Live Viewer Changing the delay causes the video you are viewing to be delayed by that amount The default value is 500 ms milliseconds but the options range from 50ms to 2 seconds The smaller the delay value the video is viewed closer to real time but if the delay time is too small the video could freeze or hang Be sure to change the video stream delay setting before adding the camera to a view frame If you change the preference after the camera has been added to the view frame you will have to close it cha
132. a_video_capture_url lt character camera can be viewed string gt Default Sample Recording Policy If you were to export a policy it would look similar to the following Generated from Camera Policies 12 00 55 Start of object rule for policy_name test policy_name test type version active job_type obj_type dtu_type ocalony Follow links process_directories timestamp backup_stub backup_data include_offline dst_media_type dst_media_speed dst_volume_format dst_Vault_name dst_media_name dst_volume_name dst_storage_pool dst_volume_pack dst_local_only localize start_time Start days stop_time pre_proc_cmd Dest proclemd error_log summary complete diag Wist yaa display_only update_run_record Create _job_history retry_time any_usier_retrieve out_of_band vcs data_paths Chrortiie system_info act_log_enabled ace logon ext_metadata_plugin file_grouping_plugin gen_video_components gen_low_res_proxy low_res_proxy_quality save_low_res_proxy save_low_res_proxy_dir_pn gen_preview_image tap O false move surv_camera LO false false false mt ime false false false Unspecified Unspecified Unspecified UES nn nn nn ww false true OKOE O10 010 mtwtfss RO0000 00 00 00 00 00 ww ww SR Logs P err true false false ZR Logs P log false true false RO000 00 00 00 00 00 false true F500 1
133. acters gt jpg Substitutes for a minimum number or more characters If used in a pathname it cannot replace a forward slash The minimum number of characters matched is equal to the number of that follow the substitutes for at least two characters substitutes for at least three characters and so on You can use within or at the end of a word For example carbon fib substitutes for carbon fiber carbon fibre as well as carbon fibers carbon fibres and carbonfib123 Only names containing at least the number of present are processed names with more letters are also processed For example actua substitutes for all filenames containing actua lt four or more additional characters gt such as actuarial actuaries actualization actua12345 xls but not actual Similar to Substitutes for zero or more characters in a pathname valid for use only within a pathname Can be used to denote the forward slash Wildcard One or more characters in a pathname including slashes Set of characters 1 Characters not in set Description For example document Q42007 substitutes for document lt any character including slashes or no character gt Q42007 such as documentQ42007 documentsQ42007 document1Q42007 and document Q42007 Substitutes for a minimum number or more characters in a pathname valid for use only within a pathname Matches the forward slash S
134. akes 30 to 70 less storage space gt In the Recording Computer field select from the drop down list a computer that captures a video feed from your camera gt Select the Active check box if you want to make the camera available for capturing video if a policy references it or leave it inactive gt Click OK to close the Add New Camera dialog gt Click td to save the new camera configuration and add it to your Information Repository Modify a Camera Configuration Modify an Existing Camera Configuration To modify an existing camera configuration gt From the toolbar at the top of the Camera Policies 4A application click g to open the Camera Configurations window The Camera Configurations window appears populated with a list of all of the cameras configured in the Information Repository gt Select the camera you want to modify from the list gt From the menu at the top of the window select Edit gt Modify Selected Camera The Modify Camera window appears It is populated with camera parameters for the selected camera and otherwise identical to the Add Camera window gt Change the options and values as needed and then click OK gt Click at the top of the Camera Configurations window to save the modified camera J pE f Right click the camera of interest for easy access to edit live view manage and delete functionality Delete a Camera Configuration Delete an Existing Camera Configuratio
135. alancing refers to keeping job loads and data distributed throughout the Information Repository Buffalo Surveillance Server queries each Vault regarding the availability of storage resources that match the requirements of the files to be processed It then negotiates a connection with the Vault that best matches files lifecycle requirements and copies the files to Vaults When there is more than one candidate Vault that matches the client s criteria the client makes a determination based on which Vault is most readily available and has the most free space Through this process the network remains load balanced Locator The Locator comprises components in Buffalo Surveillance Server s extended client server architecture that make it possible to link clients and servers together dynamically and only as they are needed Instead of network clients being hard coded to work with only a single server resource the Locator makes it possible for any network client to take advantage of any server resource Low Resolution Proxy Low resolution proxies also called companion files are playable videos created by Buffalo Surveillance Server when data is captured or ingested that are a fraction of the size of stored original files They enable the user to quickly retrieve and visually peruse stored video files in their entirety and select and retrieve only clips from large stored originals when the entire original is not needed Because low resolution proxie
136. alid values true false Default false Specifies the path where the closed Captioning file will be saved Default path Note Timing tokens are mutually exclusive Only one timing token may be set In other words you may set either absolute_start or repeat_interval or start_days AND start_time Camera Token Value camera_cache_pn lt character string gt camera_clip_duration lt integer gt camera_description lt character string gt camera_frame_height lt integer gt camera_frame_width lt integer gt camera_manufacturer lt character string gt camera_model lt character string gt Description Required The location of the cache to hold the clips before sending to Vault Default is The length of clip that incoming video streams are captured into Default 1800 seconds The description of the camera Default The height of the video frame Works in conjunction with camera_frame_width Default 0 indicates native frame height The width of the video frame Works in conjunction with camera_frame_height Default 0 indicates native frame width The manufacturer of the camera Default The camera model Default Token Value camera_motion_detect lt Boolean gt camera_name lt character string gt camera_password lt character string gt camera_pool lt character string gt camera_strea
137. already existing catalog for the media unless it finds corruption or you force re index of the media When reloading media onto the Information Repository you must use the reload process vite pe if you need to re index media you must first unload the medial2541 If you attempt to reload media without first unloading it the operation will fail and an error message will appear Re indexing media means to have the Information Repository survey the data on the media and create a new catalog on the media if needed and on the Vault on which the media will reside If a unit of media that is or has been in use in the Information Repository becomes unreliable you should re index it To do this you must unloadle54 and then reload the unit of media wile When executing Vault and media operations the Buffalo Surveillance Server may appear as if it is not responding However when the Buffalo Surveillance Server completes its given task it responds normally Add New Vaults or Media On the Fly You can increase automatic fail over performance with a more flexible Information Repository design that eliminates the possibility of a single point of failure For example you can move media freely between Vaults of the same type so if a tape is taken out of one Vault and inserted into another the Information Repository will automatically locate the data without being notified of the move If a tape library is getting full a s
138. ame owner rights and other pertinent information are retained for future use It is better to erase media than to reformat mediak43 wherever possible When you erase media the Buffalo Surveillance Server simply flags data erased that can be overwritten There may be several reasons to erase media Whenever physical sequential write media such as tape is used as the storage media it must be erased as part of the purge process Therefore if this type of media is being used as part of a multi level storage hierarchy through which files are being migrated and replicated viable data on the media must be moved to other media and the original media erased in order to purge old expired data from the media Media being used in a cycled Information Repository must also go through erasures At the end of a cycle the old media being reintroduced needs to be erased by the Information Repository before it can be reused Media erasing is managed through the Erase Media window Follow the steps below to erase media gt In the left frame of the Vault AdminkoF main window click in front of the Vault E from which you intend to remove media gt Click E in front of the Vault s media icon A to open the media list beneath it gt Click and highlight the media unit that you want to erase gt Click in the Vault Admin tool barko The Erase Media window will appear When to Erase Erase media at next use v eat ewe re
139. amera policies In short the metadata you ingest using Camera policies will be searchable using the Surveillance Video Manager Therefore metadata extensions for Camera policies and the Surveillance Video Manager are all covered here together wile The Metadata tab and metadata search options will appear in the Camera Policies application and the Surveillance Video Manager respectively only if there is a MetadataExtensions cfg file in lt install dir gt Config The MetadataExtensions cfg file must be on every computer on which a user would edit or modify the recording policy If not the metadata values could be lost When you create configure and implement a MetadataExtensions cfg file the Metadata tab will appear in Camera Policies It will contain the Query blocks listed in the IngestMdExt block see details below Sample String Label This field can be left blank or pre populated with a value Sample Pathname Label This field can be left blank or pre populated with a value Sample Choice Label Sample Choice v V Sample Checkbox Label Sample Spin Label 26 e aonadan arnal aia aanne Metadata search options will be available in the Surveillance Video Manager to enable searches using metadata associated with already captured videos A When you ingest metadata special characters normally interpreted as wildcards amp are not interpre
140. and if you enter a path with variables Separated by an underscore for the file name say R Logs P_from_ H_on_ D_at_ T the system will generate the report destination folder Logs and a report named Monday Night Set_from_Rex lt host name gt _on_ lt date gt _at_ lt time gt where policy name host name date and time are populated with the actual details from your Information Repository and job Following are the variables you can enter in the order you prefer When using multiple variables separate them from each other with an underscore _ Variable Description P or Pn Policy Name H or Hn Host Name D Date yyyy mm dd Dy Year Dm Month Dd Day T Time hh mm Th Hour Tm Minute Ts Second R or Rn Root Pathname Valid only at the beginning of a string Report Options The Buffalo Surveillance Server creates one of three report files when a job runs Type of Report Contents Summary A header and summary report Complete Same as Summary but lists all files effected Diagnostic Complete but adds diagnostic relevant information gt Click the pull down menu to select the report option that you want Use the Summary or Complete options on a normal basis and switch to Diagnostics if you run into problems gt In the Report Options text box leave the default variables in place enter in the file name that you want to use including an extension or enter a variable name using File Name Field Variables belo
141. and Export The Search and Export buttons at the top of the application enable you to toggle between the Search and Export windows Use Search Results and the Export Queue in the Search window to find videos and place them in the Export window Use the Export window when you are ready to export all of the videos you have found a To play back videos in the Buffalo Surveillance Server media viewer you will need VideoLAN s VLC media player VLC 1 1 11 or Apple QuickTime version 7 free or Pro installed on your computer If you are viewing primarily MPEG 4 videos which are commonly used for surveillance video VLC is best a To utilize low resolution companion files you will need to enable them when you set up your recording policies On the Processing tab in the Camera Policies application available in Advanced models1 ensure that Generate low resolution proxy is selected If this option is not enabled low resolution companion files and thumbnails will not be available 274 Buffalo Surveillance Server Search Window Search Export Search Criteria Search Results Export Queue April 2010 Sun Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri 1 2 45 97 8 9 11 12 13 14 15 16 18 19 20 21 22 23 25 26 27 28 29 30 Start 2010 04 06 00 00 00 End 2010 04 06 23 59 59 The Search window is divided into three main sections e The Search Criteria frame enables you to select and enter minimal or extensive search criteria as needed to obtain relevant search results
142. and or media with the most available free space Select a parameter from the field that best meets the data s requirements and then select available parameters from the remaining fields When you select a parameter from Vault Media Name or Storage Pool the Buffalo Surveillance Server will limit the options available in the remaining fields to only those commensurate with the parameter you have selected wo pe You can assign several units of media to a single storage pool See Prepare Media Storage Pooll23 for more information about Storage Pools To return the tab to a state where you can choose any parameter from any field select lt any gt in the Vault field Create a new entry or new entries for Vault Media Name and or Storage Pool gt Use the pull down control for Vault Media Name and or Storage Pool and then select lt new entry gt A window will appear into which you can enter the new name for the field that you have select Enter the new Vault Media Name or Storage Pool and then click OK The new entry will appear in field s pull down list Bini method is recommended only for special circumstances If you try to run a job with a Vault or media that is not actually running in the Information Repository the job will fail lt any gt will divide the names of Vaults media and storage pools already implemented from the names that you have added for Vaults media and storage pools that have not yet bee
143. and their definitions Standard Token Value Description Enables the creation of activity logs act_log_enabled lt Boolean gt Valid values true false Default false Defines the path for the activity log Supports act_log_pn lt pathname gt token substitution Default path Used only in the policy file The exact start time and date that the job is to run Multiple absolute start tokens may be entered absolute_start lt yyyy gt lt mm gt lt dd gt lt hh gt lt mm gt lt ss gt Used only in the policy file Defines whether the policy is active or inactive active lt Boolean gt Valid values true false Default true Specifies the directory that contains the log retry and history files Supports token admin_pn lt pathname gt substitution Default path lt install dir gt JobHistory any_user_retrieve lt Boolean gt backup_data backup_stub complete lt Boolean gt compress create_job_history lt Boolean gt data_paths lt number gt description lt character string gt diag lt Boolean gt dir_spec lt pathname gt Allows any user to retrieve a file in the job regardless of the initial read access Valid values true false Default false Currently not supported Currently not supported Prints all summary information plus the pathnames of the files ingested to the file indicated by the list_pn option below Valid values
144. antie anie true Description Phistis alsamp leror eNe N Descrip oniu eld Query Name Name5 Type Spin Label Sample Spin Label DefaultValue 26 Description This is a sample of the Description field LowerLimit 0 UpperLimit 100 This is the cllosing brace for the ModMdExt block Using Wildcards for Searching and Filtering Wildcards enable you to select multiple files with a single specification e File filter wildcards are for creating file and directory filters and searching for files in the Information Repository e Content searching wildcards are for content searching of the Information Repository as well as for content criteria filtering using the Data Service Policies Criteria tabli5 Wildcards for File Searching Buffalo Surveillance Server enables you to use wildcards when you are searching for stored video files Wildcards for searching work on file and directory names Wildcards for File and Directory Filtering File Searching and Vault Media Name Storage Pool and Metadata Fields Buffalo Surveillance Server enables you to use wildcards when creating file and directory filters as well as when searching for files Wildcards for file filters operate on filenames directory filters operate on directory name Wildcards for searching work on file and directory names You can also use wildcards for the Vault Media Name and Storage Pool fields in the Source tab and Destination tab of Data Services Poli
145. appears Welcome Welcome to the Add or Remove Vault Wizard This wizard helps you add a new vault to or remove an existing vault from your computer You must run this wizard with administrative rights To continue click Next ee en eT gt Click Next gt The Add or Remove window appears vite amp If there are four Vaults installed on the computer where the wizard is run from then Add new Vault to this computer is disabled In that case delete a Vault before adding a new one Gs Add or Remove What task do you want to complete Add a new vault to this computer O Remove an existing vault from this computer Run this wizard in advanced user mode tenho cit lt Back Next gt Cancel n at CP tte Dentin inet gt Select Add a new Vault to this computer Select Run this wizard in advanced mode if you are an advanced user and want to set parameters instead of using defaults settings The rest of this section assumes that Run this wizard in advanced user mode has been selected gt Click Next gt The Description window appears f ge lt gt Description What type of device will be used to store the data Tape Library v What is the name of this vault Felix_TapeLibrary4 lt Back Next gt Cancel gt Enter the following in the Description window Field Directions What type of device will be used to store data P Select Tepe Library
146. application e The right pane displays details for the object selected All of the Vaults in the Information Repository are displayed under Entire Network For each Vault view the following details e Informationbeal e Current Clients PA e EA Mediakeh o E Drives bea The type of information that is displayed in Media and Drives varies slightly depending on whether a hard disk or tape is selected A gt To update information view in Vault Admin click the Refresh icon J wht py When executing Vault and media operations the Buffalo Surveillance Server may appear as if it is not responding However when the Buffalo Surveillance Server completes its given task it responds normally Rights The following users have unlimited access to Vault resources e UNIX root e Windows local group administrators e Windows backup operators How to Use Vault Admin Overview pe IMPORTANT NOTE If you are using the Buffalo Surveillance Server Vaults and media are preconfigured and prepared automatically there is no need to perform any Vault operations The information in this Vault Admin section is provided for information only Actions and Options Unlike other Buffalo Surveillance Server interfaces in which you choose options tab by tab most Vault AdminkoA functionality can be executed from either the Actions 08 and Options 258 menu or buttons on the toolbar Vault Admin Toolbar 0 Sh 2ce8 9 tan ae a
147. ars and then reappears Window causes events to be logged in a window that appears on the computer monitor This window remains open as long as the Vault is running If the Vault is stopped the window disappears If the Vault is restarted the window disappear and then reappears vits py lf you select Computer Console or Window ina Windows environment configure Vault service on Windows to open a window on the desktop for diagnostic messages For directions see section Configure Vault Service on Windows to Open a Window on the Desktop for Diagnostic Messages Once configured Vault activity displays A If you close a window or console the Vault stops Buffalo Surveillance Server does not operate without running Vaults File will cause events to be logged to a file If you select this option you will need to enter or lt Browse to the location to which you want events logged gt Click Next gt The Ready to Add window appears Use to review the parameters for the new Vault before actually adding the Vault F Ready to Add Ready to Add Vault Review the summary below before clicking Next Vault name felix_HardDisk2 Vault type HardDisk Number of data streams 10 Maximum number of directory entries 100 Location where media is stored by default C Program FilesjTesting Media Amount of memory per data stream cache 10 00 MB Temporary files storage location C Program Files Testing WorkingCach
148. ase For example xI substitutes for only names containing xl lt a third character gt such as xls xlr and so on wom n substitutes for only names containing wom lt a third character gt n such as woman or women carbon fib substitutes for only names containing carbon fib lt two characters gt such as carbon fiber or carbon fibre In the Vault Media Name or Storage Pool fields substitute the appropriate wildcard character for any letter or letters For example lets say you have four Vaults e Accounting e Administrative e Development e Sarbanes Oxley And you want to migrate data only to Vaults named Accounting and Actuarial In the Vault field you would enter Ac and data will be stored only to Vaults beginning with Ac regardless of what comes after c The same type of scenario would pertain if you wanted to use wildcards in the Media Name field When you use a wildcard in the Vault field only media and storage pools associated with the selected Vault are displayed in the Media Name and Storage Pool fields For example if you enter j in the Vault field only Media and Storage Pools in Vaults beginning with j will appear in the Media Name and Storage Pool fields The functionality is similar for Media Name For example if you enter Ni only storage pools beginning with Ni will be displayed in the Storage Pool field whe See Advanced Wildcard Functionality for a complete list of and more compl
149. ation in this field cannot be modified Permissions also called rights are the limitations set for users in processing files Rights determine how users also know as roles are permitted to manipulate given files Each unit of media may have as many as sixteen 16 different permission levels The permissions information entered creates an access control list ACL for the unit of media For new media all users on the network are granted rights to use media by default To restrict specific users or groups from having access to a given unit of media you must restrict rights by deleting Buffalo Surveillance Server default rights and adding new limited rights for the specific groups and or users you want to restrict Field Description pe Buffalo Surveillance Server reads rights from top to bottom For example if the Documentation group is denied rights and JohnDoe appears in the list below Documentation even if JohnDoe is granted full rights he will not have any rights if he is a member of the Documentation group On the other hand if JohnDoe appears above the Documentation group and JohnDoe is given full rights he will retain full rights even if he is a member of the Documentation group and the Documentation group is denied rights Also note that Vault rights and media rights are hierarchical with media rights being subordinate to overall Vault permissions gt To add new permissions see Add a New User Group Domain
150. ation to other users groups and domains pe Buffalo Surveillance Server reads rights from top to bottom For example if the Documentation group is denied rights and JohnDoe appears in the list below Documentation even if JohnDoe is granted full rights he will not have any rights if he is a member of the Documentation group On the other hand if JohnDoe appears above the Documentation group and JohnDoe is given full rights he will retain full rights even if he is a member of the Documentation group and the Documentation group is denied rights Also note that Vault rights and media rights are hierarchical with media rights being subordinate to overall Vault permissions gt When you are finished adding new entries click OK to save them Change a Security Entry gt To change a security entry double click it The Change Entry window appears Modify Selected Entry Name type Everyone Entry name Everyone Rights Full Control v tt ee gt Change the values for Name type Entry name and Rights gt Click OK to save changes gt In the Properties window click OK to save changes Delete a User Group Domain or Everyone gt To delete an entry from the Vault Access Control List select it by single clicking it gt Click The entry will be removed from the list gt Click OK to save changes Prepare Existing Media py IMPORTANT NOTE I
151. atterns only the forward slash may be used as a pathname delimiter If you use a backslash as is customary on some platforms you may get unexpected results Wildcard Operators for Vault Media Name and Storage Pool The Buffalo Surveillance Server supports the following wildcards with case sensitive alpha characters in the Vault Media Name and Storage Pool fields for zero or more of any character for any single character Substitutes for zero or more characters Can be used in truncation and for multiple characters If used in a pathname it cannot replace a forward slash Use for all possible alternative spellings and an unlimited number of characters within a name For example h ophilia substitutes for all names containing h lt any character or number of characters gt ophilia such as haemophilia hemophilia or h 1230phelia behavi r substitutes for all names containing behavi lt any character or number of characters gt r such as behaviour behavior or behavi123 zr patent substitutes for only all names containing patent lt a character or any number of characters gt such as patents patentable patented patent123 and so on patent jpg substitutes for only all names containing patent lt a character or any number of characters gt jpg such as patents jpg patentable jpg patented jpg patent123 jpg etc jpg substitutes for only all names containing lt any character or set of characters gt jpg
152. auses your Buffalo Surveillance Server Information Repository to contain more files Longer clips larger files enable your Buffalo Surveillance Server device to have fewer files In either case the amount of storage space used depends only on the amount of data that is captured not the number of files The cache folder is where incoming video streams are staged when they are first captured but not yet in the Information Repository Cache Folder A Each camera should have its own cache directory gt Leave the setting Default Location or select At Pathname and enter the path gt Click to save all policy settings and implement the policy Metadata Tab and Configuration LS The Metadata Tab is only displayed if it has been configured as described below This section is intended only for advanced users It covers MetadataExtensions cfg a text file you can create to add and configure an additional optional Metadata tab in the Camera Policies application and optional extended metadata search fields in SVM Extended metadata enable you to ingest custom metadata that you want associated with videos Later when you need to find and retrieve videos you can search using the extended metadata that was ingested when the video was processed Extended metadata searching in the Surveillance Video Manager requires metadata that can be collected at ingest only if MetadataExtensions cfg is configured correctly for Camera policies In short the
153. ave an asterisk in the first column Select a camera and click OK or double click the camera item for the camera information to configure IP Address Manufacturer Model 192 168 1 13 AXIS 6032 192 168 1 55 px4 Web 192 168 1 11 hp LaserJet 192 168 1 57 Canon Mx870 Show all devices Ca Cea ae Jf mh eM eth P mh a a aami a Aei a ny t pe If the camera manufacturer or model is not listed use the Camera Configuration window to add the camera rather than this wizard See Add an IP Camera Standard Model63 gt In the IP address text box type the host name or IP address in dot notation gt Type the user name and password for the camera if they are required to access it gt Click the Test Camera button to start a viewer to test whether the supplied information is correct What if my camera is not listed in the Add Camera Wizard If your camera is not listed in the Add Camera Wizard you ll need to add the camera s information manually using the Camera Configurations window for IP cameras See Add an IP Camera Standard Model s for this procedure gt Click Next The Description window appears Description What is the name of this camera For example Front Lobby Enter a brief description of this camera gt Enter a meaningful name that lets you identify the camera You may also enter a brief description gt Click Next The Recording Schedule window app
154. ave full control Enables the user group domain or everyone to store and retrieve Store Retrieve data Enables the user group domain or everyone to retrieve but not PeIrevg store data N Blocks the user group domain or everyone from doing anything one with data gt Click OK gt Use o or to respectively move the new entry up or down in the list to change the priority the new entry is given in relation to other users groups and domains pe Buffalo Surveillance Server reads rights from top to bottom For example if the Documentation group is denied rights and JohnDoe appears in the list below Documentation even if JohnDoe is granted full rights he will not have any rights if he is a member of the Documentation group On the other hand if JohnDoe appears above the Documentation group and JohnDoe is given full rights he will retain full rights even if he is a member of the Documentation group and the Documentation group is denied rights Also note that Vault rights and media rights are hierarchical with media rights being subordinate to overall Vault permissions gt When you are finished adding new entries click OK to save them Change a Security Entry gt To change a security entry double click it The Change Entry window appears Modify Selected Entry Name type Everyone Entry name Everyone Rights Full Control v tt ee
155. b will fail The names above lt any gt represent Vaults media or storage pools actually running in your Information Repository The names below the divider are the ones that you have not yet been configured in the VaultAdmin application wile oo if you enter a new name for a Vault the Media Name and Storage Pool options are limited to lt any gt and lt new entry gt New entries in Media Name or Storage pool do not limit options in the remaining fields sits pe lt unnamed gt and lt any gt are not just placeholders They are literal names that are used in your Information Repository unless you provide alternate names aye py To return the tab to a state where you can choose any value from any field select lt any gt in the Vault field a When entering pathnames or pathname searching patterns only the forward slash may be used as a pathname delimiter If you use a backslash as is customary on some platforms you may get unexpected results Wildcard Operators for Vault Media Name and Storage Pool The Buffalo Surveillance Server supports the following wildcards with case sensitive alpha characters in the Vault Media Name and Storage Pool fields for zero or more of any character for any single character Substitutes for zero or more characters Can be used in truncation and for multiple characters If used in a pathname it cannot replace a forward slash Use for all possible alternativ
156. be read Command Command lt command specification gt Description Defines the command specification that will be executed Along with the command the command line must enumerate each Query block See the sample file below for an illustration Required where is a number is the substitution query value Each enumerates a Query There should be one per Query values may be in any order The command specification cannot have more than Query statements However you may specify only certain blocks by omitting query numbers For example you would include only query blocks 1 3 and 7 by using only lt 1 3 7 gt The following substitution tokens may also be in the Command specification e U User e M Host e D Date e T Time P Pathname to where the files are to be retrieved e O Filename containing list of files in the export list You can use tokens to define optional functionality in the Command section Unless noted otherwise tokens do not have to be present in the Command section When tokens are omitted default values will be used Include any of the following tokens when you want to use non default values Token Value DeleteWhenDone lt Boolean gt Description Defines whether files will be deleted from the local system when command is completed Token Value Description lt character string gt DestinationPathname lt pathname gt FileNamin
157. bel for the control as it will appear in the application Default The value that will be loaded into the control by default Valid values a number between the LowerLimit and UpperLimit Default the lower limit ay If the DefaultValue for a Spin block is not between the LowerLimit and UpperLimit the entire MetadataExtensions block will be ignored The tooltip for the control Default The lower limit for the spin control Default 0 The upper limit for the spin control Valid only for Spin Default lower limit 100 The metadata item s name Query block Type Valid Token Values Type String Label lt character string gt Default Value lt character string gt Blank ValueOk lt Boolean gt Description lt character string gt Description Required Default The Query type The label for the control as it will appear in the application Default The value that will be loaded into the control default Valid values a string Defaults Indicates whether the value may be left blank Valid for String and Pathname only Valid values true false Default true The tooltip for the control Default Sample Generic MetadataExtensions cfg This is a sample of an MetadataExtensions cfg file IngestMdExt Required This identifies the beginning of the metadata extension block for Target amp Process This is t
158. captured from cameras in the Doors camera pool are included There is no limit to the number of camera pools your Buffalo Surveillance Server solution may have If you know a video is located in a specific camera pool select the camera pool using the pull down list gt Select the camera pool from the pull down list or type a camera pool name and wildcard Limit your search to a specific camera by entering the camera s description gt Type the description for the camera that captured the video to search wll i f pe No results are returned if a camera description is not part of the solution Limit your search to a particular device in your Buffalo Surveillance Server solution gt Select the device that you want from the pull down list or enter the device name and a wildcard Limit your search to the particular host computer to which video was originally captured When a computer name is entered only video stored from that computer is listed This field may contain only a portion of the computer name and is always case sensitive Wildcards are permitted Show video stored on this media Show video stored in this storage pool gt To select a specific computer type the name of the computer into the text box v pE pe No results are returned if a camera description is not part of the solution Increase the speed of your search by limiting the search to a particular unit of media gt Select the unit
159. catalogs Field Digital Fingerprinting always selected for hard disk and tape media File De duplication Owner read only Additional Permissions Description This option supports proper chain of custody management When enabled Buffalo Surveillance Server automatically assigns a digital fingerprint to all data captured or ingested into the Information Repository This option is always selected and cannot be changed for hard disk and tape Vaults De duplication enables you to prevent the duplication of data in the Information Repository If you enable this option Buffalo Surveillance Server will check the destination media before moving data for exact copies of data you want to process If an exact copy of the data exists in the destination media Buffalo Surveillance Server will not store the part of the data that is redundant Instead it will reference the already stored data on the destination media A If you use de duplication you may end up with only one full copy of any given piece of data in your Information Repository This means that if the Vault or media upon which the data is stored fails you will lose your data To prevent this from happening be sure to back up all critical data without using de duplication This is the name of the owner of the media to whom rights that you set will pertain The media owner value is a pass through from the Vault s host computer and the login being used The inform
160. ce Server applications running on Windows XP The appearance of your applications may vary slightly depending on your OS Buttons are indicated by brackets For example if you were to see click Save J in the directions you would want to click the Save button All of the sample pathnames shown in this guide are for a Windows OS Use the path naming convention that is appropriate to the OS on which you are running this product For example if you are running a Unix OS where this guide states C Program Files BUFFALO you would instead use usr local BUFFALO This guide uses icon symbols to enable the reader to easily identify tips special documentation convention information cautionary statements and advanced user information pe Tip a Cautionary statement Lf Advanced user information Documentation convention information Buffalo Surveillance Server Conventions Convention Pathname and Case Usage Contents Pathnames for hard disk media log files and miscellaneous directories are case sensitive on non Windows computers Convention Buffalo Surveillance Server Privileged Users Opening a Buffalo Surveillance Server application in UNIX Contents wo py Unless noted otherwise values you enter such as when creating a Vault or searching for a file are not case sensitive but are case preserving This means that you can use case but case is ignored by the application a Whe
161. censing is based on storage capacity and the number of cameras associated to a recording computer The server and recording computer are your NAS unit Each Vault within your Information Repository requires a storage license to store video on a Vault and every recording computer requires a camera license to record video Licenses for your products are tied to the computer where they were activated You can move licenses between computers by requesting a new product key Optional available licensed uses include Data Service Policies Vault platform devices surveillance or module extensions Milestone OnSSI The following is a breakdown of the two types of licensing e Capacity licensing This license is used to increase Vault storage capacity for storing video such as terabyte for hard disk storage or slot count for data tape storage device e Camera licensing This license is used to allocate the number of cameras used to capture video per recording computer These licenses can be bundled together to achieve your needed storage capacity or camera count Run as many Buffalo Surveillance Server software clients as you need on the network at no additional charge Every Buffalo Surveillance Server comes with a single camera license and a storage license which must be activated Your licenses are managed through the Vault Admin to activate or add a license see Vault Admin gt Actions gt Vault Properties gt Licensek19 Add o
162. cies and Destination tab of Camera Policies See respective Source or Destination tabs for details on how to utilize filters in the Vault Media Name Storage Pool fields wit L Wildcards can be used in combination with one another See the last row of the table below for examples wile 2 Unless otherwise noted searching is not case sensitive oie pe These wildcard operators will not work for content searching wet py To obtain predictable results when using wildcards for metadata it is best to avoid using and Operators Following are all of the wildcard operators you can use when creating file or directory filters or carrying out file searches The wildcard operators below will not work for content searching Wildcard Any single character in aname Zero or more characters in a name Description Substitutes for any single character and can be combined to denote multiple characters If used in a pathname it cannot replace a forward slash Use for specific alternative spellings substitutes for a single character substitutes for two characters substitutes for three characters and so on Only names with characters equal to the number of used are processed For example cell substitutes for all names containing cell lt one additional character gt For example cells and cello but not cell You can use within or at the end of a phrase For example xI substitutes f
163. client Schedule setup Image Position Audio a on gt Select the Image Position tab Your camera s video feed will appear with the date time and Preset ID listed at the top of the image Ensure that Preset ID is set to SOLERATEC TM WV NS202A WV NS202A JPEG MPEG 4 Cam Function Image Position Audio Hay 2972010 11 51 gam Setup menu Somer TEC 1M Live y Basic setup Multi screen setup Alarm setup Authentication setup Server setup Network setup Schedule setup Maintenance Preset Position SETUP gt gt Help If the preset ID is not set to SOLERATEC TM set the Preset Position gt Beneath the video feed find Preset Position and then click SETUP The Position No page will appear Preset No Position No Preset ID Preset ID 0 9 A Z Any changes are updated immediately Auto focus Dwell time Super Dynamic 3 WER elise gt In the Preset No field at the top of the page use the pull down list to select SOLERATEC TM and then click SET Beneath Position No 1 the Preset ID radio button should be set to ON and the Preset ID 0 9 A Z field should be populated with SOLERATEC TM vita py lf SOLERATEC TM is not an option in the Preset No field ensure that you have added your camera to the Information Repository correctly gt Select CLOSE to close the window and return to the Image Position tab on the Camera setup page The Pres
164. complex feature and should be used with discretion gt Open the Vault Admin application In the left pane of the Vault Admin 20 main window select the Vault a to modify gt Click mg to launch the lt Vault Name gt Properties window or right click the Vault name and select Properties The Properties window features several tabs each responsible for some aspect of Vault functionality It opens to the General tab gt Select the Diagnostics tab General Device Database License Security Logs Notifications Diagnostics Vault s Diagnostic State EEE v Where Messages Will Be Sent Output messages to window Output is sent to Controlling Window Type of Messages General Vault DVD devices Library Hard disk devices File system Database subsystem Tape devices RPC mechanism Optical devices Lock subsystem CD ROM devices Message Detail Short v OK J Cancel Help gt Click the down arrow of the Vault s Diagnostics State combo box gt Select Enabled gt Use the combo box menu beneath Where Messages Will Be Sent and select from the available options Where Messages Will Be Sent Output messages to window Output messages to console Output messages to file Results On a Windows OS this option sends the output information to an on screen window that is opened by the process On a UNIX OS thi
165. controllers fe WY System devices B RA Tape drives WD Quantum SDLT 220 Tape Drive E amp Universal Serial Bus controllers Cl _ gt In the right pane find the tape drive or tape library installed on the computer gt Right click the tape drive and then select Properties ae s q SN If running a tape library be sure to disable the tape library Medium Changers and the actual tape drives in the library Repeat the disabling process for each tape drive within the library Computer Management Local iG System Tools fa Event viewer ga Shared Folders E z Local Users and Groups E i Performance Logs and Alerts a Device Manager 2 Storage E Removable Storage Disk Defragmenter Disk Management a Services and Applications H Computer Es Disk drives m Display adapters fH DVD CD ROM drives H 6 IDE ATAJATAPI controllers Ely Medium Changers Unknown Medium Changer m Monitors H E Network adapters 4p Other devices Unknown device HY Ports COM amp LPT E Processors E K SCSI and RAID controllers Sound video and game controllers a K System devices B RA Tape drives Quantum SDLT 220 Tape Drive 4 Universal Serial Bus controllers Es iy a Update Driver Enable Uninstall Scan for hardware changes Properties The Tape Drive Properties window appears General Tape Drive Parameters Tape Media Capacity Driver Details
166. d Variables below Or gt Use lt Browse to define a new location and type in the file name that you want to use including an extension Filename Field Variables The file path can include a literal file name or a combination of variables that will generate filenames for reports Variables make it much easier to distinguish between reports and to find particular reports For example if you enter a path with a literal file name C Program Files BUFFALO Logs Job_Report log the system will generate the report destination folder Logs if it does not already exist and a report named Job_Report log Similarly if you enter a literal file name say DataErrors log a log named DataErrors log will be generated On the other hand if you enter a path with variables Separated by an underscore for the file name say R Logs P_from_ H_on_ D_at_ T the system will generate the report destination folder Logs and a report named Monday Night Set_from_Rex lt host name gt _on_ lt date gt _at_ lt time gt where policy name host name date and time are populated with the actual details from your Information Repository and job Following are the variables you can enter in the order you prefer When using multiple variables separate them from each other with an underscore _ Variable Description P or Pn Policy Name H or Hn Host Name D Date yyyy mm dd Dy Year Dm Month Dd Day T Time hh mm Th Hour T
167. d metadata searches it is best to use is equal to To obtain predictable results avoid contains does not contain and is not equal to Causes the character immediately following the backslash to be treated as a literal character Normally this is used with one of the wildcard characters to denote that character itself not its wildcard expression meaning For example if you wanted to process literally Accounting 2007 you would enter Accounting 2007 since is normally interpreted by the Information Repository as a wildcard Along with using wildcards individually you can also combine them to create very powerful filters and search criteria For example abc xls substitutes for any phrase beginning with a b or c lt any character or number of characters gt xls abc xls substitutes for any phrase not beginning with a b or c lt any character or number of characters gt xls and substitutes for and lt any number of characters gt any three characters The examples in this table enable you to contrast how wildcards function differently from one another Wildcard Any single character in a name Zero or more characters in a name 9 One or more characters in a name Zero or more characters in a pathname including slashes One or more characters in a pathname including slashes Set of characters Sample Phrase path doc path doc path
168. d therein are and shall remain the sole and exclusive property of Company and its licensors and are protected by copyright and trade secret laws and international copyright treaty provisions 4 2 Licensee shall not remove modify or in any manner tamper with any copyright trademark or other proprietary notices embodied in the Softw are or on the Documentation on any copy of the Softw are and Documentation in any form in whole or in part 5 WARRANTY DISCLAIMERS LIABILITY LIMITATIONS 5 1 COMPANY MAKES NO WARRANTY OR REPRESENTATION WITH RESPECT TO THE SOFTWARE AND IT IS LICENSED AS IS WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND EXPRESS OR IMPLIED INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NON INFRINGEMENT AND ANY STATEMENTS OR REPRESENTATIONS MADE BY ANY OTHER PERSON OR ENTITY ARE VOID COMPANY MAKES NO REPRESENTATIONS THAT ANY PROGRAMMABILITY COMPLIES WITH THE APPLICABLE STATUTES LAWS OR REGULATIONS 5 2 LICENSEE ASSUMES ALL RISK AS TO THE SELECTION USE PERFORMANCE AND QUALITY OF THE SOFTWARE IN NO EVENT WILL COMPANY OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO HAS BEEN INVOLVED IN THE CREATION PRODUCTION OR DELIVERY OF THE SOFTWARE BE LIABLE FOR SPECIAL DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING LOSS OF PROFITS OR INABILITY TO USE THE SOFTWARE EVEN IF COMPANY OR SUCH OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES 5 3 Some states and or countries do not a
169. date range check box gt In the Camera field select the camera that captured the video to search or leave the Camera field set to lt any gt If set at lt any gt video streams captured from all cameras are searched gt Select the More Search Options check box The options selected narrow down videos to be returned Narrower searches return more relevant search results Select from the options listed below pI Ja pe To ensure that search results include all contiguously captured video do not limit your search to a specific NAS device computer or unit of media pe Pull down fields support the use of wildcards For example if you type Axis Buffalo Surveillance Server returns results from all Axis cameras See the section titled Advanced Wildcard Functionality Wildcards for File Searching for details about using wildcards Field Camera Camera Pool Camera Description Show video stored on Show video captured from this computer Purpose and Directions Select the camera name from the pull down list or type a camera name When typing a camera name you can use wildcard functions A camera pool is a user defined virtual grouping of cameras to search video from specified cameras For example a camera pool called Doors that includes all of the cameras that cover the doors of your establishment When you need to see who s come or gone select the Doors camera pool as a search criteria and only video
170. dd or Remove What task do you want to complete Add a new vault to this computer Remove an existing vault from this computer lt Back Next gt Cancel PPT EN O ate nme cil ts tt st tt gt Select Remove an existing Vault from this computer gt Click Next gt The Select window will appear if Select Which vault do you want to remove from this computer select one Name Type felix_TapeLibrary2000653988 TapeLibrary Felix_HardDisk2000653988 TapeLibrary Felix_HardDisk2 HardDisk lt Back Next gt Cancel OO R E E Tee gt Select the Vault you want to remove gt Click Next gt The Ready to Remove window will appear Ready to Remove Ready to Remove Vault Review the summary below before clicking Next Vault name Felix_HardDisk2 A Vault type HardDisk T Number of virtual drives 8 Maximum number of directory entries 200 Administrated by Any user License file Evaluation mode Database location C Program Files Database optimized at Maximum memory used for database 1024 Maximum open database files 100 Activity logging enabled Activity log pathname C Program Files Maximum activity log size 50 Recycle activity log true Enable email notification true Email notification Console pathname con z lt gt lt Back ll Next gt Cancel a N ee Cee ee gt Review the displayed summary to ensure that y
171. de The Add New Camera Wizardls3 generally provides the quickest and easiest way to set up an IP camera and start to record video into the Buffalo Surveillance Server Information Repository If you are a more advanced user and want to set additional camera configuration options such as specifying a Camera Pool or alternative frame size or enabling PTZ use the procedure below a To be able to view and record live video feeds you must ensure that RTSP is enabled on your IP camera See your camera s documentation for details on enabling RTSP wie gt To learn how to view live feeds see the section titled Search for amp Export Surveillance Video Files gt View Live Camera Feeds ks4 LS This procedure assumes that you are using Advanced Models1 in Camera Policies If you are using the standard mode see Add an IP Camera Standard Modele To add an IP Camera Configuration g gt From the toolbar at the top of the Camera Policies 49 application click to open the Camera Configurations window File Edit Tools Help la Save fe Add D4 Delete Camera Name Video Capture URL Status Camera Pool Recording Computer Description N Arecont 2805 sio rtsp 192 16 246 h264 sdp complete gt lt none gt lt n ed gt 4 Arecont Office Arecont Vision AVZ15SDN rtsp 192 168 1 231 h264 lt not complete gt lt none gt lt not selected gt a AYS AVS Uriel Mpix 133 rtsp 192 168 5 238 mpeq4 lt not co
172. de only appears The Device window enables you to define how many data streams are allowed simultaneously and how many files are kept in a directory The options are detailed below f Device Sa How many data streams are allowed at a time 10 How much memory should be used for each data stream cache 10 00m i When storing data how many files will be kept in a directory P ioo Where will media be stored by default C Program Files Media2 i Where can temporary files be stored C Proaram Fies worknaCeched i How much disk space can be used for storing temporary files 100 0068 v i 2 3 alee oom o ar gt Enter the following in the Device window Field Meaning Data streams refers to how many connections can be made to a Vault simultaneously Having several connections enables several clients to communicate with the Vault simultaneously so the more streams you permit the greater the requirements for processing power How many data streams are allowed ata time This setting defines how much virtual memory is set aside for incoming and outgoing data during file storage and retrieval A larger cache may improve performance but will How much memory do so at the expense of using more virtual memory The should be used for each total amount of space used equals the number of data data stream cache streams multiplied by the selected cache size So if you select 10 data
173. ded append the following options to the execution path When you run VaultAdminCl the command line is formed as follows VaultAdminCl lt option gt Option Description input_pathname lt pathname gt Contains the input list of commands Defines the path to the file containing the output output_pathname lt pathname gt Piel results usage Lists all valid parameters version Displays the current version information Interactive Commands and their Arguments After starting the application you can enter the following arguments one at a time at the prompt When entering arguments you can simultaneously enter required variables You can also enter just a given argument and wait for the system to prompt you for its required variables Argument clist close diag drives dstat lt drive name gt errorlog lt pathname gt format lt notation type gt help license lt pathname gt load lt argument gt Description Lists all current clients for the selected Vault Closes the connection to the selected Vault Sets the diagnostic mode for the selected Vault Lists drives for selected Vault Displays information about a selected drive If the name is not listed on the command line you will be asked to provide the name Sets the Vault s error log pathname Valid values e pathname the new error log pathname Enables users to set the current client address format Valid notations e do
174. define how your jobs operate Pre and Post Processing Options Pre Process Command Post Process Command Log and Report Options Error Log Filename R Logs P err Report Options Summary R Logs P log Performance Options Enable transmission optimization Maintain client vault connection for 500 Files O Bytes v Throttle 100 v Miscellaneous Options C Test Run Output results but do not actually move files C Include offline files _ Include deleted files I Rim ms NN i ti lm Aa Bh mn BN Rt a a AN Fletch i gt Select the options below that you need to configure the policy as you wish Pre amp Post Processing Commands Use the pre and post processing commands to execute commands before and after each session You can also enter commands to send process completion notification emails gt Type your pre and or post processing command strings in the appropriate text boxes Command strings can be pointers to executable files with arguments pointers to shell scripts or a command string that the local processor is equipped to accept You can use the following variables in pre and post processing commands Variable Description P or Pn Policy Name H or Hn Host Name D Date yyyy mm dd Dy Year Dm Month Dd Day T Time hh mm Th Hour Tm Minute TS Second R or Rn Root Pathname Valid only at the
175. devices message Change Prepare media 238 246 change alicense 219 Change Vaults Properties 211 changers requirements tape 340 client vault connection maintain 136 201 Command Line Applications Overview Command Line Options 267 Communications Timeout Vault Admin Options 260 Completeness and Accuracy of Stored Files 47 158 Configure a camera 63 console Where Messages Will Be Sent contact Buffalo 11 contains 273 Content 180 233 267 232 Content Search 264 content searching 286 Prepare media 237 245 2012 SoleraTec LLC Create a Policy 85 Migrate 160 Purge 160 Replicate 160 Criteria tab Data Service Policies 179 Current Clients Vault Admin 263 Current O Rate 266 Current Location 264 Current Time 262 D data migration and replication 48 Data Service Policies Advanced tao 196 Criteriatab 179 Destinationtab 188 Export policies 163 Import policies 163 overview 157 Scheduling tab 193 Source tab 175 data storage area 207 Database 217 Database subsystems message 233 Date Time Formatted 264 Date Time Last Accessed 264 Date Time Last Written 264 Delete a Policy 87 163 deleted files include 203 Description 264 Prepare media 237 245 Destination tab Camera Policies 123 Data Service Policies 188 Device 213 Diagnostics 231 Digital Fingerprinting Prepare media 238 246 Directories to Include Exclude 183 directory filters create 184 rules 183 Disk Labeling Fields 324 disk vault 2012 S
176. dia 207 Home Location 264 Host Info 345 Host Name 180 Host name only Address Format 260 How do you want the files named 323 How do you want to create the selected video 320 How do you want to export the files 326 How do you want to export the retrieved files 319 321 323 Import Camera policies 87 Import Data Service policies 163 Import Policies 88 164 Import Export Policy File Structure Include deleted files 203 Include offline files 202 index media 250 Information Vault Admin 262 Interactive Commands and their Arguments 268 ada 89 165 job Run on selected days each week 130 194 Run on specific dates amp times 195 Run repeatedly 130 195 Job Status 273 job run when 129 194 ala label media 207 Last Cleaning 266 legal restrictions 8 libraries requirements tape 340 Library message 233 license 349 359 372 add 219 adding 345 change 219 License Requirements 344 load physical media 251 virtual media 251 Load Balancing 47 158 Load Media 250 load physical media 253 load shadow hard disk media 252 load tape media 253 load virtual media 251 Local File System 160 Localize 129 Location 266 Lock subsystem message 233 2012 SoleraTec LLC Logs 226 Create a Policy 160 low resolution proxy Modify a Policy 161 generate 121 Mini Vault Stats prevewimage 121 launch 338 Media Request 338 M Nominal 338 Trouble 338 Modify a Policy 86 Maintain client vault connection 136 201 Manufacture
177. dia unit being loaded gt In the Media Location pull down list leave the default location Media is located in default location or select Media is located at pathname If you select Media is located at pathname Enter Pathname will become active gt If you select Media is located at pathname enter the directory path for the media unit being loaded in the Enter Pathname text box wit pe Buffalo Surveillance Server will always look for the media at the default location gt Leave Force Re Index set to Only re index if needed Buffalo Surveillance Server will index the media if necessary You can use forced re indexing to ensure that your media is re indexed gt Click OK to complete the process A new unit of media will appear in the media list Load Shadow Hard Disk Media You can load media only to existing shadow hard disk Vaults If you have not yet added Vaults you can do so using the Add or Remove Vault Wizard s44 gt In the left frame of the Vault Adminkod main window click in front of the Vault B into which you wish to load media gt Click and highlight BF Media gt Click an in the Vault Admin tool barl205 to launch the Load Media window The Load Media window will appear Media Location Enter Pathname Force Re Index only re index if needed a v oae MRA o ant e AN OL Da a a DaD pa mon ARa Dan gt In the Enter Pathname field of Media Location
178. doc path doc path doc path 1 3 doc Matches path1 doc paths doc pathq doc etc path doc path1 doc path_sample doc etc path1 doc paths doc path_sample doc etc path doc path1 doc path_sample doc path 1 doc etc path1 doc path_sample doc path 1 doc etc path1 doc path2 doc path3 doc Does not match path path doc path doc path_sample doc etc path path 1 doc path1 docs etc path path doc path doc etc path path1 docs sample path doc etc path path doc path1 docs etc path path doc path docs path4 doc path5 doc Wildcard Sample Phrase Matches Does not match patha doc pathq doc etc path 1 2 3 doc path0 doc path1 doc path4 doc path2 doc ry path5 doc path3 doc patha doc path Characters not in set pathq doc path doc etc path docs etc lpath doc all other files in lpath doc repository Entire pattern not in set Wildcards for Content Searching Buffalo Surveillance Server features powerful content searching capability Data Service Policies 154 features powerful content criteria filtering functionality See the Data Service Policies Criteria tabh7 for details Operators Following are all of the wildcard operators you can use for content searching or defining criteria for Data Service policies vite pe Use quotation marks when you want treat a phrase as if it is a single word For example if you wanted to search for 200
179. done via the Windows Device Manager i v ae a py Disabling these devices in the Windows Device Manager only disables Windows use of the device and does not affect Buffalo Surveillance Server s use of the device xt ae a pe Devices that are active not disabled in Windows will not be visible to or used by Buffalo Surveillance Server To access the Device Manager gt Click Start on the Windows desktop gt Right click My Computer gt Click Manage The Computer Management window appears gt In the left pane of Computer Management click Device Manager E Computer Management Local tay System Tools Computer E Event Viewer E S Disk drives ie 2 Shared Folders Display adapters m Local Users and Groups EB DVD CD ROM drives gi Performance Logs and Alerts c IDE ATAJATAPI controllers PEY Device Manager E Medium Changers Storage Unknown Medium Changer E E Removable Storage H Monitors Disk Defragmenter E E Network adapters BB Disk Management E Other devices f Services and Applications 4 Unknown device oY Ports COM amp LPT E Processors E SCSI and RAID controllers Sound video and game controllers fe WY System devices B RA Tape drives WD Quantum SDLT 220 Tape Drive E amp Universal Serial Bus controllers Cl _ gt In the right pane find the tape drive or tape library installed on the computer gt Right click the tape drive and then select Properties ae s q
180. dress 126 34 52 88 User Name lt Empty gt Password lt Empty gt Schedule M W F 07 00 00 10 00 00 Recording Computer Diego gt Review the information To change anything use the Back button to go to the appropriate wizard screen gt Click Next The List of Cameras Added window appears ays _ m List of Cameras Added Rear Entrance at 126 34 52 88 scheduled on M W F 07 00 00 10 00 00 M Remove selected Camera Do you want to add an additional camera Ores No gt The cameras added during the wizard session are listed To remove any camera select it and then click the Remove Selected Camera button gt If you do not want to add another camera select No To add another camera select Yes in order to cycle through the wizard again Click Next gt If you have no more cameras to add the Ready to Save Camera Configurations and Recording Schedules window appears Ready to Save Camera Configurations and Recording Schedules Click Finish to save the Following cameras Rear Entrance at 125 56 2 56 scheduled on M W F 07 00 00 10 00 00 x Remove Selected Camera Sr Nee eaan cnet ete Mn AA A h Me acetate n A ADA a Am a a aa d A Me Rm A gt The list of cameras ready for saving is displayed To remove any camera select it and then click the Remove Selected Camera button gt Click Finish The Add Camera Wizard closes and
181. during transmission or storage Using this method a unique numeric CRC value is assigned to the files that are being captured or ingested An algorithm calculates this value based on the file s size data stream and other unique characteristics The CRC value is calculated on the client host computer as data is sent to Vaults It is also calculated independently as the Vault is writing the files to its storage device When the data write sequence is completed the Vault compares the client and server calculated values If they match the data on the storage media is considered valid If they don t match the files are marked with an error Buffalo Surveillance Server s uses CRCs for data verification every time stored files are moved or replicated within the Information Repository CRCs provide the same level of data continuity verification as other methods that require a read after write of the stored data but CRCs do so with much higher performance and less resource overhead Data Storage Area The Data Storage Area is the space on media used to store protected files Default A default value or setting is the value or setting that a device or program automatically selects if you do not specify an alternative Default Location Default location defines where by default media will be stored and managed Wherever in Buffalo Surveillance Server there is an option to use a default location Buffalo Surveillance Server will use the defaul
182. dy for playback and review The Media Viewer The Media Viewer enables you to play back and review videos at variable speeds search metadata content navigate to a particular point in a file clip particular parts of videos for export and send clips to the Export Queue 2010 02 17 17 43 43 Once the Media Viewer is opened you will notice another histogram depicted above the timeline scrubber bar shown above This histogram is different from the one on the Search Results window in that this histogram is representative of all of the found videos for the one particular camera chosen from the Search Results window Each Media Viewer will upon the selection of any video clip within the Search Results window allow the playback and review of the entire timeline that was specified in the Search Criteria frame for each individual camera For example if you entered in a date range of July 20 to July 26 and the Back Lot Camera Pool you may have a large number of thumbnail Search Results to choose from Once you click on any of those thumbnail items a Media Viewer will display the entire timeline from July 20 to July 26 for the camera that was associated to the thumbnail selected This gives the user greater flexibility to search back and forth within the timeline of the requested search selection and to view the histogram associated to the entire timeline of that selected camera with the timeline indicator moved to the selected t
183. e Copyright FFmpeg project Legal Disclaimer The manufacturer provides this manual as is makes no representations or warranties w ith respect to its contents or use and specifically disclaims any expressed or implied w arranties of merchantability or fitness for any particular purpose The manufacturer reserves the right to make changes to the content of this manual at any time without obligation to notify any person or entity of such changes The softw are described in this document is furnished under a license agreement The softw are may be used or copied only in accordance with the terms of the agreement It is against the law to copy the softw are on any medium except as specifically allow ed in the license agreement No part of this manual may be reproduced or transmitted in any formor by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying recording or information storage and retrieval systems for any purpose other than the purchaser s personal use without the express written permission of the manufacturer SoleraTec 2012 All Rights Reserved Printed in the United States of America Contact Information Please contact us with any comments or suggestions regarding how we can improve our products or documentation Buffalo Technology Documentation Overview Notes About this Guide Screen shots Buttons Pathnames Help Icon Symbols The screen images in this guide are taken from Buffalo Surveillan
184. e For example if S4 is an option and you select it only S4 media will be utilized pe Although only S4 media will be used the names displayed in the other fields will not change Hard disk is considered a high performance media and is assigned a high rating S8 Slower tape technologies are lower performance and are assigned a lower rating SO You can set either Media Type or Media Speed but not both gt Click the pull down control arrow under the Media Speed label and then select a performance rating The Buffalo Surveillance Server will display only the media speeds that are available for the parameters you have chosen in the Vault Media Name or Storage Pool fields If no Vault media or storage pool is chosen only the speeds from media available within the Information Repository will be displayed Scheduling Tab Define When Jobs Should Run After you have set destination criteria use the Scheduling tab to define when jobs will run You can set scheduling parameters to be very narrow or broad For example you can define schedules that run jobs on a daily or weekly basis setting a few parameters and letting the Buffalo Surveillance Server take care of many of the other details Or you can be very specific defining exact dates and times for jobs to run As soon as you save a policy the schedule that you have created is implemented granted all of the other parameters are acceptable So if you schedule a job to run at
185. e Label This field can be left blank or pre populated with false This is a sample of the Description field Name3 Choice Sample Choice Label 2 This is a sample of the Description field Sample Choice Sample Choice Sample Choice Name4 Checkbox Sample Checkbox Label Hede This is a sample of the Description field Name5 Spin Sample Spin Label 26 This is a sample of the Description field 0 UpperLimit 100 This is the closing brace for the SearchMdExt block ModMdExt Required This identifies the beginning of the metadata extension block for Search amp Retrieve This is the opening brace for the ModMdExt bilock Query Name Name1 Type String Label Sample String Label DefaultValue This field can be left blank or pre populated with a value BlankValueOk false Description This is a sample of the Description field Query Name Name2 Type Pathname Label Sample Pathname Label DefaultValue This field can be left blank or pre populated with a value BlankValueOk false Description Wiiaks LS eh Senos cre ile Wwescweijpedoim eelan Query Name Name3 Type Choice Label Sample Choice Label DefaultValue 2 BlankValueOk Enue Description This is a sample of the Description field Choice Sample Choice Choice Sample Choiice Choice Sample Choice Query Name Name 4 Type Checkbox Label Sample Checkbox Label Der
186. e Prepare Media window It is not active in the Prepare Existing Medial243 window EBD Media ce CS_Enabled_Hd_1 CollapsedFilesArchive_Hd_1 You will have different options depending on whether you are preparing hard disk or tape media Media Type Directions gt Leave the default location Store media at default location This location was set when the vault was initially added and can be changed using the Device tab in the Properties window for the vault Hard disk Or gt Select Store media at pathname to store media at some location other than the default The Enter Pathname field will be activated Media Type Directions gt Enter the Pathname including drive letter of the location at which you want media related files and directories stored For example C Archive Saturday Backups py When you prepare new hard disk media the Media Location default option is set to Store media in the default location If you enter a pathname the parent folder of the pathname you specify must already exist and no other media can already be loaded at that same pathname This pathname is relative to the computer on which the Vault Service is running The Buffalo Surveillance Server Vault Service must have rights to add files and or subsequent folders at the specified location Tape gt Choose a media gt Use When to Prepare to assign a Preparation Time Select from the choices available Preparation Time Results Prepar
187. e Server automatically assigns a digital fingerprint to all data captured or ingested into the Information Repository This option is always selected and cannot be changed for hard disk and tape Vaults De duplication enables you to prevent the duplication of data in the Information Repository If you enable this option Buffalo Surveillance Server will check the destination media before moving data for exact copies of data you want to process If an exact copy of the data exists in the destination media Buffalo Surveillance Server will not store the part of the data that is redundant Instead it will reference the already stored data on the destination media A If you use de duplication you may end up with only one full copy of any given piece of data in your Information Repository This means that if the Vault or media upon which the data is stored fails you will lose your data To prevent this from happening be sure to back up all critical data without using de duplication This is the name of the owner of the media to whom rights that you set will pertain The media owner value is a pass through from the Vault s host computer and the login being used The information in this field cannot be modified Permissions also called rights are the limitations set for users in processing files Rights determine how users also know as roles are permitted to manipulate given files Each unit of media may have as many as sixteen
188. e Server is exporting files the export is stopped and not all of the files in the Export Queue are exported However files that have already been completely exported will remain on the target computer Click Dismiss to close the job status box Customized Export Options This section covers customized export options for Export Job Configuration Custom options are available only when an ExportExtensions cfg file is in place The options in this frame appear when a custom option is available LS Custom export options are customizable via the ExportExtensions cfg file at lt install dir gt Config gt Click Export at the top of the application window The Export window displays Search Export Export Job Configuration Job Status ank or pre populated Browse Y Start Export Fields for Exporting to Custom Locations gt Set the criteria for the following fields Field Meaning and Directions How do you want to gt Select the custom option export the files The image above displays the arguments from the sample ExportExtensions cfg file vite pe If typing a number into a spin control manually press TAB or ENTER for the new number to take effect Argument lt 1 8 gt pe Blank fields are ignored gt After setting the parameters click Start Export to export videos Buffalo Surveillance Server begins to export files and a job status box appears in the Job Status pane While the job is runn
189. e file path can include a literal file name or a combination of variables that will generate filenames for reports Variables make it much easier to distinguish between reports and to find particular reports For example if you enter a path with a literal file name C Program Files BUFFALO Logs Job_Report log the system will generate the report destination folder Logs if it does not already exist and a report named Job_Report log Similarly if you enter a literal file name say DataErrors log a log named DataErrors log will be generated On the other hand if you enter a path with variables Separated by an underscore for the file name say R Logs P_from_ H_on_ D_at_ T the system will generate the report destination folder Logs and a report named Monday Night Set_from_Rex lt host name gt _on_ lt date gt _at_ lt time gt where policy name host name date and time are populated with the actual details from your Information Repository and job Following are the variables you can enter in the order you prefer When using multiple variables separate them from each other with an underscore _ Variable Description P or Pn Policy Name H or Hn Host Name D Date yyyy mm dd Dy Year Dm Month Dd Day T Time hh mm Th Hour Tm Minute Ts Second R or Rn Root Pathname Valid only at the beginning of a string Enable Transmission Optimization This feature enables the client to constantly monitor it
190. e help for more information gt Video amp Image Firmware version 4 40 gt Live View Config MAC address 00 40 8C 7F BB 76 gt Event Configuration gt System Options Language About ahaaha idn aain ia aa aai WR entail ndi aan Modify Video Image Compression The Buffalo Surveillance Server does not modify the default AXIS image compression parameter To maximize performance and minimize loss of image quality you may want to modify this value manually gt Select Video amp Image The Image Settings page will appear AXIS a AXIS 211 Network Camera Live View Setup Help gt Basic Configuration Image Settings 2 Image Appearance v Video amp Image Resolution 640x480 pixels Image nT Overlay Mask Compression 20 0 100 Advanced Rotate image 0 Mi degrees i jew j White balance Automatic a Sadie MiG AC OLLI an sans tentn PAAA Sar hP O a AOR N E O gt Set Compression to 20 This setting will not be reset if you disable and then enable the camera via the Buffalo Surveillance Server If you choose a setting that is less than 20 system performance may be impaired while motion is being recorded If you choose a setting higher than 20 image quality may begin to degrade Modify Motion Detection Settings Along with video compression you may want to change the part of the camera s field of view that is covered by motion detection and motion detection sensitivity gt Select Event Configu
191. e job before you execute a live job gt Check Test Run Output results but do not actually move files When the process is scheduled to run the Buffalo Surveillance Server will build the list of files that match all the criteria but it will not actually move the files Results will be output in the report you have defined in the Report Options fields Include Offline Files Since the Buffalo Surveillance Server logs all of your stored files you have the option of including even off line files in jobs However if in your policy you denote files that are located on off line media the job will require more time as the system will enter a wait state whenever offline media is required gt To include files that are on media that you have physically removed from a Vault check Include offline files A window will appear to request that you physically load the media Include Deleted Files This feature enables you to process files that are marked as deleted in tape media For some media types such as magnetic tape it is not possible to remove files that have been deleted or purged from the Information Repository Due to its sequential write nature a file marked for deletion may lie on the media between two files that remain viable On such media files that are eligible for removal are marked as deleted even though they remain on the media gt Leave the checkbox unchecked to set the policy to ignore files that are marked for deletion
192. e media at next Buffalo Surveillance Server will operate without preparing use the media until a job is started that requires the media Buffalo Surveillance Server will load the specified media Prepare madia now unit into a drive and format it gt Click OK to set your options Add a New User Group Domain or Everyone gt Click The Add Entry window will appear Add New Entry Name type User v Entry name Rights Full Control v D SN Actin aI had Ae d a temas io om dh tela Sonn ote sth mele MAN S aia LP 0 gt Select a Name type This indicates the type of rights gt Enter an Entry name This is the name that will appear under Name wus K pe The name you enter must be valid on the computer on which the Vault is running gt Select the Rights for the new user group domain or everyone This is the actual rights granted to the given user group domain or everyone Right Meaning Full Control Enables the user group domain or everyone to have full control Enables the user group domain or everyone to store and retrieve Store Retrieve data Enables the user group domain or everyone to retrieve but not PeIrevg store data N Blocks the user group domain or everyone from doing anything one with data gt Click OK gt Use o or to respectively move the new entry up or down in the list to change the priority the new entry is given in rel
193. e of Objects This option enables you to select which types of objects are processed If you select Files and Directories both files and directories are processed and rights for both are preserved If you select Directories Only directories and their rights are processed Files are ignored If you select Files Only only files and their rights are preserved Directories are ignored Host Name This option enables you to migrate all of the files from a particular host computer If you use this parameter the policy processes only files that originally came from the host computer that you name gt Enter the name of the computer as shown in your network that you want to define as the Host This option enables you to limit the files that are processed to only those containing a particular word or phrase If you want to process only files that contain a particular phrase be sure to enclose the phrase in quotation marks Otherwise the application processes all of the files containing any word that you enter For example if you enter Information Repository only files that contain the complete phrase information repository are processed In contrast if you enter Information Repository any file containing information repository repository information information or repository are processed Regardless of quotes case is ignored The Content field supports the following single and multiple wildcards for zero or more o
194. e or OnSSI Field What it does Server Address The host name or IP address of the image server from which you want to extract video User Name The user name for a user who has rights to access the camera whose video you want to extract This must be a Basic User Password If the camera requires a user name and password to be accessed this is the password This field works in conjunction with User Name MJPEG stores video in the same format in which it was stored in the VMS and takes the same amount of space Video Type H 264 is a loss less format that takes 30 to 70 less storage space gt Click to save all policy settings and implement the policy Camera Tab Advanced Mode This tab enables you to select or enter the target camera for your recording policy This may be either an RTSP IP enabled camera or one managed by a VMS system LS This topic assumes that you are using Camera Policies in Advanced Models If you are using the default basic mode see Camera Tab Designate the Cameralto4 A Video capture from VMS systems may not be available depending on your hardware device and depending on your product license A To be able to view and record live video feeds you must ensure that RTSP is enabled on your IP camera See your camera s documentation for details on enabling RTSP Camera Processing Destination Scheduling Advanced Camera Information Camera MEE v Recording Computer V
195. e spellings and an unlimited number of characters within a name For example h ophilia substitutes for all names containing h lt any character or number of characters gt ophilia such as haemophilia hemophilia or h 1230phelia behavi r substitutes for all names containing behavi lt any character or number of characters gt r such as behaviour behavior or behavi123 zr patent substitutes for only all names containing patent lt a character or any number of characters gt such as patents patentable patented patent123 and so on patent jpg substitutes for only all names containing patent lt a character or any number of characters gt jpg such as patents jpg patentable jpg patented jpg patent123 jpg etc jpg substitutes for only all names containing lt any character or set of characters gt jpg Substitutes for any single character and can be combined to denote multiple characters If used in a pathname it cannot replace a forward slash Use for specific alternative spellings substitutes for a single character substitutes for two characters 22 substitutes for three characters and so on Only names with characters equal to the number of used are processed For example cell substitutes for all names containing cell lt one additional character gt For example cells and cello but not cell You can use within or at the end of a phrase For example xl substitutes for only names containing xl lt a third
196. eaeeeaeseeeeeeeeneeeaees 226 Logs eiaa a E ene RA eee ee eee 226 Notifications spririt naar angay iede eyieasiie deecsierierplrciantigeuedemeniersiediye 229 Diagnostics giwiariennsiar a e N A i EN EE ii ara iaa 231 VENAE Eoi o E E sede vectart assis 234 Prepare Mediaiis iins ee a A EAEE SEITE N ETa 235 Add a New User Group Domain or EVeryOne 0 2 eeceeeceeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeeeeeneeneeneees 240 Change a Security Mtr yssssdisze teictieescetesdiisciadi eteesdidcazeecivmnegien naaieiseeteadina reece en uaa eevee AEA ESNEA 242 Delete a User Group Domain Or Everyone 0 eeeeeeeeseeeceeeeeeeceeeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeaereeesnesaeeeeeeaeeeeeeaeeeatenes 243 Prepare Bising Mediassa sa eia AEE AEN EEIE NTE aa Add a New User Group or Domain Change a Security Entry eeecscsscessecseeeseeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeaeeeaeens Delete a User Group Domain Or Everyone 0 eeeeeceeseeeceeeceeeeeeeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeseaeeeeesaeesseteeesaeeeaeesaeeeaeenes 250 Load Media Load Reload or Re index Me Ciau ccccccssccccsssseeceesssseeeceesseeecessseseecesseaeeceessasecesessseeeeesssaeeeess 250 Load Hard Disk M ia cccccceceecceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceaeecaeeeeaceeeaeesaeeecaaeeeeaeesaeeeeaaeseeaeeseaeesnsaeeseeeesseeenaeeees 251 Load Shadow Hard Disk Media ccccceccceeeceeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeceaeeceaeeeceaeecaeesaeeeesaeseeaeeseaeeseaeeseaeesseeeeaeeees 252 NO ad Tape MEG R EEEE T 253
197. earch for and view your video feeds To learn more about using the options and powerful capabilities of the Buffalo Surveillance Server see the Getting Started section and the remaining topics in this manual Step When you want to Perform the following steps Connect and set up the storage device Follow the instructions from your Buffalo storage device to gt Physically connect the device to your network power it up and initialize it gt Ensure that your computer is properly configured and connected to a network gt Open the web based administration interface for the device Enable Surveillance capabilities gt In the Web Admin Interface click Applications and then Surveillance Camera to configure the surveillance camera ma V TeraStation ws w J Name TS QVHL758 TS QVHL admin e English Y gt Logout web Senices Fy Applications W aworh aa Network 2 D Backup X Management 2012 Buffalo Technology Inc All Rights Reserved Folder for saving video Specifies where video will be stored if you are not sure of a location then keep the default value Use the Browse button to navigate to other folders Select a LAN Port If there are multiple network connections then select the one that is connected to the desktop Folder for saving video Phoenix LAN Port LAN Porti v gt Click OK Download and Install gt Visit the Buffalo Technology
198. ears MAY Recording Schedule When do you want to record video Always At selected times ETEY gt Indicate when you want to record video e Select Always record video continuously e Select At selected times to record only on certain days or at certain times of the day gt Click Next If selecting to record video at selected times an additional Recording Schedule window opens MAY Recording Schedule On what days of the week Sunday Monday Tuesday Wednesday Thursday Friday Saturday At what time Start 00 00 w Stop 00 00 next day v Length 24 hours 0 minutes gt Use the check boxes to select the days to record video gt Use the Start and Stop drop down lists to set the beginning and ending times for the period to record When you make your selections the length of the time period is indicated gt Click Next After scheduling to record video the Recording Computer screen appears Recording Computer What computer will be used for recording video Select Computer v gt Select the computer for recording video from the drop down list gt Click Next The Ready to Add window appears Ready to Add Review the summary below before clicking Next to add the camera Camera name Rear Entrance Description Panasonic camera at back door onto Ash Street Manufacturer Panasonic Model BL C1114 IP Ad
199. ears in Vault Adminbo denoted as off line and its files and metadata are searchable e Not tracked by the Information Repository The process of unloading media is identical for hard disk media and tape media with one exception On tape media you can either leave the media inside the storage library or remove it from the Information Repository entirely Stand alone tape drive based Vaults work the same as tape library based Vaults wit pe When executing Vault and media operations the Buffalo Surveillance Server may appear as if it is not responding However when the Buffalo Surveillance Server completes its given task it responds normally Follow the steps below to unload media gt From the left frame of the Vault Adminko4 main window click in front of the Vault B trom which you want to remove media gt Click in front of the Vault s Media icon amp amp to open the media list gt Click and highlight the media unit that you want to unload gt Click aas in the Vault Admin tool barl205 The Unload Media window will appear When to Erase Erase media at next use Tab annamh fe aAa o Damat AA BREN omen te Aak rta a gt Use the Media Tracking pull down list and select one of the options available Media Tracking Options Required Input and Results gt Enter a descriptive note about where media will be stored in the text box labeled Location where media will be stored Track
200. econd library can be brought online seamlessly Half of the new tapes can be inserted into the older library and half of its full tapes can be inserted into the new library The result is a balanced Information Repository with two libraries that are accessible to the network TEK py If there is more than one Vault available clients can divide use of the available Vaults They can also fail over to other Vaults should a Vault fail The same logic applies even if there is more than a single tape based Vault containing tapes with the same label for example Monday Incremental Follow the steps in the sections listed below to load reload or re index media gt Load Hard Disk Mediabs gt Load Tape Medial253 gt Reload Mediales4 Load Hard Disk Media You can load media only to existing Vaults If you have not yet added Vaults you can do so using the Add or Remove Vault Wizard 44 gt In the left frame of the Vault Adminko main window click in front of the Vault B into which you wish to load media gt Click and highlight Be Media gt Click an in the Vault Admin tool barl205 to launch the Load Media window The Load Media window will appear General Information Media Name Media Location Media is located in default location v Enter Pathname Force Re Index Only re index if needed Vv a aad gt In the Media Name text box enter the name for the me
201. ed This option enables you to set how often the database will be optimized To ensure that Buffalo Surveillance Server and your Information Repository continue to function optimally the database for every Vault is optimized daily At what time daily do you want the database optimized This option enables you to limit how many files may be open simultaneously Having more files open enables Buffalo Surveillance Server to search faster However more files require more Information Repository resources How many database files can be opened ata time Field Meaning This option enables you to limit how much virtual memory the database will use For best Information Repository performance choose a value that does not exceed 75 of the physical memory on the computer How much virtual memory can the database use gt Click Next gt The Logs window advanced mode only appears Use to define to where activity and error logs are written oO Logs Activity Log V Enable activity logging Where should the activity log be stored C Program Files Logs VaultSvcActivity2 log _ Browse How large can the activity log grow 50 00MB No create a new activity lag when the maximum size is reached Error Log Where should the error log be stored C Program Files Logs vaultSvc2 log Browse 2 Overwrite the activity log when it reaches maximum size i lt Back
202. ed Windows administrator rights to start Vaults These rights are not the same as the Buffalo Surveillance Server rights that are set for processing data or adding media to the Information Repository a Linux gt Simply reboot your system to start Vaults eS Advanced users can open a shell and type sudo sbin service VaultSvc start Macintosh gt Simply reboot your system to start Vaults LS Advanced users can open a shell and type sudo sbin SystemStarter start VaultSve You will be prompted to enter your administrator password Options From the Options menu of Vault Adminl204 you can set the Address Formatkedl and Communications Timeouts 260 for Vaults Address Format gt Communications Timeout gt Options Address Format Address Format refers to the format in which client addresses are displayed in Vault Admin Change the Address Format when you want to see Current Cliente addresses displayed in an alternate format Follow the steps below gt Select Options gt Address Format from the menu bar at the top of the Vault Admin 204 main window Address Format gt f y Dot Notation Communications Timeout gt Full Domain Name Host Name Only gt Select the view that you prefer You have the option of choosing between three alternate formats for viewing the client computer names Each option provides a different level of detail View Formats Results Dot Notation The client computers network address is
203. ed cameras and begin to record video into the Buffalo Surveillance Server Information Repository and search for and view your video feeds To learn more about using the options and powerful capabilities of the Buffalo Surveillance Server see the How To section and the remaining topics in this manual Step When you want to Perform the following steps Connect and set up the Follow the instructions from your Buffalo storage device to storage device gt Physically connect the device to your network power it up and initialize it gt Ensure that your computer is properly configured and connected to a network gt Open the web based administration interface for the device Enable Surveillance gt Open the web based administration interface Web Admin for capabilities your Buffalo NAS device gt In the Web Admin Interface click Applications and then Surveillance Camera to configure the surveillance camera ry ORRU TeraStation o JP Name TS QVHL758 TS QVHL admin oP Language English W gt Logout fd Applications 2 Web Services I fy Applications Bi Network m Backup Management 2012 Buffalo Technology Inc All Rights Reserved Folder for saving video Specifies where video will be stored if you are not sure of a location then keep the default value Use the Browse button to navigate to other folders Select a LAN Port If there are multiple network connections then select the one
204. eee e eee ce cence sete seeseesnesneasesaseseseeseeseegeaeaes Create Modify or Delete Recording Policies s csscsscsseeseeeseeeseesseneseeseeeeenssenessesneneseeeneesseeesenseneesasenensenes 84 Creating a Recording Policy Overview c ccccesceceeseeeeceeceeceeceeeeeeeaeeaeeaecaesaecaesaeseeseeseeseaseaesaesaesaesaesseseeseeeeeees 85 Create a Recording Policy 85 Modify a Recording Policy c i cccss3s5cceicnce cg suze iania evs nade aaaea anaa adena a aV basal Gaia 86 Delete a Recording POlCy isc ccsccssezses esses aceuaecsccnsscacecuaces peaaegagessteainns sare sanaisened pads suncesaceistapaecsersearaceasiesisseczeseniees 87 import or Export Recording POlCieS isscicicecsccnessastcstbsivei ts ctcescecaeesectocsan saver tei T rese i AS SETTE 87 Camera Tab Designate the Cate ia incisciciccscccesccctececcseeccecveceetardecenctenscetenende ctu ectuevacstuaerceeusessaeuneestavectrvecssoizacte 104 Camera Tab Advanced MO iinticiccciccenscccctsctetts step ctadcatveccevedecwasteeecniesiesoctsuedecdiedesuacdeuseuessauienevdaneruerdeudeersetiedee 106 Metadata Tab and Contig tir ation siicicacctcc catsseccnccsseeseceenad cad cceeeadesevecossete does aa aaia aa aaa nanea aka knrn E Aaaa 110 Processing Tab Set Processing Options for Recording or Capture wel 21 User Preferences Set Default User Preferences eeceeceeceeseeseseeeeeseeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeaeeeaeceaeeeaeeaeeneeeeesneeeeeeaee 123 Destination Tab Define Capture Destinations 0 0 0 cc c
205. eeeeeceeeeceeseeeeeeeeeeees Disable SCSI Devices on a Windows Computer Remove a Val tiicicctecroci eek ehscoececenedtoblcns evcecictuedddeiiiceevicivicudien Scheduling Windows Glossary Index Welcome Welcome to the Buffalo Surveillance Server Version 5 6 19 The Buffalo Surveillance Server provides advanced video data storage management including live video feed capture and complete video lifecycle management focused on the record store and manage aspects of a forensics based video surveillance system This highly scalable solution supports a wide variety of RTSP enabled IP cameras for real time and forensic video review See the Getting Started 15 section to get up and running quickly by enabling Buffalo Surveillance Server capabilities configuring an IP camera recording and storing video feeds and searching for video clips e See the How Tol 34 sections for step by step overviews of commonly performed tasks e The rest of this guide includes advanced overview information as well as detailed directions about using Buffalo Surveillance Server functionality Complete Overarching Management The Buffalo Surveillance Server properly manages the storage of video surveillance assets for long term retention You can easily set up and configure the Buffalo Surveillance Server to record store and manage video feeds from up to ten RTSP enabled IP cameras As your needs increase you can add additional surveillance enabled s
206. efaultValue for a Spin block is not between the LowerLimit and UpperLimit the entire MetadataExtensions block will be ignored The tooltip for the control Default The lower limit for the spin control Default 0 The upper limit for the spin control Valid only for Spin Default lower limit 100 The metadata item s name Required Default The Query type The label for the control as it will appear in the application Default The value that will be loaded into the control default Valid values a string Defaults Indicates whether the value may be left blank Valid for String and Pathname only Valid values true false Default true The tooltip for the control Query block T Valid Token Values Description ype Default Sample Generic MetadataExtensions cfg This is a sample of an MetadataExtensions cfg file IngestMdExt Required This identifies the beginning of the metadata extension block for Target amp Process This is the opening brace for the IngestMdExt block Ou TRY a value Query a value Query OueTRy Query Name Type Label DefaultValue BlankValueOk Description Name Type Label DefaultValue BlankValueOk Description Name Type Label DefaultValue Description Choice Choice Choice Name Type Label DefaultValue Description Name Type Label DefaultValue Descripti
207. el DefaultValue BlankValueOk Description Name INOS Label DefaultValue Description Choice Choice Choice Name Type Label DefaultValue Description Name Type Label DefaultValue Description LowerLimit Namel String Sample String Label This field can be left blank or pre populated with false This is a sample of the Description field Name2 Pathname Sample Pathname Label This field can be left blank or pre populated with false This is a sample of the Description field Name3 Choice Sample Choice Label 2 This is a sample of the Description field Sample Choice Sample Choice Sample Choice Name4 Checkbox Sample Checkbox Label Hede This is a sample of the Description field Name5 Spin Sample Spin Label 26 This is a sample of the Description field 0 UpperLimit 100 This is the closing brace for the SearchMdExt block ModMdExt Required This identifies the beginning of the metadata extension block for Search amp Retrieve This is the opening brace for the ModMdExt bilock Query Name Name1 Type String Label Sample String Label DefaultValue This field can be left blank or pre populated with a value BlankValueOk false Description This is a sample of the Description field Query Name Name2 Type Pathname Label Sample Pathname Label DefaultValue This field can be left blank or pre pop
208. elects files with a dtu equal to or after the relative specified date e LO Ingests all files e L1 ingests all data changed since the last LO job e L2 Ingests all data changed since the last L1 job error_log lt pathname gt exclude_dir_spec lt pathname gt exclude_file_spec lt pathname gt ext_metadata lt command gt ext_metadata_plugin lt character string gt file_grouping_plugin lt character string gt file_spec lt pathname gt follow_links e L3 ingests all data changed since the last L2 job e L4 Ingests all data changed since the last L3 job Default LO Specifies the path for the error log file If you specify dewtty error messages will display on the default output device Supports token substitution Default path for the configuration file R Logs P err Default path for the command line dev tty Omits directories Accepts multiple instances Default no directories excluded Omits files Accepts multiple instances Default no files excluded Extended metadata in a token value pairs Token values can be found in the Camera policies section titled Metadata Tab and Configuration Format token lt command gt token lt command gt Default Enables the collection of extended metadata Default Enables file grouping Default Sets the criteria for files that are to be ingested This
209. epository another user can change policies while you are working in Data Service Policies To ensure A that you are viewing the most current list of policies use You can also use to update the contents of the Vault Media Name and Storage Pool fields in case you have added Vaults media or storage pools via Vault Admin 204 while working in Data Service Policies A A If you use 4 any changes that you have made or policies you have added will be lost unless you first save How to Create a Data Service Policy Overview Follow the steps below to create a Data Service policy 1 Launch Data Senice Policies i5 2 If a policy is not already open by default create a policy 16 Before you can set parameters and initialize the process a policy must be open 3 Select the Source tabl175 to identify a Vault media or storage pool from which you want to migrate replicate or purge files 4 Select the Criteria tabl179 to denote which files to migrate duplicate or purge You can also add file and directory filters 183 5 Select the Destination tabl184 to specify where you want the files migrated or replicated to 6 Select the Scheduling tabl193 to define when you want jobs to occur By default Data Service policies are not scheduled run 7 Select the Advanced tab o to set options such as pre and post processing commands log output location connection sharing and throttling 8 Click to initiate the polic
210. er interprets as wildcards or as otherwise special If you need to use a character literally that the Buffalo Surveillance Server uses as a wildcard the character must be preceded by an escape character For example This is an example using escape characters in a statement with a wildcard The following are Buffalo Surveillance Server wildcards and special characters E l i As amp h j y See the Advanced Wildcard Functionality section for details about wildcards Command Section of the ExportExtension Block The Command section includes the ExportExtension statement that defines the beginning of an Export Extensions block and includes the command that will be executed as well as other tokens ExportExtension This identifies the beginning of the ExportExtension block This is the opening brace for the ExportExtension block lt token gt lt value gt lt token gt lt value gt Command lt S S S S SU SM gt This is REQUIRED statement The following block name defines the beginning of an ExportExtension block in an ExportExtensions cfg file Block name Description Identifies the beginning of an ExportExtension ExportExtension block Required The command below is required AN Note that the entire block will be ignored if there are fewer Query block statements than in the Command In other words if you have three Query block sections and four the block will not
211. er of present are processed names with more letters are also processed For example actua substitutes for all filenames containing actua lt four or more additional characters gt such as actuarial actuaries actualization actua12345 xls but not actual Wildcard Proximity searches Fuzzy searches 0 Range searches TO Description Proximity searches enable you to search based on whether words are proximate to one another To do a proximity search use the tilde symbol and a value at the end of a phrase For example to search for compliance and December within 10 words of each other in a document use compliance December 10 Fuzzy searches enable you to search based on an approximate spelling To execute a fuzzy search use the tilde symbol at the end of a single term For example to search for a term similar in spelling to report use report This search will find terms like deport reports and reporting You can also specify the level of required similarity Using a value between 0 and 1 only terms with a higher similarity will be matched with values closer to 1 For example roam 0 8 The default is 0 5 if a value is not defined Range searches enable you to match documents whose field values are between the lower and upper bound specified by the search Range searches can be inclusive or exclusive of the upper and lower bounds Inclusive range searches are denoted
212. er uses as a wildcard the character must be preceded by an escape character For example This is an example using escape characters in a statement with a wildcard The following are Buffalo Surveillance Server wildcards and special characters ef l N amp h T See the Advanced Wildcard Functionality section for details about wildcards 3 Set Export Options amp Export Videos and Clips 619 Launch the Surveillance Video Manager To launch a Buffalo Surveillance Server application see the instructions for the OS below Windows gt To launch a Buffalo Surveillance Server application from the Windows desktop click Start gt All Programs gt BUFFALO and then select the application to run Macintosh gt To launch a Buffalo Surveillance Server application on a Macintosh browse to Applications gt BUFFALO gt Bin and then select the application to run Configure Rimage to Publish Videos To export to Rimage you need to ensure that required system folders are in place and system permissions are set correctly You must then enable Rimage export using the Rimage Configuration window Once enabled Rimage will be activated as an option in the Where do you want to export the files field in Export Job Configuration How Buffalo Surveillance Server Interacts with Rimage As illustrated in the diagram below when an Export job is executed Buffalo Surveillance Server sends data to the Export fo
213. erform any Vault operations The information in this Vault Admin section is provided for information only To ensure that Windows does not interfere with Buffalo Surveillance Server s management of SCSI tape drives and libraries Medium Changers disable Windows use of these devices This is done via the Windows Device Manager i wet E py Disabling these devices in the Windows Device Manager only disables Windows use of the device and does not affect Buffalo Surveillance Server s use of the device ws X py Devices that are active not disabled in Windows will not be visible to or used by Buffalo Surveillance Server To access the Device Manager gt Click Start on the Windows desktop gt Right click My Computer gt Click Manage The Computer Management window appears gt In the left pane of Computer Management click Device Manager E Computer Management Local tay System Tools Computer E Event Viewer E S Disk drives ie 2 Shared Folders Display adapters m Local Users and Groups EB DVD CD ROM drives gi Performance Logs and Alerts c IDE ATAJATAPI controllers PEY Device Manager E Medium Changers Storage Unknown Medium Changer E E Removable Storage H Monitors Disk Defragmenter E E Network adapters BB Disk Management E Other devices f Services and Applications 4 Unknown device oY Ports COM amp LPT E Processors E SCSI and RAID controllers Sound video and game
214. erties window or right click the Vault name and select Properties The Properties window features several tabs each responsible for some aspect of Vault functionality It opens to the General tab gt Select the Security tab General Device Database License Security Logs Notifications Diagnostics Vault Access Control List Rights Name Type rul Control Everyone Everyone HI ie ahh naan TT Ne ete Man ATM o The Security tab displays users groups and domains and the level of rights granted each indicates full rights indicates rights to store and retrieve data indicates rights to retrieve but not store data X indicates no rights whe amp Buffalo Surveillance Server reads rights from top to bottom For example if the Documentation group is denied rights and JohnDoe appears in the list below Documentation even if JohnDoe is granted full rights he will not have any rights if he is a member of the Documentation group On the other hand if JohnDoe appears above the Documentation group and JohnDoe is given full rights he will retain full rights even if he is a member of the Documentation group and the Documentation group is denied rights Also note that Vault rights and media rights are hierarchical with media rights being subordinate to overall Vault permissions Follow the steps in the sections listed below to add change or delete security rights gt
215. ery unit of media that you want to use for that purpose To assign a unit of media to a storage pool select a storage pool from the pull down list or enter the name of the storage pool for example Monday night backup This value defines the amount of storage space you want to make available for the Information Repository on the given unit of media It enables you to limit how much physical space on a single hard disk the Information Repository will use For example if the given unit of media has a physical capacity of 100 GB you can limit the amount available to the Information Repository to say 50 GB by entering 50 If you enter a value greater than the amount of space actually available Buffalo Surveillance Server will nevertheless recognize and use only as much space as is physically available This feature enables you to search the content of files in the Information Repository With this feature activated you can run content specific searches For example you can find all content containing the phrase 1Q2006 If not selected you will not be able to search for content in your Information Repository Enabling this feature will increase the size of your metadata catalogs Field Digital Fingerprinting always selected for hard disk and tape media File De duplication Owner read only Additional Permissions Description This option supports proper chain of custody management When enabled Buffalo Surveillanc
216. es 50 125 billion 100 250 billion 150 375 billion 200 500 billion 300 750 billion 400 1 trillion 500 125 trillion Default location defines where by default media will be stored and managed Wherever in Buffalo Surveillance Server there is an option to use a default location Buffalo Surveillance Server will use the default location Data streams refers to how many connections can be made to a Vault simultaneously Having several connections enables several clients to communicate with the Vault simultaneously so the more streams you permit the greater the requirements for processing power This setting defines how much virtual memory is set aside for incoming and outgoing data during file storage and retrieval A larger cache may improve performance but will do so at the expense of using more virtual memory The total amount of space used equals the number of data streams multiplied by the selected cache size So if you select 10 data streams and 10 MB of cache the Vault will set aside 100 MB of total virtual memory for caching data A selection of 10 MB is usually sufficient This setting enables you to define where the working cache will be located The default location is lt install dir gt WorkingCache When Buffalo Surveillance Server is processing files it sometimes creates temporary files These enable Buffalo Surveillance Server to work more quickly and efficiently and are especially important when you are clipp
217. es a command that runs immediately after the job is finished Supports token substitution Default Token Value pre_proc_cmd lt command gt remove_only lt Boolean gt repeat_interval lt hh ss mm gt src_high_water_mark lt number gt src_low_water_mark lt number gt src_media_name lt character string gt src_media_speed lt character string gt stc_media_type lt character string gt Description Specifies a pre process command that runs immediately before a job starts Supports token substitution Default Purges the targeted file from the source Vault instead of migrating or replicating it Valid values true false Default false Used only in the policy file The amount of time that elapses before a job is repeated Default 24 00 00 Specifies the maximum percent of media that will be used If the used is greater than the entered value the file is processed Valid values 1 100 Default 0 Specifies the minimum percent of media used after the high watermark has been reached If the of media used is greater than this value and the high watermark has been reached the file is processed Valid values 1 100 Default 0 Specifies the source media name Default any Specifies the source media speed Valid values e S0 S10 e Unspecified Default unspecified Specifies the source media type from which the file should be p
218. es a numeric version numbering scheme according to which every release has a unique four number identifier four numbers separated by periods such as 2 4 13 1 These numbers represent the following lt major gt lt minor gt lt revision gt lt build gt In other words the first number of the series is the number of the major release the second the minor release the third the revision the fourth the build of the revision Video Lifecycle Management Video Lifecycle Management VLM is a video aware subset of Information Lifecycle Management providing a comprehensive approach to managing captured video and its associated metadata from creation and initial storage to the time when it becomes obsolete and is deleted Unlike other approaches to video data management that just automate storage procedures such as hierarchical storage management HSM VLM involves all aspects of dealing with video starting with user practices Also in contrast to other systems which rely on video age as the sole criteria for video storage and retrieval VLM manages metadata such as camera names camera locations and motion detection data to name a few This enables the utilization of more complex criteria for storage management and video retrieval View menu The View menu enables you to select Enable Tool Tips and Enable File Tips Tool Tips are brief descriptions of window controls that appear when you hover your cursor over a control A File Tip is a f
219. essssesessessessseseessesseesevseeseeseeseesnesnesaesoesaesensonsseesneaes 123 Scheduling Tab Define When Video Will Be Recorded ssscssccsessseesseeseneseeeneneseeeenseeeseeesenessensenenseesenenaes 129 Advanced Tab Set Advanced Capturing Options sns s nnsusnnnnsnrnnnnnunnnnnnnnnnnnnunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nnee 131 View Live Video Feeds Live Viewer 137 View a feed from a CAMEL A ceccceee ee ee eee ee ee ee ee ee seen seen eeeeeeseeeseeeseeeseeesasesaegsaseseseseesseeesenenes 140 View feeds from a camera POOI o eee ceeeccceeecceececcenceceseceeeeecueeeeeeeceenseceseeeeeeeeuaneeeeeeeeeners 141 Change Save or Delete a Live View LayoOut ccccccesssssseeeecececeecssseeeeeseeeeeacenseeseeees 142 Control Camera Pan Tilt Zoom and FOCUS cccceeeceeeceeeceeeceeeceeeeeeeeeeseeeenseenseenseesees 143 Motion Detection Camera Configuration 145 AXIS Camera Motion Detection Configuration 02 ccceecccseeceeeeecceeeeceeeeeeeeeceeseeeeeeeeeners 146 Panasonic Camera Motion Detection Configuration cceceseeeeeesseeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeenees 150 Manage Data and the Information Repository Data Service Policies and Vault Admin 156 Data Service Policies Create Policies to Manage Data in the Information Re POSitOry ccceccceeeceeececeeneeceeeceeececeeneeeececeeneeceseeeeeeeceaueeceseaeeneeeseeeeneeeeers 157 How to Create a Data Service Policy OVErVieW
220. et Export Options amp Export Videos You will be able to export video only after you have searched for and selected it See the previous section Search for Review amp Select Videos amp Clips es for details Export to Local File System Export Job Configuration supports several user defined export criteria gt Click Export at the top of the SVM application Export Job Configuration Start Export Export Job Configuration Fields gt Set the criteria for the following fields Field Meaning and Directions Defines where videos will be exported gt Select Local File System Export Destination Y 4 Y pe Additional custom options will be available only when an ExportExtensions cfg file is in place A user defined field that associates a name with the job The name you enter here will appear in job logs If left Job name blank a default value will be entered gt Enter a job name Field Meaning and Directions Default Path or Different location You can export data back to its original location or to any other location in the network gt Leave this setting as is to export data to the default path Or Where to save files gt To export data to a different location such as your desktop select Different location A browser window will display so that you can choose where you want to export files gt Select a destination gt Click OKto set your choice Determines
221. et ID beneath the date and time should be SOLERATEC TM gt Select Alarm setup The alarm setup page will appear Network Camera WV NS202A Live Setup menu Basic setup Camera setup Multi screen setup Authentication setup Server setup Network setup Schedule setup Maintenance Help WV NS202A Alarm VMD area Alarm setup Terminal alarm 1 Terminal alarm 2 Terminal alarm 3 VMD alarm Command alarm Command alarm Originating port number Camera motion on alarm Terminal alarm 1 Terminal alarm 2 Terminal alarm 3 VMD alarm Notification OFF x OFF x OFF v OFF v BR HR ON gt Select the VMD area Video Motion Detection tab The video feed will appear The white square enclosing most of the video feed indicates the area for which motion alarms can be set and motion detection metadata collected This tab also enables you to modify the following parameters Field Function Status Detection sensitivity if you set ignored Enables you to turn motion alarms and motion metadata gathering on and off When set to ON alarms are enabled and the Buffalo Surveillance Server will capture motion metadata When set to OFF alarms are disabled and no motion detection metadata will be captured Enables you to define the level at which motion will be detected and recorded for the area of the feed for which a motion alarm can be set This area is defined by the white square enc
222. etadata of the data it contains which is updated every time the media is utilized A metadata file is created for every file managed by a Buffalo Surveillance Server Vault The metadata file contains information about the files in the Information Repository including file name pathname original owner rights ACLs date and time stamp file size file type and the file s stored location This information is used to track and manage files while they are in the Information Repository It is also used to provide a quick response to queries about files required for retrieval Object As used in this help documentation an object is any thing that can be clearly identified apart from other things For example networks computers drives folders files icons etc On Media Catalog The On Media Catalog is the metadata catalog stored on every media unit that contains metadata for all the files The on media catalog is an Information Repository safeguard Should a Vault catalog become lost or corrupted the on media catalogs are used to rebuild it Os OS is an abbreviation for Operating System For example Windows OS X Linux Pathname A pathname is a sequence of symbols that denotes the location of the file or directory by outlining the route or path from the host name if the file resides on a remote server through the directory structure to and including the final filename or directory name Each directory name in the series
223. ete information about wildcards Destination Fields Vault Vaults are the basic units of storage in your Information Repository gt Click the pull down control arrow and from the list that appears select a Vault or select lt new entry gt to add a new Vault name When you select a Vault the Buffalo Surveillance Server will populate the Media Name pull down menu with the media that it finds on the given Vault wile if you enter a new name for a Vault the Media Name and Storage Pool options will be limited to lt any gt or lt unnamed gt and lt new entry gt Media Name Media Name refers to the names of individual units of media in the Vaults of your Information Repository gt Click the pull down control arrow and from the list that appears select the media or select lt new entry gt to add a new media name The Buffalo Surveillance Server will then automatically look for the Storage Pools that comprise the media If the Buffalo Surveillance Server cannot find storage pools that comprise the media that you have selected the Storage Pool field will display lt any gt Storage Pool Storage Pools are groupings of media utilized for a particular purpose A typical example of storage pooling is the utilization of several units of media for a single policy For example if you want to have the Monday night backup write to several units of media you would use a Monday night backup storage pool and assign to it eve
224. ey are stored Catalogs on media contain information about the files on the media Client Buffalo Surveillance Server clients can also be thought of as fat clients They provide interfaces for system administrators and end users Although divided by functionality in Buffalo Surveillance Server s balanced extended client server architecture clients often play roles normally supported by servers This enables increased Information Repository flexibility security robustness and capacity Communications Timeout If Buffalo Surveillance Server is unable to connect with a computer in the network or communications are interrupted during a job Buffalo Surveillance Server will wait a predefined period of time before completely dropping the connection This period of time is called the communications timeout Companion File Companion file is another name for the low resolution proxy file that Buffalo Surveillance Server can create when capturing or ingesting videos Component A component is a single independently running application or utility that might or might not interact with or have dependencies on other applications Buffalo Surveillance Server software consists of several separate components for example clients and servers that work together to protect your files CRC CRC stands for cyclic redundancy check Buffalo Surveillance Server uses CRCs to ensure data integrity by detecting accidental alterations of data
225. ez Amount of disk space used for temporary files 100 00 GB Database location C Program FilesjTesting Database2 Database optimized at 12 00 AM Maximum memory used for database 1 00 GB Maximum number of open database files 100 Activity logging enabled false Enable email notification False Error log pathname C Program Files Test LogsMaultSvo2 log Console pathname con dae OA ge tet rte te etn bile hth tet ete tata ty Ranty tt a tenet inte a v lt Back Il Next gt Cancel Pt ee Ente tte ah htt aS gt Review the displayed summary and ensure that all of the values are correct gt When ready to add the new Vault click Next The Completed window appears gt Click Finish to exit the Add or Remove Vault Wizard Restart the computer for the new Vault activation To add another Vault or remove a Vault launch the Add or Remove Vault Wizard again a If you do not restart your computer the new Vault will not start or be available for use gt After restarting your computer Launch Vault Adminko4 to prepare mediales4 for the Vault just added See the Administrator s Guide gt Vault Admin gt Actions gt Prepare Media for directions Add a Tape Library IMPORTANT NOTE If you are using the Buffalo Surveillance Server Vaults and media are preconfigured and prepared automatically there is no need to perform any Vault operations The information in this Vault Admin section is provided
226. f any character for any single character Substitutes for zero or more characters Can be used in truncation and for multiple characters If used in a pathname it cannot replace a forward slash Use for all possible alternative spellings and an unlimited number of characters within a name For example h ophilia substitutes for all names containing h lt any character or number of characters gt ophilia such as haemophilia hemophilia or h 1230phelia behavi r substitutes for all names containing behavi lt any character or number of characters gt r such as behaviour behavior or behavi123 zr patent substitutes for only all names containing patent lt a character or any number of characters gt such as patents patentable patented patent123 and so on patent jpg substitutes for only all names containing patent lt a character or any number of characters gt jpg such as patents jpg patentable jpg patented jpg patent123 jpg etc jpg substitutes for only all names containing lt any character or set of characters gt jpg Substitutes for any single character and can be combined to denote multiple characters If used in a pathname it cannot replace a forward slash Use for specific alternative spellings substitutes for a single character substitutes for two characters 22 substitutes for three characters and so on Only names with characters equal to the number of used are processed For example cel
227. f you are using the Buffalo Surveillance Server Vaults and media are preconfigured and prepared automatically there is no need to perform any Vault operations The information in this Vault Admin section is provided for information only Use the Prepare Existing Media window to modify values and reformat media already implemented in the Information Repository The Prepare Existing Media window is slightly different for each type of media a Preparing existing media reformats media on tape and hard disk If you need to preserve information on media that you need to re prepare i e reformat be sure to first create and run a Data Senice policy h5 to migrate or move the data to the media on which it will be preserved wit pe When executing Vault and media operations the Buffalo Surveillance Server may appear as if it is not responding However when the Buffalo Surveillance Server completes its given task it responds normally Follow the steps below to prepare existing media gt In the left frame of the Vault Adminko4 main window click the plus icon in front of the Vault to which you want to add media gt Click and highlight the Vault s media icon ta gt In the right frame of the Vault Admin main window click and highlight the unit of media that you want prepare gt Click D in the Vault Admin tool barl203 The Prepare Existing Media window appears wile The options presented in the Prepare Exi
228. filters Default any Selects the files that are to be processed based on the original host name for the file Default Processes files from off line media Valid values true false Default false Specifies the job type Valid values Token Value keep lt Boolean gt list_pn lt pathname gt max_file_size lt number gt min_file_size lt number gt out_of_band lt Boolean gt post_proc_cmd lt command gt Description e replicate e migrate e purge Default migrate Keeps a copy of the source files after they have been processed Valid values true false vite f You would use false to create a move policy use true to create a replicate policy Default false Specifies the filename to which all report information is written Supports token substitution Default path for the policy file R Logs P log Default path for the command line dewtty Specifies the maximum size in bytes of a source file The min_file_size and max_file_size options are mutually exclusive Default 18446744073709551615 Specifies the minimum size in bytes of a source file The max_file_size and min_file_size options are mutually exclusive Default 0 none Enables the application to constantly monitor its processes and select the network transmission protocol that best suits the files being processed Valid values true false Default true Specifi
229. for both the Category and Classic views gt Double click The Services window appears 4 Services File Action View Help e gt m i ABs Services Local Name Description Status Startup Type Log On As al Bp Alerter Notifies selected Manual Local Service Sy Application Layer G Provides support Started Manual Local Service By Application Manage Provides softwar Manual Local System Be Automatic Updates Enables the dow Started Automatic Local System By Background Intellig Uses idle network Started Manual Local System t Sy ClipBook Enables ClipBook Manual Local System By COM Event System Supports System Started Manual Local System Sa COM System Appli Manages the con Manual Local System 3 Sy Computer Browser Maintains an upd Started Automatic Local System 4 Bs cryptographic Servi Provides three m Started Automatic Local System Ba DeFWatch Started Automatic Local System gt By DHCP Client Manages networ Started Automatic Local System Bs Distributed Link Tra Maintains links be Started Automatic Local System i By Distributed Transac Coordinates tran Manual Network 5 DNS Client Resolves and cac Started Automatic Network 5S oy N Extended Standard E Ee Te E gt Scroll down to find Buffalo Vault Service gt Right click the Vault Service that you want to start and then select Start If Start is disabled you ne
230. formation to manage and change where cameras are allocated using functions in the Camera Configurations window Recording Computer Licensed InUse Available A drake 6 4 2 ix 4 4 0 3 ix4 200d D6BDB6 6 2 4 lady 6 3 3 LG2 3 3 0 LG3 6 o 6 f pxiz 3 2 1 vi 4 gt Add Camera Wizard 53 gt Add an IP Camera Standard Model 63 gt Add an IP Camera Advanced Model 6 gt Add a VMS managed Camera Configuration 71 gt Modify a Camera Configuration 77 gt Delete a Cameral77 gt Licensing 34 Add Camera Wizard The Add New Camera Wizard is generally the quickest and easiest way to set up a camera and start to record video into the Buffalo Surveillance Server Information Repository py The Add New Camera Wizard cannot be used if extended metadatales4 the MetadataExtensions cfg file is in use Add cameras manually using Camera Configuration when using extended metadata To add a camera and start to record video gt From the suite of Buffalo Surveillance Server applications on your computer open the Camera Policies application w gt Click the Add Camera Wizard button S on the toolbar The Welcome screen appears Welcome to the Add Camera Wizard This wizard helps you add and schedule a new camera You may need to run this wizard with administrative rights To continue click Next gt Click Next The Camera Information window appears ll Camera Information Find
231. formation Repository components Vault Details The active Vaults in the network are represented in the left frame of the Vault Adminl204 main window Elie Information a Current Clients Media BuffaloSS_1 BuffaloSS_2 BuffaloSS_3 BuffaloSS_4 a eee agate Drives gt Click the plus box in front of a Vault E name to open the subcategories associated with the Vault and to activate the icons in the Vault Admin toolbarl205 Certain icons in the toolbar will be active only when a Vault Media or Drive is selected Advanced View Some features within Vault Admin have an advanced view option that presents details about the item being queried gt Select View gt Advanced from the Vault Admin menu to activate this option Information This view displays overall Vault details gt In the left frame of the Vault Adminko main window click the Information icon under a Vault a to see the Vault s details as listed below Entire Network nj Arnold_HardDisk ej Burns _HardDisk FA information Current E Media E Drives fE Dash_HardDisk Jat Homer_HardDisk c Johnny _HardDisk c Lady_HardDisk rs Lady_TapeLibrary c Office _Hd JE QA_Hulk_HardDisk a J Storm_HardDisk Tm Tron_HardDisk Clients E item Address Boot Time Current Time Free Space Garbage Space Media Type Name Secured Serial Number Software Version Status
232. g lt alpha gt Label lt character string gt Overwrite lt alpha gt RestoreSecurity lt Boolean gt RestoreTimes lt Boolean gt Description Valid values true false Default true The tooltip for the label Default The pathname to where the files will be exported Default Defines how files will be named Valid values Original AtSelection FilenameOnly Default Original The label found in the How do you want to export files box Default Export Extension When files will be overwritten Valid values Never Always IfNewer Default Never Defines if original security settings will be restored Valid values true false Default true Defines which times will be used Valid values true false Default true The Query Blocks Section of the ExportExtension Block Query block statements describe the controls that will appear on the application You may have any number of queries The following block name defines the beginning of a Query block in an ExportExtensions cfg file Block name Description Query The following tokens can be used in Query blocks Token Value Description Indicates whether the value may be left blank Valid for String and Pathname only Identifies the beginning of a Query block Required BlankValueOk lt Bool lankValueOk lt Boolean gt Valid values true false Default true
233. g gt out_of_band lt Boolean gt pathname lt pathname gt policy_name lt policy name gt Valid values true false Default true Specifies that all subsequent files in the same job are sent to the same unit of media until it is full Valid values true false Default true Currently not supported Determines the quality of the low resolution proxy video Valid values High Medium Low Default Medium The policy source Valid values e native_fs e mse_pst e mse_msg e surv_camera Default native_fs Enables the application to constantly monitor its processes and select the network transmission protocol that best suits the files being processed Valid values true false Default true Specifies the pathname that will be searched for files matching the options Files directories and wildcard expressions are valid This token value pair can be specified multiple times to include multiple paths No default The job identifier No default post_proc_cmd lt command gt pre_proc_cmd lt command gt preview_image_quality lt setting gt process_directories lt Boolean gt ref_id lt character string gt repeat_interval lt hh mm ss gt retry_time lt alpha gt lt yyyy gt lt mm gt lt dd gt lt hh gt lt mm gt lt ss gt save_low_res_proxy lt Boolean gt Specifies a post process command that runs immediately after the job is fin
234. ge device and considerations should be made for growth and scale As the amount of data being stored increases the volume of entries in the Vault catalog also increases Vaults that use high capacity storage devices need system resources that can accommodate larger catalogs Consideration Calculating Needed Memory for the Vault Catalog Date and Time Properties on Computers with Vaults Hosting More than a Single Vault on One Computer Starting or Restarting Vaults Manually Security Rights Remove Vaults Overview Details The Vault catalog requires about 2 of the total amount of available storage space All computers in the Information Repository that contain Vaults and any VMS system that video is captured from must be synchronized to the same time source for the Information Repository to function correctly A single computer can host up to four Vaults as long as it is equipped with enough processor power memory and disk space to accommodate the needs of the storage Vaults This type of configuration is common in smaller environments where a disk based and a tape based Vault are both configured on a single computer If Vaults that you have added to the Information Repository are not visible to the Information Repository you may have to start them manually See Vault Admin gt Start Vaults b58 in the User s Guide When you add a Vault it is accessible to all users To change Vault rights use Vault Admin g
235. group is denied rights and JohnDoe appears in the list below Documentation even if JohnDoe is granted full rights he will not have any rights if he is a member of the Documentation group On the other hand if JohnDoe appears above the Documentation group and JohnDoe is given full rights he will retain full rights even if he is a member of the Documentation group and the Documentation group is denied rights Also note that Vault rights and media rights are hierarchical with media rights being subordinate to overall Vault permissions gt When you are finished adding new entries click OK to save them Change a Security Entry gt To change a security entry double click it The Change Entry window appears Modify Selected Entry Name type Everyone Entry name Everyone Rights Full Control v tt ee gt Change the values for Name type Entry name and Rights gt Click OK to save changes gt In the Properties window click OK to save changes Delete a User Group Domain or Everyone gt To delete an entry from the Vault Access Control List select it by single clicking it gt Click 2 The entry will be removed from the list gt Click OK to save changes Logs Use the Logs tab to enable the selected Vault s activity logging and to set activity and error log pathnames as well as maximum log size and the event to be executed when a log reaches
236. h data stream cache Where can temporary files be stored How much disk space can be used for storing temporary files Directions gt Select How much memory should be used for each data stream cache This setting defines how much virtual memory is set aside for incoming and outgoing data during file storage and retrieval A larger cache may improve performance but will do so at the expense of using more virtual memory The total amount of space used equals the number of tapes in the library multiplied by the selected cache size So if you select 10 data streams and 10 MB of cache the Vault will set aside 100 MB of total virtual memory for caching data A selection of 10 MB is usually sufficient This setting enables you to define where the working cache will be located The default location is lt install dir gt WorkingCache When Buffalo Surveillance Server is processing files it sometimes creates temporary files These enable Buffalo Surveillance Server to work more quickly and efficiently and are especially important when you are clipping video files Temporary files are kept in the working cache If you do not want to use the location chosen by Buffalo Surveillance Server you can chose an alternate location by clicking lt Browse wi TA py This setting can be changed with Vault Admin gt Vault Properties gt Devices 214 at a later time This setting defines how much working cache space Buffalo Su
237. h camera view frame includes a Title bar Right click on the camera Title bar to display a right click menu with the following menu items Wiper Select for Wiper sub menu containing duration options for the wiper to clean Duration options are 10 seconds 1 minute 15 minutes and 30 minutes 1 hour and 2 hours Also access the Stop menu item Displays only if camera has wiper functionality Day Night Mode Select for the Day Night Mode sub menu containing mode options of Day Night and Auto If Auto is selected the camera automatically adjusts to determine the correct mode This displays only if it is supported by Buffalo Surveillance Server for your camera and if the camera has Day Night Mode functionality Select Highlight the camera view frame PTZ and Volume options are available if applicable Close Close the camera view or click the Close button on the Title bar The screenshot below shows a layout with feeds from four cameras displayed If you create a new layout remember to save it so you can use it as your default layout Cohu_3960HD PTZ ic SP306 Front Lobby 24 Bi ide assa M w hi E s V pe Double click the Title bar of the view frame for the camera to quickly change the default layout to a single full screen camera view layout Double click again to return to the original layout View a feed from a cameraliad View feeds from a camera poollt4h Change save or delete
238. hat exclude specific files and or directories from the job and Include filters that include only specific files and or directories in the job Both file and directory filters work similarly the difference being that file filters work at the file level and directory filters work at the directory level File and Directory filters support the use of wildcards See Wildcard Operators below and Advanced Wildcard Functionality for details on how to use wildcards in file and directory filters Rules for File Filters and Directory Filters File filters and directory filters operate on filenames and directory names respectively When a policy features both file and directory filters both types of filters are employed Although file filters and directory filters can complement each other the Buffalo Surveillance Server applies file filters discretely from directory filters first processing all of the directory filters and then processing all of the file filters When exclude filters are used there is an implied include all at the end of the list of exclude filters This means that everything will be included in the job that is not explicitly excluded When only include filters are used there is an implied exclude all at the end of the list of include filters This means that only the files and file types denoted by an include filter will be included in jobs vite py Filters process exactly what you enter For example if you create an include fi
239. hat time daily do you want the database optimized j Fv 00 v am iy How many database files can be opened at a time t 100 t How much virtual memory can the database use 1068 f i t lt Back Next gt Cancel P dr Prd ctl gt Enter or select the following in the Database window Field Meaning Where will the database This field enables you to set the location on the hard disk be stored where the database will be stored This option enables you to set how often the database will be optimized To ensure that Buffalo Surveillance Server and your Information Repository continue to function optimally the database for every Vault is optimized daily At what time daily do you want the database optimized This option enables you to limit how many files may be open simultaneously Having more files open enables Buffalo Surveillance Server to search faster However more files require more Information Repository resources How many database files can be opened ata time This option enables you to limit how much virtual memory the database will use For best Information Repository performance choose a value that does not exceed 75 of the physical memory on the computer How much virtual memory can the database use gt Click Next gt The Logs window advanced mode only appears Use to define to where activity and error logs are written O Logs Activity Log
240. he If you do not want to use the location chosen by Buffalo Surveillance Server you can chose an alternate location by clicking lt Browse ae R 4 SN This setting can be changed with Vault Admin gt Vault Properties gt Devices 213 at a later time This setting defines how much working cache space Buffalo Surveillance Server will be permitted to use for temporary files Field Meaning ww Y py This setting can be changed with Vault Admin gt Vault Properties gt Devices 213 at a later time gt Click Next gt The Database window advanced mode only appears This is the database that keeps track of Vault contents information and metadata Define where the Vault database resides the time of day for database optimization how many database files can be opened simultaneously and how much virtual memory the database can use These options are detailed below i Database Where will the database be stored C jProgram Files Database2 At what time daily do you want the database optimized 00 jam j e How many database files can be opened at a time 10 How much virtual memory can the database use i 1 00 GB v lt Back Il Next gt Cancel gt Enter or select the following in the Database window Field Meaning Where will the database This field enables you to set the location on the hard disk be stored where the database will be stor
241. he Buffalo Surveillance Server supports RTSP enabled AXIS IP cameras that utilize versions 2 or 3 of AXIS VAPIX API For a complete listing of cameras go to AXIS s on line Product Interface Guide www axis com techsup cam_servers dewproduct_ interface quide htm Panasonic Camera Motion Detection Configuration eS This section is intended for advanced users only and documents only the Panasonic network camera configuration affected by the Buffalo Surveillance Server For general and in depth information about the Panasonic network camera configuration web interface please see your specific Panasonic camera documentation When you use Camera policies 49 to add a supported RTSP enabled Panasonic cameras that feature motion alarms the Buffalo Surveillance Server automatically configures Panasonic camera settings and automatically preserves motion detection metadata along with captured video This data is then used by the Buffalo Surveillance Server Surveillance Video Manager SVM to create histograms of detected motion Default settings will be sufficient to meet most needs You can however manually configure several parameters that affect performance wile 2 Be sure to see your Panasonic cameras specifications to determine if your camera features motion alarms Modify Alarm and Motion Detection Settings The Panasonic camera web interface enables you to set customized motion alarms for up to four individual areas per camera To
242. he opening brace for the IngestMdExt block Ou TRY a value Query a value Query OueTRy Query Name Type Label DefaultValue BlankValueOk Description Name Type Label DefaultValue BlankValueOk Description Name Type Label DefaultValue Description Choice Choice Choice Name Type Label DefaultValue Description Name Type Label DefaultValue Description LowerLimit Name1 Sje Ie Lian Sample String Label This field can be left blank or pre populated with Ease This is a sample of the Description field Name2 Pathname Sample Pathname Label This field can be left blank or pre populated with false This is a sample of the Description field Name3 Choice Sample Choice Label 2 This is a sample of the Description field Sample Choice Sample Choice Sample Choice Name4 Checkbox Sample Checkbox Label true This is a sample of the Description field Name5 Spin Sample Spin Label 26 This is a sample of the Description field 0 UpperLimit 100 This is the closing brace for the IngestMdExt block SearchMdExt Required block This identifies the beginning of the metadata extension This is the opening brace for the SearchMdExt block Query a value Query a value Query Query Query Name Type Label DefaultValue BlankValueOk Description Name Type Lab
243. heckup window to see Vault health Run Vault Checkup if you suspect something may be wrong with a Vault in your Information Repository There are three modes Quick Normal Extensive Each check tests Vaults for speed and load bearing capacity Quick check takes the least amount of time Extensive the most Normal is in between wile To run Vault Checkup the Vault Admin requires at least one piece of media with available space and that it does not belong to a storage pool Follow the steps below to run a Vault checkup gt In the left pane of the Vault Adminbod main window select a Vault a gt Select is in the Vault Admin toolbar 20 to launch the Vault Checkup window Type of Checkup Quick 3 Check basic functions Takes the least amount of time Normally will complete in less than one minute OK Cancel Help CERN ee re ree r are gt Select the level of check to run gt Press OK The Vault Checkup output window appears containing the results of the check Prepare Media py IMPORTANT NOTE If you are using the Buffalo Surveillance Server Vaults and media are preconfigured and prepared automatically there is no need to perform any Vault operations The information in this Vault Admin section is provided for information only Use the Prepare Media window to add and load new media to your Information Repository Prepare Media enables you to set all of the parameters required to prepare a unit
244. i gt In the next two fields enter the name and or location of the camera and a description gt If you want the camera to be associated with a Camera Pool select it from the drop down list gt In the Target Camera section click Change to populate the fields The Modify Target Camera dialog box appears Server Information Address User Name Password Selected Camera lt no camera selected gt Ank M a Nie Anih adia aih ma ATDA andiak Ae ln 9 So gt Fill in the following fields Field Results Address The host name or IP address of the image server from which you want to extract video User Name The user name can be either a Basic User or a Windows Domain User When Basic User user is just the user name If a Windows Domain User then the user name format is lt user gt lt domain gt where user is the user and domain is the Windows domain the user is valid within Password Your Basic User password for the Milestone database gt Click Refresh to update the list of cameras associated with the server and then select the camera whose video you want to capture into the Buffalo Surveillance Server gt Click OK to close the dialog box gt In the Video Type field select the format in which the extracted video should be stored e MJPEG stores video in the same format in which it was stored in Milestone and takes the same amount of space e H 2
245. ia Location Force Re Index only re index if needed v wwe we Er re er eee only re index if needed v r ewe wet ee were e Reload Media window Reload Media window for hard disk media for tape media gt Select a re indexing option If the Vault has a good listing of the media in its catalog select Only re index if needed The media unit will not be re indexed if Buffalo Surveillance Server determines that re indexing is not called for On the other hand if the catalog entries for the media are suspect or do not exist the Information Repository will attempt to re index the media to update its catalog Select Force a re index of media only if you have a reason to suspect that the catalog on the Vault or the media is incorrect gt Click OK The media will be reloaded and no longer have a gold bar beneath it Unload Media pe IMPORTANT NOTE If you are using the Buffalo Surveillance Server Vaults and media are preconfigured and prepared automatically there is no need to perform any Vault operations The information in this Vault Admin section is provided for information only Most typically you remove media when it is full You can remove media from a Vault in two ways e Tracked and managed by the Information Repository This is known as unloading to off line status As long as media is tracked its Vault catalog remains on the Vault in which the media normally resides It also app
246. ial If you need to use a character literally that the Buffalo Surveillance Server uses as a wildcard the character must be preceded by an escape character For example This is an example using escape characters in a statement with a wildcard The following are Buffalo Surveillance Server wildcards and special characters g a amp b See the Advanced Wildcard Functionality section for details about wildcards Query block Valid Token Values Type Name lt character string gt Type Checkbox Label lt character string gt Checkbox DefaultValue lt Boolean gt Description lt character string gt Name lt character string gt Choice Type Choice Label lt character string gt Description The metadata item s name Required Default The Query type The label for the control as it will appear in the application Default The value that will be loaded into the control by default Valid values true false Defaults true checked The tooltip for the control Default The metadata item s name Required Default The Query type The label for the control as it will appear in the application Query block Type Valid Token Values Default Value lt number gt Description lt character string gt Choice lt character string gt Name lt character string gt Type Pathname Label lt character string gt Pathname
247. ication window appears Use to define where e mails about Information Repository events are sent and where Buffalo Surveillance Server events should be logged Q Notification Email Notification Enable email notifications Event Logging Where should events be logged Computer Console aai a anhaa iiair Mie E N OE E lt Back Next gt Cancel peura 7 ny int sah tana gt Enter or select the following in the Notification window Field Enable email notification Who should receive email notifications What is the name or IP the address of your mail server Where should events be logged advanced mode only Meaning and Directions Enable optional email notifications and the email notification fields listed below When enabled receive an email whenever an event occurs of interest for managing a Vault These events include Vault start Vault stop media requests etc and are the same as those recorded for notifications Type the email address of the user receiving email notifications about Buffalo Surveillance Server events The address of your mail server Use either IP address or computer name gt Click Send Test Email to test the path A Buffalo Surveillance Server does not test valid parameters here If an invalid IP address or computer name is entered email notifications do not work Define where events are logged Field Meaning and Directions
248. ice Policies Create Policies to Manage Data in the Information Repository 15 Search For and Export Surveillance Videos Follow the steps below to search for and retrieve videos 1 Launch the Surveillance Video Managerb73 2 Search for and Select Videos amp Clips for Exportl2s8 a It is best to avoid using characters that the Buffalo Surveillance Server interprets as wildcards or as otherwise special If you need to use a character literally that the Buffalo Surveillance Server uses as a wildcard the character must be preceded by an escape character For example This is an example using escape characters in a statement with a wildcard The following are Buffalo Surveillance Server wildcards and special characters 5 L a A amp h a See the Advanced Wildcard Functionality section for details about wildcards 3 Set Export Options amp Export Videos and Clips b19 Record and Capture Video Feeds The Buffalo Surveillance Server allows for e Recording live video feeds from an RTSP enabled IP camera directly into the Buffalo Surveillance Server Information Repository e Capturing video from cameras controlled by a VMS system such as Milestone or OnSSI into the Buffalo Surveillance Server Information Repository Use the Buffalo Surveillance Server Camera Policies 4s application to configure RTSP IP enabled or VMS managed cameras and create recording policies to capture video into the Buffalo S
249. icy is exported is block structured but free from any column or order formatting The tokens listed below specify job criteria By default the Buffalo Surveillance Server exports to and imports from lt install dir gt Config DataSvcsSvc cfg Files that contain policies are formatted as follows Each policy is a single block The beginning of each block is indicated by policy_name lt policy name gt policy_name lt policy name gt lt token gt lt value gt lt token gt lt value gt policy_name lt policy name gt lt token gt lt value gt lt token gt lt value gt Token Value Pairs A token is a job attribute that is given a value that determines how a job will be run Following are the tokens and their definitions Token Value absolute_start lt yyyy gt lt mm gt lt dd gt lt hh gt lt mm gt lt ss gt active lt Boolean gt complete lt Boolean gt content_filter lt character string gt data_paths lt number gt deleted_files lt Boolean gt diag lt Boolean gt dir_spec lt pathname gt Description Used only in the policy file The exact start time and date that the job is to run Multiple absolute start tokens may be entered Used only in policy file Defines whether the policy is active or inactive Valid values true false Default true Prints all summary information plus the pathnames of the files migrated to the file indicated by the list_pn opti
250. ideo Recording Options Clip Duration 5 minutes Cache Folder Default Location v The first field of this tab displays all configured RTSP and VMS managed camera targets If you want to add and configure a camera for use with multiple policies see Add Configure and Delete Cameras 63 gt Select the camera to be used for this recording policy The Camera Info fields are populated automatically with the information entered when the camera was initially configured and only the Video Recording options are configurable Add Camera Information gt The camera options available depend on the Camera selected ae s q if you need to change the configuration of an already configured camera see Add Configure and Delete Cameras 63 Field What it does Camera This drop down list lets you select a camera Field Name Description Camera Pool What it does The Camera chosen determines the fields displayed in the Target Camera section below A user defined value used in the menus and configuration file this is the name of the camera The name entered is for identification purposes only It is best to use a naming convention and a descriptive name A user defined value used in the menus and configuration file this is a description of the camera A camera pool is a user defined virtual grouping of cameras to search video from specified cameras For example a camera pool called Doors that includes all
251. ient is finished Each client s connection to the server will lock out all other connections all other clients will have to wait before processing files gt To set the connection sharing value enter a value number in the Maintain Client Vault Connection for text box gt Click the Files radio button or Bytes radio button depending on which you prefer If you click Files connection sharing will proceed based on the number of files transmitted if you click bytes based on the number of bytes Throttle Throttling controls the speed at which files are sent to the Vault Lower numbers reduce the bandwidth Throttle values range from 1 to 100 of total available bandwidth The Buffalo Surveillance Server is designed to operate at the maximum performance of its host computer the network environment and the storage resources available Sometimes during normal working hours running a job at peak performance will interfere with other network operations gt To adjust throttling click the Throttle pull down menu and select the percentage of maximum performance at which you want to operate the client on its host computer View Live Video Feeds Live Viewer In the Buffalo Surveillance Server Live Viewer application view live video feeds directly from RTSP enabled IP cameras Before seeing live feeds cameras must be configured in the Camera Policies application as part of your Information Repository To view live feeds in the Live
252. ify a recording policy s name and description gt Double click the policy name in the Policy Name frame The Modify Selected Policy window appears gt Enter the new policy name in the Policy Name text box gt Ensure the policy is active or de select the Active check box if you do not want the policy to run When the Active check box is de selected the a symbol is superimposed over the policy icon in the Policy Name pane gt Click OK The window closes the policy name and description appear in the Policy Name pane gt Modify the parameters as needed on each tab for the policy See the subsequent sections for details gt Click bd to save all policy settings and implement the policy py If you modify a recording policy while a job is running based on that policy the job will stop as soon as it is finished processing the current file The job will restart as scheduled For example if a job runs every day starts at 11 00 AM and runs for 30 minutes and while the job is running you modify the policy the job will stop If the scheduled start time was not changed the job will start at 11 00 AM the next day a When you modify a recording policy and then click Save any other users who have the Camera Policies application open will see a popup message asking them whether they want to save or accept the changes If they do not your changes will not take effect Delete a Recording Policy You can delete a policy that no
253. ighlight the camera view frame PTZ and Volume options are available if applicable Close Close the camera view or click the Close button on the Title bar The screenshot below shows the default layout with feeds from four cameras displayed Cohu_3960HD PTZ Sas ic SP306 Front Lobby _Canon_vB M40 i ide assa my w hi E i s v pe Double click the Title bar of the view frame for the camera to quickly change the default layout to a single camera view layout Double click again to return to the original layout View a feed from a cameralt4d View feeds from a camera pooll14 Change save or delete a live view layout 142 Control camera pan tilt zoom and focusl43 286 Buffalo Surveillance Server Search for Review and Select Videos The Buffalo Surveillance Server is designed to support powerful searching and reviewing of surveillance video It also enables you to export entire videos or just clips of interest Finding reviewing and selecting videos is the first part of the video exporting process Follow the steps below to search for and review video clips Then if you want to export what you have found work through the subsequent section Set Export Options amp Export Videosk19 gt Launchk7 Surveillance Video Manager SVM The Surveillance Video Manager will open and be ready to accept search criteria Search Export Search Criteria Search Results Export Queue Search u
254. iguration of a configured camera see Add Configure and Delete Cameras 3 Field What it does Camera This drop down lists all available cameras Once selected the fields below pre populate Name A user defined value used in the menus and configuration file this is the name of the camera The name entered is for identification purposes only It is best to use a naming convention and a descriptive name Description A user defined value used in the menus and configuration file this is a description of the camera Additional Target Camera fields for RTSP IP enabled cameras Field What it does Manufacturer The manufacturer of the camera The Video Capture URL populates automatically Model A user defined value this is the camera s model number Video Capture URL populates automatically Video Capture URL The RTSP URL of the camera that enables the Buffalo Surveillance Server to capture video feeds gt The text box displays the IP address for the selected camera Field What it does User Name If the camera requires a user name and password to be accessed this is the username This field works in conjunction with Password If the camera requires a user name and password to be Password accessed this is the password This field works in conjunction with User Name Recording Computer Displays the computer that captures a video feed from your camera Additional Target Camera fields for cameras managed by Mileston
255. ile s full name and it appears when you hover over a file name that is not fully visible in the file tree frame 4 24 2012 6 52 PM AG 5 6 19 3 Buffalo Surveillance Server Index A Access Control 264 266 Accessed after 181 Accessed before 181 Accessed or Stored 181 ACL 264 266 Action 160 161 Active 85 86 160 161 Activity Logging 134 Add a camera 63 Add a hard disk vault 349 Add a license 349 359 372 Add a tape library vault 359 Add a tape vault 372 Add Camera Wizard Camera Policies 53 Add New Vaults or Media On the Fly 251 adding vaults 345 Address 262 Address Format Dot Notation 260 Full Domain Name 260 Host name only 260 Vault Admin Options Advanced Mode 51 Advanced tab Camera Policies 131 Data Service Policies 196 Advanced view Vault Details 261 autoloaders requirements tape 340 260 B Barcode ID Prepare Media Barcode ID 264 Basic Wildcard Operators for File and Directory Filters 187 Block Size Boot Time 236 244 264 266 262 Buffalo Surveillance Server clients 12 documentation conventions 12 overview 12 C Camera Policies Add an IP Camera Standard Mode 63 Add Camera Wizard 53 Advanced Mode 51 Advanced tao 131 Camera tab 104 Destination tab 123 Export policies 87 Import policies 87 Processing tao 121 Scheduling tab 129 User Preferences 123 Camera tab Advanced Mode 51 Camera Policies 104 Cameras cfg file structure 79 Case usage 12 CD ROM
256. ime If you leave the current Media Viewer open and go back and click on another thumbnail the Media Viewer will regain focus and the timeline indicator will move to the new point in time selected If this new thumbnail was associated with a camera other than one originally selected a new Media Viewer will open to the point in time associated to this thumbnail image You can have as many Media Viewers open as you need and each will depict the entire timeline associated to the Search Criteria date and time request This enables you quickly and easily identify the specific areas of interest within found video files The Media Viewer comprises the controls that you will find in any popular video viewer such as volume play stop skip forward skip back beginning and end and the following additional controls This bar is a histogram When motion detection information has been captured by a motion detection enabled camera supported by the Buffalo Surveillance Server the histogram indicates when motion was detected Unlike the histograms for individual clips in the Search Results frame the histogram in the Media Viewer displays all of the motion for the entire timeline of search results for a particular camera The histogram enables you to skip to the sections of video which are of most interest Line height and color indicate the magnitude of the motion detected based on how your motion detection enabled camera is configured For information
257. imilar to the minimum number of characters matched is equal to the number of that follow the For example document Q42007 substitutes for document lt any character including slashes gt Q42007 such as documentsQ42007 document Q42007 and documents 123Q42007 Substitutes for a set and includes any one of the characters in the set Or an ASCIl sequential run of characters may be indicated by using a hyphen to separate the first character in the sequence from the last character in the sequence lt beginning character gt lt end character gt For example afe matches a f or e a m matches any single character in the range of a to m Substitutes for any one character that is not specified in the set Or an ASCII sequential run of characters may be indicated by using a hyphen to separate the first character in the sequence from the last character in the sequence lt beginning character gt lt end character gt For example afe substitutes for any single character other than a f or e a m substitutes for any single character that is not in the range of a m Wildcard Entire pattern not in set Escape next character Multiple wildcards More examples of wildcards Description When is the first character of a pattern the entire pattern is omitted For example a search using primary will return everything except primary When using this wildcard in extende
258. ing Stop is active If you click Stop while Buffalo Surveillance Server is exporting files the export is stopped and not all of the files in the Export Queue are exported However files that have already been completely exported will remain on the target computer Click Dismiss to close the job status box ExportExtensions cfg eS This section is intended only for advanced users It covers ExportExtensions cfg a text file you can create to configure the fields that appear in the Export Job Configuration frame of the Surveillance Video Manager You can create ExportExtensions cfg using any text editor Once created it needs to be added to the following path lt install dir gt Config ExportExtensions cfg is a block structured text file At the end of this section you will find a sample ExportExtensions cfg You can implement the file as is at the path noted above to see how it affects the Surveillance Video Manager or modify the file to meet your own criteria and then implement it ExportExtensions cfg comprises at least one or more ExportExtension block An ExportExtension block has two main sections the Command section from ExportExtension to the command specification and the Query block section Pay particular attention to braces there needs to be an opening brace after ExportExtensions and a closing brace after the last Query block nN It is best to avoid using characters that the Buffalo Surveillance Serv
259. ing location software version and start time Devicek13 View SCSI information for Vaults as well as maximum files kept in a directory and maximum number of data streams Also change the amount of virtual memory used for each data stream cache for tape and hard disk Vaults Databasel21 View the database pathname Also change the time when the database is optimized set the number of maximum open files and set the amount maximum virtual memory used Licensel21 Access your Host Id and view license summary activate a product key and change delete or import a license file Security 224 Define Vault access for users groups and domains Logs 22 Activate activity logging define an activity log pathname set maximum log size set what action to take when logs reach their maximum size and define the error log pathname Notifications 228 Set where events and email notifications are sent Diagnostics 23h Define where output messages are sent the type of messages sent and the level of message detail Use the General tab to change the name of the selected Vault and view Vault type location software version and start time gt Open the Vault Admin application In the left pane of the Vault Admin 204 main window select the Vault a to modify gt Click eg to launch the lt Vault Name gt Properties window or right click the Vault name and select Properties The Properties window features several tabs each resp
260. ing video files Temporary files are kept in the working cache Field Meaning a The changes you make here will override the values you entered when you first added the Vault using the Add or Remove Vault Wizard 343 Amount of disk space This setting defines how much working cache space that can be used Buffalo Surveillance Server will be permitted to use for temporary files gt Click OK to save the new settings Tape Vault The Device tab enables you to define parameters for the selected tape Vault gt Open the Vault Admin application In the left pane of the Vault Admin 204 main window select the Vault g to modify gt Click eg to launch the lt Vault Name gt Properties window or right click the Vault name and select Properties The Properties window features several tabs each responsible for some aspect of Vault functionality It opens to the General tab gt Select the Device tab Security Logs Notifications Diagnostics General Device Database License Storage Resources SCSI device Tape library at lt Host 4 gt lt Bus 0 gt lt Id 5 gt lt Lun 0 gt Connection Resources Virtual memory used for each data stream cache 10 00 M6 v Working Cache Location where temporary files can be stored Install_dir WorkingCache Amount of disk space that can be used 100GB li OK Cancel Help Naat itn aah tin IAT Ate Sinn Gia aS AAS eae On the Device tab for tape Vaults only
261. intervals of say 2 hours and leave all other values set to the default a job will execute as soon as you click Save and the subsequent jobs will run at two hour intervals wit A py Because Data Service policies effect the entire information repository new Data Service policies are not scheduled to run When Should the Job Run The option that you choose defines the mode in which jobs will run and controls which options will appear in the rest of the scheduling tab When should the job run contains the following options e Option 1 On selected days each week e Option 2 Repeatedly at a defined interval e Option 3 On specific dates and times gt Select an option from the When should the job run pull down list to schedule recurring processes i Option 1 On selected days each week This option enables you to schedule jobs that run on particular days at specific times When you select this option the scheduling tab will look as follows When should the job run On selected days each week v On what days of the week Sunday Monday Tuesday Wednesday Thursday Friday Saturday At what time of the day 12 00 AM 9J Should the job be stopped before it is completed No ne has tin fh A oath a anahaha ents Mek line iain Nm seen Athen ha De Sata anaa aaan dik bin Rl gt Adjacent to the On what days of the week text box click to set the days of the week on which you want the job to run The
262. ion Manufacturer Model Video Capture URL User Name Password Recording Computer Results A user defined value used in the menus and configuration file this is a description of the camera The manufacturer of the camera The Video Capture URL populates automatically A user defined value this is the camera s model number Video Capture URL populates automatically The RTSP URL of the camera that enables the Buffalo Surveillance Server to capture video feeds gt In the first text box displays the IP address for the selected camera The second text box populates automatically with a known camera manufacturer and model Test the RTSP URL by clicking Test If the test fails see Troubleshoot Camera Connection Problems for troubleshooting steps If the camera is not listed and you are unsure of your camera s RTSP URL check with the camera s manufacturer If the camera requires a user name and password to be accessed this is the username This field works in conjunction with Password If the camera requires a user name and password to be accessed this is the password This field works in conjunction with User Name Select from the drop down list a computer that captures a video feed from your camera gt When you are finished selecting options and entering values click OK gt Click hd to save the new camera configurations and add the camera to the Information Repository gt Repeat this proces
263. is listed on the left side of the main Camera Policies application Wait for your video feed After creating a recording policy wait about 15 minutes to allow the 6 to be recorded and system time to record a 5 minute clip process and store it and processed make it available for searching Search for and review gt From the suite of Buffalo Surveillance Server applications on your recorded video computer open Surveillance Video Manager 5 gt Click the Search button on the lower left The search results pane in the middle of the screen displays the video clip that was just recorded gt Also select the camera whose video you want to search gt Click More Search Options to see more criteria to narrow search results Refer to the section on Searching for Reviewing and Exporting Surveillance Videol273 for more information about how to export video out of the system Install Buffalo Surveillance Server clients on other computers To run Buffalo Surveillance Server policies from other computers on your network repeat Step 3 to download and then run the client software on those computers Quick Start for VMS System Users If your hardware configuration supports VMS systems you can quickly and easily set up the Buffalo Surveillance Server to capture store and manage that video The brief steps below show you how to get started They explain how to set up VMS manag
264. ished Supports token substitution Default Specifies a pre process command that runs immediately before the job starts Supports token substitution Default Determines the quality of the preview image Valid values High Medium Low Default Medium Preserves the state of directories Valid values true false Default true Internal use only Used only in the policy file The amount of time that elapses before a job is repeated Default 24 00 00 Specifies the date and time to retry the list of files not ingested These files match all job criteria but were not sent to the Vault You must precede the date time value with an A to specify an absolute date and time or an R to specify a date and time relative to the end of the job Enter the absolute year as a four digit number for example 2001 2002 etc Valid values e A Absolute date and time e R Relative date and time Default R0000 00 00 00 00 00 retry files immediately after the job finishes Enables the user to save a copy of the low resolution proxy video at the location entered in save_low_res_proxy_dir_pn Valid values true false save_low_res_proxy_dir_pn lt pathname gt save_preview_image lt Boolean gt save_preview_image_dir_pn lt pathname gt start_days lt mtwtfss gt start_time lt hh mm ss gt stop_time R lt yyyy gt lt mm gt lt dd gt lt hh gt lt mm gt
265. isk 207 virtual media 207 load 251 reload 254 Volumes 262 267 260 Volumes Off line 262 Volumes On line 262 W Watermark 183 319 What file times do you want to use when the files are retrieved 324 What security settings do you want to give the retrieved files 324 What type of disk do you want to produce 324 When do you want to overwrite files on the destination system 320 When files will be processed 181 When should the job run 129 194 Where do you want to write the retrieved files 320 Where Messages Will Be Sent console 232 file 232 TTY 232 wildcard operators Media Name 126 177 190 Storage Pool 126 177 190 Vault 126 177 190 wildcards advanced settings 306 file and directory filters 187 wizard Add Camera wizard 53 Add or Remove Vault wizard 345 Write Prepare media 238 246 2012 SoleraTec LLC
266. ist of Cameras Added window appears a List of Cameras Added Rear Entrance at 126 34 52 88 scheduled on M W F 07 00 00 10 00 00 3 Remove selected Camera Do you want to add an additional camera Oves no SNe mm a ARRAN ou a h nalts Smale a si AON oo pel PS on tle fo tt AMER Da Set som mah tile dn oe ginal em gt The cameras added during the wizard session are listed To remove any camera select it and then click the Remove Selected Camera button gt If you do not want to add another camera select No To add another camera select Yes in order to cycle through the wizard again Click Next gt If you have no more cameras to add the Ready to Save Camera Configurations and Recording Schedules window appears Ready to Save Camera Configurations and Recording Schedules Click Finish to save the Following cameras Rear Entrance at 125 56 2 56 scheduled on M W F 07 00 00 10 00 00 x Remove Selected Camera SN eee mnan anamh Moan AAE D h a a a eee a aA aA Aa Am n aa nb D Ma a Be PMA aa gt The list of cameras for save is displayed To remove any camera select it and then click the Remove Selected Camera button gt Click Finish The Add Camera Wizard closes and the focus is in the main Camera Policies application window wt X py By configuring a camera and setting a schedule for it to record the new recording policy
267. isted under the Layouts folder and select Delete Layout For more information see View a feed from a camerali48 and View feeds from a camera pool 147 Control Camera Pan Tilt Zoom and Focus Buffalo Surveillance Server supports all IP configurable cameras and most of the functionality of those cameras If Buffalo Surveillance Server and your camera supports the Pan Tilt Zoom and focus functionality and you selected the Enable PTZ option when you configured the camera in the Camera Policies application you can control those functions from the Live Viewer control panel If those functions are enabled you will see a white target symbol fo in the camera name bar of the camera feed when it is displayed in a view frame of the Live Viewer To control a camera s pan and tilt gt Click the title bar of the view frame for the camera A blue frame appears around the entire view frame to indicate that the controls are active Cohu_3960HD gt In the Pan Tilt area of the control panel on the right click the left and right arrow buttons to pan the camera horizontally to the left and to the right Pan Tilt gt Click the up and down arrow buttons to tilt the camera vertically up and down To control a camera s zoom gt In the Zoom section of the control panel on the right use the In button to zoom in on the center of the view Use the Out button to zoom out from the center and include a wider angle of view To control a
268. ith connection sharing set to 250 files and several other clients are configured to start jobs at the same time no client can connect until the first client is finished Each client s connection to the server will lock out all other connections all other clients will have to wait before processing files gt To set the connection sharing value enter a value number in the Maintain Client Vault Connection for text box gt Click the Files radio button or Bytes radio button depending on which you prefer If you click Files connection sharing will proceed based on the number of files transmitted if you click bytes based on the number of bytes Throttling controls the speed at which files are sent to the Vault Lower numbers reduce the bandwidth Throttle values range from 1 to 100 of total available bandwidth The Buffalo Surveillance Server is designed to operate at the maximum performance of its host computer the network environment and the storage resources available Sometimes during normal working hours running a job at peak performance will interfere with other network operations gt To adjust throttling click the Throttle pull down menu and select the percentage of maximum performance at which you want to operate the client on its host computer Test Run Output Results but Do Not Actually Move Files When you create a complex set of process parameters including several filters and options Test Run enables you to test th
269. its latest startup cycle Total RPC Calls Out The number of remote procedural calls made by the Vault since its latest startup cycle Total RPC Packets In The number of network packets that have been received by the Vault since its latest startup cycle Total RPC Packets Out The number of network packets that have been sent by the Vault since its latest startup cycle Total Storage Slots Storage slots are areas where media is stored in a Vault s storage device when it is not in a media drive In tape and other physical media based storage devices the total storage slots number is fixed by the storage device In hard disk Vaults the number is usually mapped to the number of virtual media units set up in the Vault Total Volumes The number of volumes on media being tracked and managed by the Vault It includes all on line and off line media being tracked Total Volumes Off line Includes only volumes on formatted media that is housed outside the Vault s storage device yet is still being tracked by the Information Repository Total Volumes On line Includes only volumes on formatted media housed within the Vault s storage device that is being tracked by the Information Repository Type The storage device technology the Vault uses Current Clients This view displays details about the computers with which the Information Repository is currently working gt In the left frame of the Vault Adminko main window click the Curre
270. l substitutes for all names containing cell lt one additional characters For example cells and cello but not cell You can use within or at the end of a phrase For example xl substitutes for only names containing xl lt a third character gt such as xls xlr and so on wom n substitutes for only names containing wom lt a third character gt n such as woman or women carbon fib substitutes for only names containing carbon fib lt two characters gt such as carbon fiber or carbon fibre For a full list and detailed coverage of everything you can do using wildcards see the Advanced Wildcard Functionality Content Searching Wildcards section gt Enter a word or phrase that you want used as a criteria for processing Time This option enables you to select files based on the time and date that they were stored or accessed on the host computer Use the pull down controls to select one of several options You can process files that have been stored or accessed before or after a specific interval of time or date and time that you designate Select one of the options Process files relative to a specific time and date gt Select one of the options that includes a specific time and date such as Accessed in Y after HH MM AM on Day The clock icon 9 the calendar icon E and the Accessed Stored pull down list are activated gt Select Accessed or Stored The text in the Time pull down list changes to reflect y
271. l OK Cancel l Help mE PrI P PA AAAA E AA PA AA BT POP a OT re e gt Select the appropriate camera from the Camera Type drop down list Camera Information Camera Type IP camera IP camera Name and or LoqMilestone managed camera JOnSSI managed camera Description Camera Pool lt none gt Manufacturer Generic Model Generic v Video Capture URL rtspiff v Live View URL rtspiff v Management URL http er Name Password Alternative Frame Size 0 C Enable PTZ Enable stream over TCP Active OK Cancel Help Fa AR A EA a Aa NT Amnat Aarin en Amana nN tate e Maiani e AD stn Aln aa Manaa naaa ait afi ons gt Type the name and location of the camera and a description gt To associate the camera with a Camera Pool select it from the drop down list gt In the Target Camera section click Change to populate boxes The Modify Target Camera dialog appears Server Information Address User Name Password Selected Camera no camera selected gt A eT PFT NATAR ee ee eee Ie gt Fill in the following text boxes Address The host name or IP address of the image server to extract video from User name for someone who has rights to User Name E access the camera with video to extract Basic user password for the VMS system Pa
272. lance Server applications on your computer open the Camera Policies application a gt Click the Add Camera Wizard button e on the toolbar The Welcome screen appears Welcome to the Add Camera Wizard This wizard helps you add and schedule a new camera You may need to run this wizard with administrative rights To continue click Next gt Click Next The Camera Information window appears ll Camera Information Find cameras on my network to populate the information below Select the manufacturer and model Select Manufacturer v Select Model v What credentials are needed to access this camera User Name Password Camera Not Listed PO 8 i te PP nf Pe or te 2 Or Peo PoP A gt To add camera information either click the Find Cameras button or from the pull down lists Select the manufacturer and model If you click the Find Cameras button a Search Results window appears showing a list of cameras found on the network If your camera is not on the list select the Show all devices check box for any additional cameras on the network and other devices to display If your camera still does not display use the Select the Manufacturer and model pull down list option and type the IP address or you can add it manually in Camera Configurations In the Search Results window cameras in use appear grayed out and available cameras for configuration h
273. lder in the local file system and an Order file to the Network Publisher Order Files folder on the Rimage computer Rimage takes care of the rest In the diagram the label file resides on the Rimage computer however it can just as easily reside on any networked computer for which Rimage has access and security permissions sends Order File to Rimage sends data to local Export Folder Rimage pulls data from Export Folder Network Publisher Order Files Folder Client Computer Export Folder Label File Folder Access and Permissions Settings To enable Rimage export functionality Rimage Network Publisher must be installed and running somewhere in the network and the Rimage Orders folder must be visible from the computer on which Buffalo Surveillance Server is running Ensure the following e There is a Rimage export folder on the Buffalo Surveillance Server client computer e Buffalo Surveillance Server users have write access to the export folder and Rimage has at least read permissions e Security is set so that domain users have full control Configure Rimage Export using the Rimage Export Configuration Window The Rimage Export Configuration dialog box is accessible from the Tools menu option It enables you to use Buffalo Surveillance Server to export to a Rimage system A If you do not enable Rimage export Rimage will not be activated as an option in the Where do you want to export the files field in E
274. lds enter the name and or location of the camera and a description gt If you want the camera to be associated with a Camera Pool select it from the dropdown list gt In the Target Camera section click Change so that you can fill in the fields The Modify Target Camera dialog appears Server Information Address User Name Password Selected Camera lt no camera selected gt W Ah Ae no Ste Manat aa a fhe wi mmm ADA saith Alo a often do fy gt Fill in the following fields Field Results Address The host name or IP address of the image server from which you want to extract video User Name The user name can be either a Basic User or a Windows Domain User When Basic User user is just the user name If a Windows Domain User then the user name format is lt user gt lt domain gt where user is the user and domain is the Windows domain the user is valid within Password Your Basic User password for the OnSSI database gt Click Refresh to update the list of cameras associated with the server and then select the camera whose video you want to capture into the Buffalo Surveillance Server gt Click OK to close the dialog gt In the Video Type field select the format in which the extracted video should be stored e MJPEG stores video in the same format in which it was stored in OnSSI and takes the same amount of space e H 264 is a loss less format that t
275. licies 49 and Data Service Policies hs Field Description This is the name the Information Repository will use when referencing this media The name is displayed on all media referencing interfaces and reports It is best to use a descriptive name For example you might use Monday 1 for a unit of media being used as part of a Monday night job set Media Name Barcode ID available only This number corresponds to the barcode or a unique ID for tape media that support for the media If used Buffalo Surveillance Server tracks barcodes the media by its barcode Field Description Storage Pool Size GB available only for hard disk media not available for tape media Content Searching Description uit pe Barcode systems provide a significant performance increase whenever media is being loaded unloaded or indexed by the Information Repository This description is used on all media referencing interfaces and reports It is best to carry forward the naming convention used for the Media Name For example Monday night job tape 1 of 5 could be a good description for a tape named Monday 1 Storage pools enable you to group disparate units of media Used properly storage pools offer a convenient way to accommodate multiple jobs simultaneously and by providing fail over should a problem occur during a process prevent incomplete processing A typical example of storage pooling is the utilization of
276. licies that you require gt In the Policy Editor menu click File gt Export to The Export to window appears Save in O Polices 1 Orp Recent Desktop My Documents 38 My Computer File name SamplePolicy cfg gt My Network Save as type Configuration files cfa v lt gt To save your policies with the default policy file name click Save without entering a new file name Or gt To save your new policies under a new policy file name enter a new name In the Export to window and then click Save Import Export Policy File Structure An exported policy file is block structured but free from any column or order formatting The tokens listed below specify job criteria By default the Buffalo Surveillance Server exports policies to and imports them from the locations below Data Service Policies lt install dir gt Config DataSvesSvc cfg Camera Policies lt install dir gt Config CameraPolicies cfg Files that contain policies are formatted as follows Each policy is a single block The beginning of each block is indicated by policy_name lt policy name gt policy_name lt policy name gt lt token gt lt value gt lt token gt lt value gt l policy_name lt policy name gt lt token gt lt value gt lt token gt lt value gt Token Value Pairs Standard and Camera A token is a job attribute that is given a value which determines how a job will be run Following are the tokens
277. lick OK The time that you have entered will populate the text box from which you started Glossary Administrator Administrators have complete and unrestricted access to a computer or domain Automatic Failover If there is more than one Vault available Buffalo Surveillance Server clients can divide their use of the available Vaults Clients can also fail over from the current Vault in use to another Vault should the current Vault fail The same logic applies even if there is more than a single tape based Vault containing tapes with the same label for example Monday Incremental Camera Pool A camera pool is a user defined virtual grouping of cameras to search video from specified cameras For example a camera pool called Doors that includes all of the cameras that cover the doors of your establishment When you need to see who s come or gone select the Doors camera pool as a search criteria and only video captured from cameras in the Doors camera pool are included There is no limit to the number of camera pools your Buffalo Surveillance Server solution may have Catalog A catalog contains metadata for files on media in the Information Repository Catalogs are created and supported on media and in Vaults Catalogs on Vaults contain metadata about what files are on media assigned to the Vault as well as information about the files In other words catalogs on Vaults track information about what files contain and where th
278. llance Server search and retrieve applications It may not contain an IngestMdExt block or ModMdExt block Required Identifies the beginning of the edit metadata metadata extension block for Buffalo Surveillance Server search and retrieve applications May not contain an IngestMdExt block or SearchMdExt block Required Block Identifier Description Identifies the beginning of a Query block contained within a metadata extensions block Required Query pe As illustrated in the examples below Query blocks must be contained within metadata extension blocks SearchMdExt and IngestMdExt Valid Token Values for Query Blocks The tokens in the table below can be used only in Query blocks Although the IngestMdExt block SearchMdExt block and ModMdExt block use the same types of Query blocks each must have its own individual Query blocks a It is best to avoid using characters that the Buffalo Surveillance Server interprets as wildcards or as otherwise special If you need to use a character literally that the Buffalo Surveillance Server uses as a wildcard the character must be preceded by an escape character For example This is an example using escape characters in a statement with a wildcard The following are Buffalo Surveillance Server wildcards and special characters p K ia A amp h A See the Advanced Wildcard Functionality section for details about wildcards Rue Block Valid T
279. llow limitations on how long an implied w arranty lasts and some states and or countries do not allow the exclusion or limitation of incidental or consequential damages so the above limitation and exclusion may not apply to Licensee This warranty gives Licensee specific legal rights and Licensee may also have other rights w hich vary from state to state and or country to country 6 GENERAL 6 1 If any provision or portion of a provision of this Agreement is determined to be invalid or unenforceable it shall be deemed to be revised to the extent necessary to make it enforceable or omitted if necessary and the remaining provisions of this Agreement shall remain in full force and effect 6 2 This Agreement is governed by and construed in accordance with the laws of the State of California w ithout regard to its conflicts of law principles The parties to this Agreement hereby irrevocably consent to the personal jurisdiction of the state and federal courts located in San Diego California to resolve any dispute or controversy related to this Agreement 6 3 This Agreement constitutes the entire agreement betw een the parties w ith respect to the subject matter hereof and all prior agreements representations statements and undertakings are hereby expressly canceled 6 4 Neither party hereto shall be liable in any manner for failure or delay in fulfillment of all or part of this Agreement directly or indirectly ow ing to any causes or circumstance
280. losing most of the video feed You can choose a setting from Super high to Low with Super high being the most sensitive to motion Detection sensitivity settings on this tab will be Preset position select below the Field Preset position select Information addition Function Enables you to define up to four discrete motion detection areas If you do not select areas or all individual areas are deactivated the system will detect motion in the entire default area defined by the white square on the VMD area page Each camera supports up to four motion detection areas This is the part of the camera s field of view for which motion is monitored By default the entire field of view is selected You can change covered areas to suit your needs by 1 deleting current areas 2 creating new ones by dragging your cursor across the area you want covered and 3 setting detection sensitivity See the Preset position select section immediately below this table for detailed directions for creating motion detection areas Should be set to OFF Adds additional information such as timestamp that the Buffalo Surveillance Server does not use gt When you are finished changing your motion detection settings click SET Preset position select gt Beneath the video feed on the VMD area tab find the Video area setting for Preset position section Select Setup to the right of Preset position select The
281. lse Throttling controls the amount of bandwidth used by jobs and therefore the speed at which files are sent to Vaults Throttle values are relative to Information Repository capacity and range from 1 to 100 A lower setting reduces the amount of available bandwidth that will be used Default 100 Specifies the timestamp of the file that is to be examined when determining if the file meets the dtu_type criteria e atime access time e mtime modified time Default mtime The policy type of the policy file Only tap is valid for Camera policies Default tap Updates the job run record lt install dir gt JobHistory run_record trr whenever a level job runs Valid values true false Default true Specifies the number of files F or number of bytes S to ingest per single Vault connection Valid values e F files e S bytes e 1 2 Default F500 The version number of the currently installed application Only the current version number is valid This number will change vid_extract_closed_caption lt Boolean gt vid_save_closed_caption lt Boolean gt vid_save_closed_caption_dir_pn lt pathname gt Enables Buffalo Surveillance Server to extract closed captioning data from a video at ingest Valid values true false Default true Enables the user to save a copy of the closed captioning data in a location specified by vid_save_closed_caption_dir_pn V
282. lt token gt lt value gt This is the closing brace for the Block Blocks The following are the Blocks used in MetadataExtensions cfg Block Identifier IngestMdExt SearchMdExt ModMdExt Query Valid Token Values for Query Blocks Description Identifies the beginning of the metadata extensions block for Buffalo Surveillance Server ingesting and capturing applications May not contain a SearchMdExt block or ModMdExt block Required Identifies the beginning of the metadata extensions block for Buffalo Surveillance Server search and retrieve applications It may not contain an IngestMdExt block or ModMdExt block Required Identifies the beginning of the edit metadata metadata extension block for Buffalo Surveillance Server search and retrieve applications May not contain an IngestMdExt block or SearchMdExt block Required Identifies the beginning of a Query block contained within a metadata extensions block Required pe As illustrated in the examples below Query blocks must be contained within metadata extension blocks SearchMdExt and IngestMdExt The tokens in the table below can be used only in Query blocks Although the IngestMdExt block SearchMdExt block and ModMdExt block use the same types of Query blocks each must have its own individual Query blocks ay It is best to avoid using characters that the Buffalo Surveillance Server interprets as wildcards or as otherwise spec
283. lter for doc the Buffalo Surveillance Server will process files that are literally named doc If you want to process all files that are of a doc type your filter would include a wildcard doc File Filters If a file filter has no pathname delimiters the Buffalo Surveillance Server matches the pattern against only the last leaf of the candidate pathname which is the filename itself If the file filter has pathname delimiters the Buffalo Surveillance Server matches the pattern against the entire pathname including the filename File filters are read from the top down For example if you have an exclude file filter that excludes all jpg files followed by a filter that includes all jpg files jpg files will be excluded Directory Filters If a directory filter has no pathname delimiters the Buffalo Surveillance Server tries matching the pattern against each leaf of the pathname separately looking for the first match Ifa directory filter has pathname delimiters the Buffalo Surveillance Server matches the pattern against the entire pathname Directory filters are read from the top down For example if you have an exclude directory filter that excludes all folders named Pictures followed by a filter that includes Pictures 2003Convention the first filter will take precedence and Pictures 2003Convention will not be included Create or Delete File Filters and Directory Filters gt Decide whether you want to first create file fi
284. lters or directory filters File filters will enable you to include or exclude particular files by file name or file type Directory filters enable you to include or exclude directories and their contents in their entirety including sub directories and their contents You can use file and directory filters simultaneously gt To create a filter select beneath Files to Include Exclude or Directories to Include Exclude depending on whether you want to create a file or directory filter The Add Filter window will appear Add new Filter Include ov were ee ee we PE ee ee ee ee ee ee ee PTR gt Select a filter type Use Include to ensure the inclusion of particular files directories and file types Use Exclude to exclude particular files directories and file types gt Enter the filter See the examples below for details gt Click OK If you were to enter vsd and then xls the File to Include Exclude text box would appear as follows Include filters are preceded by exclude filters Files to Include Exclude v sd v xls gaoa py To determine which filters are given priority you can move them up or down by using o and respectively a When entering pathnames or pathname searching patterns only the forward slash may be used as a pathname delimiter If you use a backslash as is customary on some platforms you may get unexpected results gt To delete a filter
285. lts and Media cccccseesececeeeeeccceeeeececeeeseeeeeeeees 204 How to Use Vault Admin OvervieW csscseccsscseeceeeeseeseeeseesenesseesenenseesensneeseesneessuseenesseesenssenesensneeeeneeneeseees 205 Basic Media Concepts 207 ACHONS sibiriniai rasan si 208 Secure Or Unsecure Vault istissd redimir teie ekar aaien ayant teas dened eae 209 Sh t Down or Restart Vault arinina e a ER Ghia AEEA A ANR EA 210 Manage Vault PrOpertieS ccicccccsccssccsccszcsscsetsevescadcsccsecensesesecagensasatvatecoscssateasedaessessceses stseteectictastesteatesrseecsseseraans 211 General aittheiaidndieiAndeednwiiinnin een adn EEEE AE LaNa 212 DeVICG ie had tate die denne a aetna neti enti die eR aed elites aie 213 Hard Disk Viallltvissieeetiendnnnncil iwi hist E A E EEEE EA ENEE EEEE SENE SE NEEE ATENTA 214 Tap Vault wessesicseesicssedecsstzscssecsseycvssvescesevoonsetaeves cas ciccayeaesaceeececengiess vane devcavstysus deessedatesttetavteactecnstnes 216 Database sathactenneindsiyiiicn diel seenieaitiiiildin ener addiatii casi aiiaunann nae 217 Liens simidin iederien iy aes eaae eoan o added Meranda dh eee e edereiting ea 219 Security firer E ENEE E eign EE a eee 222 Add a New User Group Domain or EVEryOne 0 eeeeeceeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeseaeeeesaeesaeeeeeeaeees 223 Change a Security EMY ernaia aa aae r rE E EENE E E EaR 225 Delete a User Group Domain or Everyone 02 eeseeseeseeeeeeseeeeeseceeseesaeeeseeeaeeeaes
286. m Minute Ts Second R or Rn Root Pathname Valid only at the beginning of a string Report Options The Buffalo Surveillance Server creates one of three report files when a job runs Type of Report Contents Summary A header and summary report Complete Same as Summary but lists all files effected Diagnostic Complete but adds diagnostic relevant information gt Click the pull down menu to select the report option that you want Use the Summary or Complete options on a normal basis and switch to Diagnostics if you run into problems gt In the Report Options text box leave the default variables in place enter in the file name that you want to use including an extension or enter a variable name using File Name Field Variables below Or gt If you want to overwrite an already existing log file use lt Browse to find the file Filename Field Variables The file path can include a literal file name or a combination of variables that will generate filenames for reports Variables make it much easier to distinguish between reports and to find particular reports For example if you enter a path with a literal file name C Program Files BUFFALO Logs Job_Report log the system will generate the report destination folder Logs if it does not already exist and a report named Job_Report log Similarly if you enter a literal file name say DataErrors log a log named DataErrors log will be generated On the other
287. m_over_tcp lt Boolean gt camera_use_config lt Boolean gt camera_username lt character string gt Description Determines if motion detection data is captured from RTSP enabled IP cameras that support motion detection If selected for cameras that do not capture motion detection data or otherwise are not supported by the Buffalo Surveillance Server no motion detection data is preserved Default true Required The name of the camera Default The password for the account needed to access the camera Works in conjunction with camera_username Default A camera pool is a user defined virtual grouping of cameras to search video from specified cameras For example a camera pool called Doors that includes all of the cameras that cover the doors of your establishment When you need to see who s come or gone select the Doors camera pool as a search criteria and only video captured from cameras in the Doors camera pool are included There is no limit to the number of camera pools your Buffalo Surveillance Server solution may have Default Causes the RTSP capture to stream data over a TCP connection rather than over a default HTTP connection Default false System defined value The user name for the account needed to access the camera Works in conjunction with camera_password Default Token Value Description Required The URL from which the selected camer
288. maximum size gt Open the Vault Admin application In the left pane of the Vault Admin 204 main window select the Vault a to modify gt Click eg to launch the lt Vault Name gt Properties window or right click the Vault name and select Properties The Properties window features several tabs each responsible for some aspect of Vault functionality It opens to the General tab gt Select the Logs tab General Device Database License Security Logs Notifications Diagnostics Activity Log Enable activity logging Activity log pathname elnstall_dir Logs aultSycActivity 1 log Maximum log size 50 00MB ov Action to take when log reaches maximum size Create a new log v Error Log Error log pathname lt Install_dir gt aultHardDisk log lt e A a M m a m AA a a A a a a gt Select or enter the values that you prefer for the Vault from the following Field Meaning and Directions This checkbox will enable activity logging and the activity log fields listed below If unchecked Buffalo Surveillance Server will not create activity logs Enable activity logging Field Activity log pathname Maximum log size Action to take when the log reaches it maximum size Error log pathname Meaning and Directions Buffalo Surveillance Server supports event auditing providing a security audit trail through activity logs Activity logs include following
289. mbols making the Information Repository very flexible You can use several filters together to create almost any include exclude combination Using the same file set as an example the only files that will be processed in the following example are the vsd and xls files Filesin specified directory Filter Files that are processed Elevator design 12502 vsd wv vsd Elevator design 12502 vsd Elevator design rev 20502 vsd means Elevator design rev 20502 vsd Elevator design rev 21502 vsd Elevator design rev 21502 vsd Part845X xls Part845X xls Part236 xls Part236 xls Part 532 xls Part 532 xls Ref guide rev21502 doc Ref guide rev21802 doc Install guide 21502 ind lllustration 532 psd lllustration 236 psd Vacation 1 jpg Vacation 2 jpg Vacation 3 jpg Basic Wildcard Operators for File and Directory Filters File and directory filters operate on filenames and directory names respectively The Buffalo Surveillance Server supports the following wildcards with case sensitive alpha characters in file and directory filters for zero or more of any character for any single character Substitutes for zero or more characters Can be used in truncation and for multiple characters If used in a pathname it cannot replace a forward slash Use for all possible alternative spellings and an unlimited number of characters within a name For example h ophilia substitutes for all names containing h lt any character or numbe
290. me it cannot replace a forward slash Use for all possible alternative spellings and an unlimited number of characters within a name For example h ophilia substitutes for all names containing h lt any character or number of characters gt ophilia such as haemophilia hemophilia or h 1230phelia behavi r substitutes for all names containing behavi lt any character or number of characters gt r such as behaviour behavior or behavi123 zr patent substitutes for only all names containing patent lt a character or any number of characters gt such as patents patentable patented patent123 and so on patent jpg substitutes for only all names containing patent lt a character or any number of characters gt jpg such as patents jpg patentable jpg patented jpg patent123 jpg etc jpg substitutes for only all names containing lt any character or set of characters gt jpg Substitutes for any single character and can be combined to denote multiple characters If used in a pathname it cannot replace a forward slash Use for specific alternative spellings substitutes for a single character substitutes for two characters 22 substitutes for three characters and so on Only names with characters equal to the number of used are processed For example cell substitutes for all names containing cell lt one additional character gt For example cells and cello but not cell You can use within or at the end of a phr
291. media after The Vault s catalog will be updated with this unloading information Should data on this unit of media be required for retrieval a media request alert including the location note will be displayed by the Information Repository prompting an administrator to load the required media Media Tracking Options Required Input and Results The Location where media will be stored text box will Do not track media any be disabled When the media leaves the Information longer Repository its entries will be removed from the Vault s catalog gt Select an option from Media Updating combo box Media Updating Options Results oy The Vault will update the on media catalog on the Update Media Ineedsd media unit being unloaded only if it is out of date The Vault will not update the on media catalog for the Demotupdate media media unit being unloaded gt Click OK to complete the process The media will appear with a gold background in the main windowl204 Erase Media py IMPORTANT NOTE If you are using the Buffalo Surveillance Server Vaults and media are preconfigured and prepared automatically there is no need to perform any Vault operations The information in this Vault Admin section is provided for information only The erase media feature erases data from a unit of media but leaves the media header information intact Header information comprises the information entered when the media was preparedl23 media n
292. mera Recording Computer and a policy Description When you move your mouse over a policy listed in the left pane a small popup displays summary information about the policy LS The Camera Policies window as it appears in standard mode is shown below You may also choose to use Advanced Model 51 which makes additional tabs and fields available File Edit View Tools Help a Save S Wizard co Add X Delete Refresh Cameras Recording Policy Name Camera A Camera Scheduling 7 Arecont policy Arecont1 Coreen A Sw Arecont _Demo Arecont_Demo Camera arecontt Active bea policy AVS panes ae lw axis lobby policy axis lobby lw Axis Rear Deck policy Axis Rear Deck be Axis M1011 Test Axis lobby m1011 Basler policy Basler Le Basler_640_1 Basler_640_1 not be Basler_640_2 Basler_640_2 not ube Basler_My_1 Basler _MY a Recording Computer lw randstream_t policy Grandstream_t x lt gt The Camera Policies menu bar includes the following e File Includes commands for importing and exporting recording policy configuration cfg files as well as saving policies you have created or modified e Edit Includes commands for adding modifying and deleting policies e View Includes commands for refreshing the policies with the latest versions and turning on and off popup tips which you can hover over for more information about the fields in the tabs in the right pane and the policies in
293. message files written On all OSs this option creates a file that contains all the output data If a window or console is open when you change the mode of output to File the console or window will close However the Vault will continue running ay If you have enabled and are running a console to monitor a Vault you must close the console only via Vault Admin Closing the console or window manually will shut the Vault gt Define where Output is sent to The file path including filename that you enter here defines where message files are written to On all OSs this option creates a file that contains all of the output data gt Select Type of Messages The lower left box of the window displays the types of devices from which you can capture diagnostic information Check the checkbox in front of each of the option that you want to select You can make multiple selections simultaneously The following provides details about the available options Type of Message Results Provides information about client connections and data General Vault aie moving in and out of the Vault i Provides details about SCSI activity regarding moving Library is Dae media within a robotic tape storage device File system Includes any messaging about the host computer s working environment Provides information about the inner workings of the Tape devices ae storage device itself p Provides information about the inner workings of the Op
294. meter tape e Dds Digital data storage Dit Digital linear tape e Ait Advanced intelligent tape SuperAit Super advanced intelligent tape e Vxa Exabyte VXA tape e Travan Travan tape e Lto Linear tape open e MagOptical Read write optical e Unspecified Default unspecified Token Value dst_storage_pool lt character string gt dst_Vault_name lt character string gt dst_volume_format dst_volume_name dt_access lt alpha gt lt yyyy gt lt mm gt lt dd gt lt hh gt lt mm gt lt ss gt dt_stored lt alpha gt lt yyyy gt lt mm gt lt dd gt lt hh gt lt mm gt lt ss gt Description Specifies the name of the destination storage pool to be used Use for no storage pool name Default any Specifies the destination Vault to be used Default any Currently not supported Currently not supported Processes files based on the accessed date and time Valid values e AO Absolute Old Selects files with a dtu date_time_use equal to or before the specified date Enter the year as a 4 digit number AN Absolute New Selects files with a dtu equal to or after the specified date Enter the year as a 4 digit number RO Relative Old Selects files with a dtu equal to or before the relative specified date RN Relative New Selects files with a dtu equal to or after the relative specified date e Inactive Do not
295. milarly if selecting the Marketing folder and it contains a folder say 2008Q3 then 2008Q3 appears in the exported data at the same file level as Marketing not beneath it Finally if you select only files the exported data is comprised of only files Include filenames only This option ignores file folders so the exported data is comprised of only files A Include filenames only does not work correctly if selected files have identical names When files have identical names use Include full original pathnames or Include pathnames starting at selected items Define the e mail address for Rimage to send an e mail when the Rimage job is finished gt Type a valid e mail address Define what type of media Rimage is to produce Define how many copies of the data Rimage is to produce pE s 1 if typing a number manually press TAB or ENTER for the new number to take effect Define the information on media labels that Rimage is to produce Field Meaning and Directions The number and titles of the fields available depend on the Rimage Export Configuration window If a field is not present add it using the Rimage Export Configuration window gt After setting the parameters click Start Export to export videos Buffalo Surveillance Server begins to export files and a job status box appears in the Job Status pane While the job is running Stop is active If you click Stop while Buffalo Surveillanc
296. mplete gt lt none gt lt not selected gt Axis 210 Rear View milestone 192 168 3 13 Axis 21 lt notcomplete gt lt none gt lt not selected gt Axis Front Parking AXIS 210 rtsp 192 168 5 226 mpeg medi lt not complete gt lt none gt lt not selected gt Axis Lobby AXIS 210 rtsp 192 168 5 237 mpeg medi lt not complete gt lt none gt lt not selected gt Axis211_RearDeck AXIS 211 rtsp 192 168 1 229 mpeg4 medi lt not complete gt lt none gt lt not selected gt Axis_M1011 AXIS M1011 rtsp 192 168 5 116 axis media lt not complete gt lt none gt lt not selected gt Basler 1300 Front Basler BIP 1300c rtsp 192 168 5 100 mpeq4 lt not complete gt lt none gt lt not selected gt Basler 1300 Basler Front Parking Basler BIP 1000c rtsp 192 168 5 224 mpeq4 lt not complete gt lt none gt lt not selected gt Basler 1000 Raslerfidfir Rasler RIP Adn orksniff197 1A8 5 147imnend gnnt camnlete gt lt nane gt gnnt selected gt lt a gt Click to add a camera The Add New Camera window appears Name l Description Camera Pool lt none gt x Manufacturer Generic Model Generic Video Capture URL rtsp Test Camera Information Camera Type IP camera ba 3 7 Live View URL rtspif Test Management URL http yy Test j User Name Password
297. n To delete an existing camera configuration gt From the toolbar at the top of the Camera Policies 49 application click g to open the Camera Configurations window The Camera Configurations window appears populated with a list of all of the cameras configured in the Information Repository gt Select the camera to delete from the list gt Click x A confirmation window appears gt If you are certain that you want to delete the camera configuration from Information Repository select Yes The camera is deleted from your Information Repository and the list in the Camera Configurations window gt Click bd at the top of the Camera Configurations window to save the modified camera configurations wit B f Right click the camera of interest for easy access to edit live view manage and delete functionality Delete All Camera Configurations To delete all camera configurations gt From the menu at the top of the Camera Policies application select Tools gt Cameras The Camera Configurations window appears populated with a list of all of the cameras configured for your system gt From the menu at the top of the window select Edit gt Delete All Cameras A confirmation window appears gt If you are certain that you want to delete all camera configurations from your entire Information Repository select Yes gt Click H at the top of the Camera Configurations window to save changes Import and E
298. n implemented In other words the names above lt any gt represent Vaults media or storage pools actually running in your Information Repository The names below the divider are the ones that you have entered that do not yet have hardware implemented in the Information Repository These will not be saved if they are not selected when you save the policy vite pe Limitations to adding a new name for Vault Media Name or Storage Pool If you enter a new name for a Vault Media Name and Storage Pool options will be limited to lt any gt and lt new entry gt New entries in Media Name or Storage Pool do not limit options in the remaining fields If you add a wildcard for example Ac the wildcard will appear beneath lt any gt even thought there may be Vaults in the Information Repository the wildcard comprises A When entering pathnames or pathname searching patterns only the forward slash may be used as a pathname delimiter If you use a backslash as is customary on some platforms you may get unexpected results Wildcard Operators for Vault Media Name and Storage Pool The Buffalo Surveillance Server supports the following wildcards with case sensitive alpha characters in the Vault Media Name and Storage Pool fields for zero or more of any character for any single character Substitutes for zero or more characters Can be used in truncation and for multiple characters If used in a pathna
299. n Repository appear in the pull down lists unless you have added new parameters If you plan to add new Vaults media or storage pools to the Information Repository at a later time and know the name s that you will assign to these resources you can add the name s of these resources manually before actually implementing them They will be listed beneath lt any gt in the given field However to minimize the risk of error it is best to choose only media that appears in the pull down list There are several options for doing this Leave all of the fields set to the default lt any gt and let Buffalo Surveillance Server take care of everything The Buffalo Surveillance Server will choose the most accessible Vault and media with the most free space Select a parameter from the field that best meets the data s requirements and let Buffalo Surveillance Server take care of the rest If for example you select a Media Speed of S8 the Buffalo Surveillance Server will write only to media that runs at the speed associated with S8 Likewise if you select only a Storage Pool or Media Name the Buffalo Surveillance Server will send the files to only the storage pool or media that you select Similarly if you select only a Vault the Buffalo Surveillance Server will choose the best unit of media within the Vault and the data will not have Storage Pool metadata In general the Buffalo Surveillance Server will use the most readily available Vault
300. n entering pathnames or pathname searching patterns only the forward slash may be used as a pathname delimiter If you use a backslash as is customary on some platforms you may get unexpected results Buffalo Surveillance Server privileged users have the rights to override security in the application as it relates to Buffalo Surveillance Server resources e g media stored data Vault operations They cannot override local computer security The following are Buffalo Surveillance Server privileged users e Windows Administrators group e Windows Backup Operators group e Windows Domain Administrator user e Windows Domain Admins group e POSIX root user UID 0 e POSIX root group GID 0 When starting an application on Linux through a terminal shell using cd usr local BUFFALO Binr if you click the X button on the terminal shell itself the terminal shell and application closes If you have not saved your policy any new parameters are not saved If you press Ctrl C an Aborted message appears and the application closes If you have not saved your policy any new parameters are not saved Convention Contents To avoid closing an application by accident start the application using the nohup command Type nohup VaultAdmin gt dev null 2 gt amp 1 lt dev null amp at the prompt This completely isolates the command from the parent terminal shell Some Windows applications create filename
301. n from all of the sources for the given field in the Information Repository For example if you leave Vault set to lt any gt the Buffalo Surveillance Server will process data from all of the Vaults in your Information Repository a If you wish to create a new name for any parameter you may not use the following names already used by the Information Repository unnamed any new entry Only lt any gt lt unnamed gt lt new entry gt and or the names of Vaults media storage pools media types and media speeds that are already implemented in the Information Repository appear in the pull down lists unless you have added new parameters If you plan to add new Vaults media or storage pools to the Information Repository at a later time and know the name that you will assign to the Vaults media or storage pools you can add them manually However to minimize the risk of error it is best to choose only media that appear in the pull down list There are several options for doing this Leave all of the fields set to the default lt any gt or lt unnamed gt and use the Criteria tab to define what data will be processed The Buffalo Surveillance Server will choose the most accessible Vault and Media with the most free space Select a value from the field that you know contains the data you want to process and let Buffalo Surveillance Server take care of the rest If for example you select a Media Speed of S8 the Buffalo Su
302. n you use a wildcard in the Vault field only media and storage pools associated with the selected Vault are displayed in the Media Name and Storage Pool fields For example if you enter j in the Vault field only Media and Storage Pools in Vaults beginning with j will appear in the Media Name and Storage Pool fields The functionality is similar for Media Name For example if you enter Ni only storage pools beginning with Ni will be displayed in the Storage Pool field bt f See Advanced Wildcard Functionality for a complete list of and more complete information about wildcards Destination Tab Fields Vault Vaults are the basic units of storage in your Information Repository gt Click the pull down control arrow and from the list that appears select a Vault or select lt new entry gt to add a new Vault name When you select a Vault the Buffalo Surveillance Server will populate the Media Name pull down menu with the media that it finds on the given Vault vite f y you enter a new name for a Vault the Media Name and Storage Pool options will be limited to lt any gt or lt unnamed gt and lt new entry gt Media Name Media Name refers to the names of individual units of media in the Vaults of your Information Repository gt Click the pull down control arrow and from the list that appears select the media or select lt new entry gt to add a new media name The Buffalo Surveillance Server will then a
303. nation tabh2 to define the Vault media and or storage pool to which video will be recorded or captured 5 Select the Scheduling tabli28 to choose whether to schedule recurring jobs or individual jobs 6 Select the Advanced tabli3 to set options such as Pre Process Commands Log Files Location etc 7 Click bd to save all policy settings and implement the recording policy For details see Camera Policies Create Policies to Automatically Capture Videos lag Create a Data Service Policy Follow the steps below to create a Data Service policy 1 Launch Data Service Policies 15 2 If a policy is not already open by default create a policylei Before you can set parameters and initialize the process a policy must be open 3 Select the Source tabl175 to identify a Vault media or storage pool from which you want to migrate replicate or purge files 4 Select the Criteria tabh7 to denote which files to migrate duplicate or purge You can also add file and directory filters ha 5 Select the Destination tabl18 amp to specify where you want the files migrated or replicated to 6 Select the Scheduling tabli94 to define when you want jobs to occur By default Data Service policies are not scheduled run 7 Select the Advanced tabl9 to set options such as pre and post processing commands log output location connection sharing and throttling 8 Click to initiate the policy For details see Data Serv
304. nd Exporting Surveillance Videol273 for more information about how to export video out of the system To run Buffalo Surveillance Server policies from other computers on your network repeat Step 3 to download and then run the client software on those computers How To Each How To section provides high level directions on how to quickly execute a task For in depth information on any given task go to the respective section in this guide e Launch a Buffalo Surveillance Server application 34 Capture Video Feeds from RTSP Enabled IP Camera e Add and Schedule an IP Cameral 34 e Create a Recording Policy 44 Create Data Service Policies e Create a Data Service Policy 45 Search for amp Export Surveillance Video Files e Search for amp Export Surveillance Video Files 46 Launch an Application To launch a Buffalo Surveillance Server application see the instructions for the OS below Windows gt To launch a Buffalo Surveillance Server application from the Windows desktop click Start gt All Programs gt BUFFALO and then select the application to run a Macintosh gt To launch a Buffalo Surveillance Server application on a Macintosh browse to Applications gt BUFFALO gt Bin and then select the application to run Add and Schedule an IP Camera Follow the steps below to use the Camera Wizard to quickly and easily add a camera and start to record video gt From the suite of Buffalo Surveil
305. neeceseeeeeeecueeeeeeeeeeeners 286 Metadata Extensions Configuration s cssscsseceecsseceesseeesseesenesseesenesseeseneneeesneeseaseeseeneeseesensseeeseneneeeeeeeneseaees 295 Using Wildcards for Searching and Filtering csscesceeeeesseeesseeseeesseeseneneeeeeeeneesseeeenessensenssenesensneeeeneeneesenes 306 Set Export Options amp Export Vid OS cccccssssseeeeececececcenseseeneeseeeccaneasseeseseeseeacenssesenees 319 ExportExtenSiOns ctg cscsccsessesssssessesseeseeseeseesoesoesoessesaesaevsevevsesseeseesausousausaesaevseuseeseeseesnesnesaesaesaesansaneoeeseeaes 326 Monitor the Information Repository Network Activity amp Vault Statistics 335 MiNi VaAUIt Stats E E dec bevadas detiveceacenfeasdendeulacscs conedavacalancel lessdetedwcnceas Casceutevaasueued 338 AUT eo toe E eer eet Peete eee errerer E rr rermererrer E E E eer tert rere 339 Buffalo Surveillance Server System Requirements 340 Installation Hardware amp Software Requirements cccccccssecceececeeseecececceseeceeeeeeeeeeeers 342 Product LICE MSN cece icici cescceivandinesassucnctdensbustsddaneeivanatedbsssewccidsscbucudssesssbuveatecUavewebebduvateeus 344 Add or Remove Vaults Add a Hard Disk Vaullt cccccccsssseeeeeecececcnsseeeeeeseeeceaneesseneneees Add a Tape Library ccccceccssessesessesesesneeseeeauseeeseauseseenaneeseseaaes Disable SCSI Devices on a Windows Computer Add a Standalone Tape Drive Vault ccc
306. needed to access this camera User Name Password Camera Not Listed Cami auh te 89 re ren Ot PP nf Pe Or 2 a PPP a a gt To add camera information either click the Find Cameras button to display all the cameras found on the network or from the pull down lists select the manufacturer and model Af your camera manufacturer or model is not listed use the Camera Configuration window to add your camera rather than this wizard See Add an IP Camera Standard Model gt In the IP address box enter the host name or IP address in dot notation gt Enter the user name and password for the camera if they are required to access it gt Click the Test Camera button to start a viewer to test whether the supplied information is correct What if my camera is not listed in the Add Camera Wizard e If your camera is not listed add your camera s information using the Camera Configurations window See Add an IP Camera Standard Mode 63 for this procedure e f your camera manufacturer and model are listed Buffalo Surveillance Server automatically fills the required camera information gt Click Next The Description window appears Description What is the name of this camera For example Front Lobby Enter a brief description of this camera gt Enter a meaningful name to identify the camera and a brief description gt Click Next
307. ng Indexing is the process of surveying data on media to create a catalog on media or on a Vault Re indexing refers to when the indexing process is repeated and the catalog is recreated When media is re indexed the original catalog is overwritten Information Lifecycle Management ILM ILM stands for Information Lifecycle Management Information Lifecycle Management refers to the policies processes practices and tools used to align the business value of information with the most appropriate and cost effective IT infrastructure from the time information is conceived through its final disposition When ILM is video aware it is called Video Lifecycle Management VLM Information Repository Whenever you see Information Repository in this documentation the Buffalo Surveillance Server Information Repository is intended In general an information repository is an easy to deploy active tiered storage environment Specifically in the Buffalo Surveillance Server the information repository is the collection of all of your networked Buffalo Surveillance Server NAS devices Ingesting Also referred to as capturing ingesting refers to the process of using Buffalo Surveillance Server clients to get data into the Information Repository Capturing video from RTSP enabled IP cameras is a type of ingesting Interface In this help documentation interface refers to a Buffalo Surveillance Server application Load Balancing Load b
308. ng a Vault see the Vault Admin Prepare Medial234 section to add media to your Vault and information repository a All devices running the Buffalo Surveillance Server must be time synchronized If they are not unexpected results may occur ae st q py If you are running the wizard in standard mode some of the windows shown below will not be included a Before adding a standalone tape drive Vault in a Windows environment disable the device in the Windows Device Manager so Windows does not interfere with Buffalo Surveillance Server s management of the device For directions on how to disable a tape drive see the section titled Disable a SCSI Devices on a Windows Computer ssh siis py If you want to change Vault settings including security logs notifications diagnostics memory allocation for devices database optimization parameters and licensing after you have installed a Vault see the section titled Vault Properties 217 gt LaunchI 34 the Add or Remove Vault Wizard The Welcome window appears Welcome Welcome to the Add or Remove Vault Wizard This wizard helps you add a new vault to or remove an existing vault from your computer You must run this wizard with administrative rights To continue click Next gt Click Next gt The Add or Remove window appears vite amp If there are four Vaults installed on the computer where the wizard is run from then Add new Vault to this computer is disabled
309. nge the setting again and then re add the camera to the view frame If you close the Live Viewer application your video stream delay preferences are saved and ready for your next session vita pe If video freezes in low light conditions set the video stream delay value to a larger value at least 700ms or greater especially on slow frame rate high definition cameras such as Cohu Enable advanced user mode A check mark by this element allows the shortcut menu to display from the Live Viewer when you right click the Title bar The advanced mode shortcut menu features camera related options if the camera has the available functionality such as pan tilt zoom View a feed from a camera If the live view option is enabled from a camera during configuration you can view a camera s live feed in the Buffalo Surveillance Server Live Viewer View live feeds from up to 16 cameras at a time To view a live feed from a camera gt Launch the Live Viewerks directly or from the menu bar of the Surveillance Video Manager select Tools gt Live Viewer The Live Viewer window opens with frames for four camera views by default The title bar for each frame reads Not in Use as no cameras have been selected yet gt Double click the Cameras folder on the top right The names of live view enabled cameras are displayed gt Select the camera feed to view and drag it into a view frame The camera s live feed is displayed and
310. non Data Services policies client or vice versa you will get an error message and no policies are added Import Policies When you import policies they are added to the policies that are already in the policy editor gt In the Policy Editor menu click File gt Import from The Import From window appears Look in Polices erm 5 E SamplePolicy cFg Recent Desktop My Documents 3 My Computer a File name SamplePolicy cfg v Open 3 My Network Files of type Configuration files cfg v gt If you are not importing policies from your local computer navigate to the networked computer that contains the policies that you need gt Select the policy file that contains the policies that you want to use gt Click Open The policies in the configuration file are implemented Export Policies gt Create policies that you require gt In the Policy Editor menu click File gt Export to The Export to window appears Save in Q Polices a Q P p E Recent Desktop My Documents a My Computer L s File name SamplePolicy cfg gt My Network Save as type Configuration files cfa v C gt To save your policies with the default policy file name click Save without entering a new file name Or gt To save your new policies under a new policy file name enter a new name In the Export to window and then click Save Import Export Policy File Structure The file to which the pol
311. ns sunnnsnsusnnnnrnnnnnnrnnnnnnrnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnnnnrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nnen ena 159 Create Modify or Delete Policies in Data Service Policies s ssscssesensseseeeeeeeeeeseneeseeseessensenenseeseneneee 160 Create amp POLICY ceccecceceeseesecseesecsecsecaeeseceeeeeeaeeaesaesaesaecaeceessesseeaecaecaecaecaecaeseeseeseesaeeaeeaesaesaeeaeseeseeseeseaseaeeaeeas 160 Modify a Selected Policy ssi cs2ciss scececsceca cp ecessidags Seiseies deca nales aeaaea anea p anA E bE dives deveaey aneielaciehsiainaeea eei es 161 BAER Ee oaea A dnc scs scexestagiseeavenisieei seas sgecasatecetae 163 Import or Export Data Service POliCies o ciicccccicciasececesiesssassassecsiccccccscustnsenbanascaveascesecarecccssasacnenndnabtvatendateatinccdin 163 Source Tab Specify Where Files Come From cccsssssssseeseeseeseesnesnesoessesseveveessnesneseeseasoeseesseseeseeseusnneneas 175 Criteria Tab Set File Eligibility Definitions cscs sesseeeesseeeeeseeseesesesaesevseveneseeseeseesouseusesaessensensneeneas 179 Destination Tab Define Data Destinations csccesceeseessessenessesenesseeseneneeesenenneeseeeeneseensensneeesensneesennenneseanes 188 Scheduling Tab Define When Jobs Should Run ssecseecsseseesseeeseeseneeseeneneseeeneneneeeseesenesseesenessensenenseesenenees 193 Advanced Tab Set Advanced Data Service Options nsnsnsnnnsnsnnnnrnrnnnnnnrnnnnnunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nnmnnn nnee 196 Vault Admin Overview Manage Vau
312. ns window gt Click to save the modified camera configurations to your Information Repository whe Before you can import a camera configuration file you must create one The following sections contain reference information for doing so Camera Configuration File Structure Camera configuration files are block structured but free from any column or order formatting The tokens listed below specify camera parameters Each policy_name block is a single camera policy_name lt camera name gt lt token gt lt value gt lt token gt lt value gt policy_name lt camera name gt lt token gt lt value gt lt token gt lt value gt Token Value Pairs Tokens define camera attributes and functionality Following are the tokens and their definitions Token Value active lt Boolean gt description lt character string gt frame_height lt integer gt frame_width lt integer gt live_view_enable lt Boolean gt live_view_url lt pathname gt manufacturer lt character string gt mgmt_enable lt Boolean gt mgmt_url lt URL gt Description Determines whether the camera is active or inactive For Live View and camera Management to work this option must be set to true Valid values true false Default true A user defined value used in the menus and configuration file this is a description of the camera Default The height of the video frame
313. nt Clients icon under a Vault a to see a list of computers with which the Vault is currently working gt Use Options gt Address Formatted to modify the view of the details in the right frame Entire Network lady_HardDisk ZL Information Current Clients j SER Media a Client Address Type Action Connection Time Last Action Time Resource Client May Be Waiting Upon i Media This view displays a list of the media in the Vault that you select and after you select a particular unit of media the specific details about the unit of media gt In the left frame of the Vault Adminbod main window click the Media icon amp under a Vault E to see a list of media in the Vault Entire Network Media Name Barcode Id Size Free Space Status Storage Pool Time Last Written Time Last Acc JE Arnold_HardDisk BB7yrlegal_2 100002 99 15GB 98 98GB OK 7yrLegal 2008 02 19 21 53 03 2008 02 19 21 S Burnes Harddisk BBLongterm_2 100003 99 15GB 99 13GB OK LongTerm 2008 02 28 04 18 04 2008 05 08 1 Dash_HardDisk Homer_HardDisk Johnny_HardDisk Lady_HardDisk Lady_Tapelibrary Information amp Current Clients oe E 7yrlegal_2 E LongTerm_2 Diea paa DeEppE gt Click a particular unit of media from the directory tree or from the right frame to see detailed information about the media as illustrated below Entire Network item value JE Arnold_HardDisk Access Control 1 g A Burns_HardDisk Barcode Id 100
314. nt Logging Where should events be logged Computer Console naai a nha iinan Mie lt Back Next gt Cancel peura 7 5 petite shania ents OE E acnaine aint Atanas gt Enter or select the following in the Notification window Field Meaning and Directions Enable optional email notifications and the email notification fields listed below Enable omen When enabled receive an email whenever an event occurs notification of interest for managing a Vault These events include Vault start Vault stop media requests etc and are the same as those recorded for notifications Who should receive Type the email address of the user receiving email email notifications notifications about Buffalo Surveillance Server events The address of your mail server Use either IP address or computer name What is the name or IP gt Click Send Test Email to test the path the address of your mail server A Buffalo Surveillance Server does not test valid parameters here If an invalid IP address or computer name is entered email notifications do not work Where should events be Define where events are logged logged advanced mode only Field Meaning and Directions Computer Console causes events to be logged ina console that appears on the computer monitor It remains open as long as the Vault is running If the Vault is stopped the console disappears If the Vault is restarted the console disappe
315. ntering values click OK gt Click H to save the new camera configurations and add the camera to the Information Repository gt Repeat this process for each camera to add When you use Camera policies 49 to add a Buffalo Surveillance Server supported RTSP enabled IP camera the Buffalo Surveillance Server automatically configures camera settings and preserves motion detection metadata along with captured video This data is then used by the Surveillance Video Manager SVM application to create histograms of detected motion See the section titled Motion Detection Camera Configurationh4 for information about supported cameras and configuration Search Results window From the Add New Camera window click the Find Cameras button for the Search Results window to appear showing a list of cameras found on the network The camera list is pulled from a pre populated list of manufacturers If your camera is not on the list select the Show all devices check box for any additional cameras on the network and other devices to display If your camera still does not display you can add it manually in Camera Configurations In the Search Results window cameras in use appear grayed out and available cameras for configuration have an asterisk in the first column Select a camera and click OK or double click the camera item for the camera information to configure IP Address Manufacturer Model 192 168 113 AXIS 6032 192 168 1 55 px4 Web
316. o limit the size of the activity log because it may be difficult to find needed the information in an overly large activity log This option enables you to overwrite the existing activity log Overwriting the activity log prevents activity log proliferation If you select No for this option a new activity log will be created whenever the current activity log reaches the maximum size you defined in the previous field Error logs are created only when a Buffalo Surveillance Server Vault encounters a problem Error logs include warning and Vault start and Vault stop information Buffalo Surveillance Server supports error logging for every Vault in your Information Repository and error logging is always enabled This field enables you to define where error logs will be stored Where activity logs record all Buffalo Surveillance Server activity error logs record only events that have gone wrong Be sure to remember where you are storing your error logs so that you can refer to them should an error condition occur during Buffalo Surveillance Server processing gt Use lt Browse to launch the Error Log Location window Then select a location gt Click Next gt The Notification window appears Use to define where e mails about Information Repository events are sent and where Buffalo Surveillance Server events should be logged Q Notification Email Notification Enable email notifications Eve
317. oken Values Description Type The metadata item s name Name lt character string gt Required Default Checkbox Type Checkbox The Query type The label for the control as it will appear Label lt character string gt in the application Default Query block Type Choice Pathname Valid Token Values Default Value lt Boolean gt Description lt character string gt Name lt character string gt Type Choice Label lt character string gt Default Value lt number gt Description lt character string gt Choice lt character string gt Name lt character string gt Description The value that will be loaded into the control by default Valid values true false Defaults true checked The tooltip for the control Default The metadata item s name Required Default The Query type The label for the control as it will appear in the application Default The value that will be loaded into the control by default Valid values the number of the entry in the pull down list Default the first choice listed A If the DefaultValue for a Choice block is greater than the number of Choices entered the entire MetadataExtensions block will be ignored The tooltip for the control Default A choice statement that can be selected Must hawe at least one Choice Can be reused as many times as needed The metadata item s name
318. oleraTec LLC remove 384 disk drive requirements 340 Do not track media any longer 256 257 Do not update media 257 Domain rights delete 223 226 Dot Notation Address Format 260 Drives 262 Vault Admin 266 DVD devices message 233 SEa Emergency Halt 210 Enable transmission optimization 135 201 Erase Media 257 Error Log Filename 131 198 Errors 262 Everyone rights delete 223 226 Exchange Server Microsoft 47 160 Export Camera policies 87 Export Configuration Window Rimage 278 Export Data Service policies 163 Export Job Configuration 273 Export Polices 89 164 Export Queue 273 286 Extended Message Detail 234 m Feature Title 273 field variables filename 132 133 134 199 200 file Where Messages Will Be Sent 232 File De duplication 264 Prepare media 238 246 file filters create 184 rules 183 file permissions override 122 s Buffalo Surveillance Server File Size 182 File system message 233 File Tips 121 123 Filename Field Variables 132 133 134 199 200 Files to Include Exclude 183 Free Space 262 264 Full Domain Name Address Format 260 G Garbage Space 262 264 General 212 General Vault message 233 Generate a low resolution proxy 121 preview image 121 Graceful Shutdown 210 Group rights delete 223 226 H hard disk based vault add 349 license 349 Hard disk devices message 233 hard disk vault 214 hard disk virtual 207 hard disk requirements 340 header me
319. olicy Name pane gt Modify the parameters as needed on each tab for the policy See the subsequent sections for details gt Click H to save all policy settings and implement the policy Modify a Selected Policy With this feature you can modify a policy s name description and type apart from its parameters included files destination scheduling etc gt Double click the policy name in the Policy Name frame The Modify Selected Policy window appears Policy Name Purge Description artia titg Sat thet A aam Policy Type O migrate O Duplicate Purge v Active j ox _ cancel __ Help j Pirre r ad Ty errre gt Enter the new name in the Policy Name text box gt Enter the modified description in the Description text box gt Select a Policy Type Policy Type Action Moves files from one location to another yet Migrate pe When migrating from tape media files are marked as deleted not actually deleted until the media is reused and files are overwritten This enables migration jobs to finish in a timely manner Copies files from one Vault to another retaining the original stored Duplicate copy Permanently deletes files from the Information Repository When you select Purge for files on a unit of tape media a flag indicating that the files on the tape are deleted is logged in the database log index However the files are not actually removed from the tape until
320. on Below Valid values true false Default false A word or phrase in the file to be processed Default The maximum number of concurrent files permitted to be sent during a job Default 1 Includes files tagged for deletion Valid values true false Default false Prints diagnostic information to the path indicated in the list_pn option below Valid values true false Default false Specifies which directories to include Multiple dir_spec options can be specified The dir_spec check is made for every directory found This includes the directories contained in the pathname list that the job will traverse Default any Token Value dis play_only lt Boolean gt dst_media_name lt character string gt dst_media_speed lt character string gt dst_media_type lt character string gt Description Causes job to search for target files without processing them Lists the files that would have been processed Valid values true false Default false Specifies the destination media name If you don t specify a value in this option the Buffalo Surveillance Server uses the first available unit of media Default any Specifies the destination media to be used according to media speed Valid values e S0 S10 e Unspecified Default unspecified Specifies the destination media type to be used Valid Values e Hdisk hard disk e 8mm Eight milli
321. on LowerLimit Name1 Sje Ie Lian Sample String Label This field can be left blank or pre populated with Ease This is a sample of the Description field Name2 Pathname Sample Pathname Label This field can be left blank or pre populated with false This is a sample of the Description field Name3 Choice Sample Choice Label 2 This is a sample of the Description field Sample Choice Sample Choice Sample Choice Name4 Checkbox Sample Checkbox Label true This is a sample of the Description field Name5 Spin Sample Spin Label 26 This is a sample of the Description field 0 UpperLimit 100 This is the closing brace for the IngestMdExt block SearchMdExt Required block This identifies the beginning of the metadata extension This is the opening brace for the SearchMdExt block Query a value Query a value Query Query Query Name Type Label DefaultValue BlankValueOk Description Name Type Label DefaultValue BlankValueOk Description Name INOS Label DefaultValue Description Choice Choice Choice Name Type Label DefaultValue Description Name Type Label DefaultValue Description LowerLimit Namel String Sample String Label This field can be left blank or pre populated with false This is a sample of the Description field Name2 Pathname Sample Pathnam
322. on the same media to specify that the Buffalo Surveillance Server continue to write files to the same media If this option is not selected targeted files will be stored across the Information Repository on whatever media has the most space and or best availability gt Check Store on local vaults only to specify that the files be stored on the host machine on which the policy resides Scheduling Tab Define When Video Will Be Recorded Use the Scheduling tab to define when videos will be recorded from your RTSP enabled IP camera or captured from your VMS managed camera You can record or capture videos always or on a daily basis As soon as you save the given policy the schedule you created is implemented When Do You Want to Record Video The option that you choose defines the times when video will be recorded or captured and controls which options will be active in the rest of the scheduling tab When do you want to record video contains the following options e Option 1 Always e Option 2 On selected days each week gt Select an option from the When do you want to record video pull down list Option 1 Always This option enables you to record or capture video 24 hours a day seven days a week for as long as the policy is active To stop a policy that has been set to record video always you must deactivate change or delete the policy When you select this option the rest of the Scheduling tab fields are inactive and i
323. ons using the additional fields and tabs displayed in the main Camera Policies window To create a recording policy gt In the Camera Policies application toolbar click to create a new policy The Create a Policy window appears Policy Name Description Surveillance Camera Active 4 i Source 4 5 ox L Cancel __Help E gt Enter a name and description for the policy The name should tell you something about the policy so that you can know what it does later on without having to open it For example if you have a policy that is capturing or extracting video from the main entrance you might call it FrontEntrance gt Ensure that the policy is active or uncheck the Active checkbox if you do not want the policy to run When the Active checkbox is unchecked the as symbol is superimposed over the policy icon in the Policy Name frame gt Click OK to close the Create a Policy window gt In the first field of the Camera Tab of the main Camera Policies window select the camera configuration the policy applies to gt In the Scheduling tabh2 select when you want to record video gt Click to save all policy settings and implement the policy wet pe Recording policies are visible to all computers in the Information Repository that are running the Camera Policies application and that have appropriate permissions Modify a Recording Policy You can mod
324. onsible for some aspect of Vault functionality It opens to the General tab Device Security Logs Notifications Diagnostics General Device Database License Description Vault Name Yhostname Type HardDisk Status Location 192 168 2 13 1295 Software version 5 6 8 Start time 2011 12 21 12 17 34 ok cancel _ Help _ gt To change the selected Vault s name enter a new name in the Vault Name field gt Click OK The new Vault name is listed under Entire Network in the left frame of the main Vault Admin windowl204 pE EEK The following fields can be set only when a Vault is installed Subsequently they are read only e Type indicates the type of Vault e Location indicates the IP address of the Vault device e Software Version indicates the version of the Buffalo Surveillance Server e Start Time indicates when the Vault was first started Use the Device tab to change the selected Vault s storage connection resource settings The values displayed depend on whether you selected a hard disk or tape Vault Follow the steps in the sections listed below to set up a hard disk or tape Vault gt Hard Disk Vaultl214 gt Tape Vaultl21d Hard Disk Vault The Device tab enables you to define parameters for the selected hard disk Vault gt Open the Vault Admin application In the left pane of the Vault Admin 204 main window select the Vault B to modify gt Click eg
325. or only names containing xl lt a third character gt such as xls xlr and so on wom n substitutes for only names containing wom lt a third character gt n such as woman or women carbon fib substitutes for only names containing carbon fib lt two characters gt such as carbon fiber or carbon fibre Substitutes for zero or more characters Can be used in truncation and for multiple characters If used in a pathname it cannot replace a forward slash Use for all possible alternative spellings and an unlimited number of characters within a name Wildcard 9 One or more characters in a name Zero or more characters in a pathname including slashes Description For example h ophilia substitutes for all names containing h lt any character or number of characters gt ophilia such as haemophilia hemophilia or h 1230phelia behavi r substitutes for all names containing behavi lt any character or number of characters gt r such as behaviour behavior or behavi 123 zr patent substitutes for only all names containing patent lt a character or any number of characters gt such as patents patentable patented patent123 and so on patent jpg substitutes for only all names containing patent lt a character or any number of characters gt jpg such as patents jpg patentable jpg patented jpg patent123 jpg etc jpg substitutes for only all names containing lt any character or set of char
326. or all possible alternative spellings and an unlimited number of characters within a name Wildcard 9 One or more characters inaname Description For example h ophilia substitutes for all names containing h lt any character or number of characters gt ophilia such as haemophilia hemophilia or h 1230phelia behavi r substitutes for all names containing behavi lt any character or number of characters gt r such as behaviour behavior or behavi123 zr patent substitutes for only all names containing patent lt a character or any number of characters gt such as patents patentable patented patent123 and so on patent jpg substitutes for only all names containing patent lt a character or any number of characters gt jpg such as patents jpg patentable jpg patented jpg patent123 jpg etc jpg substitutes for only all names containing lt any character or set of characters gt jpg Substitutes for a minimum number or more characters If used in a pathname it cannot replace a forward slash The minimum number of characters matched is equal to the number of that follow the 2 substitutes for at least two characters substitutes for at least three characters and so on You can use within or at the end of a word For example carbon fib substitutes for carbon fiber carbon fibre as well as carbon fibers carbon fibres and carbonfio123 Only names containing at least the numb
327. or documents that contain corporate but not compliance use corporate NOT compliance Wildcard Escaping special characters Description wile NOT cannot be used with just one term For example the following search would return no results NOT compliance Grouping If you want to control the Boolean logic for a query you can use parentheses to group clauses to form sub queries For example to search for either corporate or compliance and Second Quarter 2007 you would use corporate OR compliance AND Second Quarter 2007 This ensures the phrase after AND must exist and either term within the parentheses may exist Field Grouping Use parentheses to group multiple clauses to a single field For example to search for a file that contains both return and the phrase overdue accounts you would use title return pink panther Notice that the field is followed by a colon Buffalo Surveillance Server supports escaping special characters that are part of the query syntax The current list of special characters is amp amp 4 21 To execute a search using the any of these characters literally in other words to escape any of these character use before the given character For example to search for 1 1 2 you would use 1 1 2 If you were to not use the escape character for 1 1 2 Buffalo Surveillance Server would search for OR 1 OR AND 1 OR OR OR 2 S
328. or example if you leave Vault set to lt any gt the Buffalo Surveillance Server will use all of the Vaults in your Information Repository choosing the one with the most free space that is most readily available for any given job A If you wish to create a new name for any parameter you may not use the following names already used by the Information Repository unnamed any new entry Only lt any gt lt unnamed gt lt new entry gt and or the names of Vaults storage pools media media types and media speeds that are already implemented in the Information Repository appear in the pull down lists unless you have added new parameters If you plan to add new Vaults media or storage pools to the Information Repository at a later time and know the name s that you will assign to these resources you can add the name s of these resources manually before actually implementing them They will be listed beneath lt any gt in the given field However to minimize the risk of error it is best to choose only media that appears in the pull down list There are several options for doing this E Leave all of the fields set to the default lt any gt and let Buffalo Surveillance Server take care of everything The Buffalo Surveillance Server will choose the most accessible Vault and media with the most free space Select a parameter from the field that best meets the data s requirements and let Buffalo Surveillance Server take care of the
329. orage in your Information Repository gt Click the pull down control arrow and from the list that appears select a Vault or select lt new entry gt to add a new Vault name When you select a Vault the Buffalo Surveillance Server will populate the Media Name pull down menu with the media that it finds on the given Vault wile if you enter a new name for a Vault the Media Name and Storage Pool options will be limited to lt any gt or lt unnamed gt and lt new entry gt Media Name Media Name refers to the names of individual units of media in the Vaults of your Information Repository gt Click the pull down control arrow and from the list that appears select the media or select lt new entry gt to add a new media name The Buffalo Surveillance Server will then automatically look for the Storage Pools that comprise the media If the Buffalo Surveillance Server cannot find storage pools that comprise the media that you have selected the Storage Pool field will display lt any gt Storage Pool Storage Pools are groupings of media utilized for a particular purpose A typical example of storage pooling is the utilization of several units of media for a single policy For example if you want to have the Monday night backup write to several units of media you would use a Monday night backup storage pool and assign to it every unit of media that you want to use for that purpose See Prepare Media Storage Pool for info
330. ored upon and compared to the original data on the client computer While data verification is imperative this method is very resource intensive and time consuming In contrast the Buffalo Surveillance Server uses a cyclic redundancy check CRC as the files are written to storage media If you are using policies to run jobs and an error or abnormal event occurs that prevents targeted files from being processed clients add the filename to an internal retry list At the end of the normal job and after the user defined delay time the client again attempts to process the files that could not be processed on the first pass If a file cannot be processed during the retry session the failure will be logged to a retry file and report Any instance of videos that are not processed is included in the Information Repository s error logs When a subsequent job starts the Buffalo Surveillance Server looks for the retry file and the videos slated for retry are added with first priority to the list of videos to be captured Data Migration and Replication Once videos have been captured into the Information Repository Data Service policies 154 can migrate and replicate data to and purge data from any Vault in the Information Repository This allows for creating an efficient and powerful multi tiered Information Repository See the Data Service Policies 5 section for details Offline Media When videos are being captured offline media are never be
331. ou have selected the correct Vault gt When you are ready to remove the Vault click Next gt The Completed window will appear gt Click Finish to exit the Add or Remove Vault Wizard You will need to restart your computer for changes to take effect If you want to remove another Vault or add a Vault launch Add Remove Vault Wizard again Scheduling Windows Following are all of the windows that support policy scheduling in Buffalo Surveillance Server e Date Windowlsed e Days Windowhss e Duration Windowks e Period of Time Windowlss Time Interval Windowke8 e Time Windowkse Date Window Follow the directions below to set the date on which you want a job to run Select Date 4 November 2010 gt Sun Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Sat 12 3 4 5 6 7 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 Mae ee vn ye eee gt Ensure that the month and year are set to your preference and then click a particular day from the calendar gt Click OK The Time window will appear In the Time window Set the time at which you want the process to run Days Window Follow the directions below to define on which days of the week you want a job to run Sunday Monday Tuesday Select All Wednesday iheeeins Deselect All Friday Saturday C gt aulin dann Ai ma Anna a Aidan a com a Aaah ae amp gt Check the days on which you want the job to run gt Click
332. ou might use Monday 1 for a unit of media being used as part of a Monday night job set Media Name Barcode ID available only This number corresponds to the barcode or a unique ID for tape media that support for the media If used Buffalo Surveillance Server tracks barcodes the media by its barcode Field Description Storage Pool Size GB available only for hard disk media not available for tape media Content Searching Description uit pe Barcode systems provide a significant performance increase whenever media is being loaded unloaded or indexed by the Information Repository This description is used on all media referencing interfaces and reports It is best to carry forward the naming convention used for the Media Name For example Monday night job tape 1 of 5 could be a good description for a tape named Monday 1 Storage pools enable you to group disparate units of media Used properly storage pools offer a convenient way to accommodate multiple jobs simultaneously and by providing fail over should a problem occur during a process prevent incomplete processing A typical example of storage pooling is the utilization of several units of media which may reside in several different Vaults together for use by a single policy For example if you want to have the Monday night backup write to several units of media you would create a Monday night backup storage pool and assign to it ev
333. our selection Y gt Select the clock icon to launch Timel 38 window and then enter a time The time you enter is displayed in the Time pull down list gt Select the calendar icon to launch Dateks l window and then enter a date The date you enter is displayed in the Time pull down list Process files relative to when they were last accessed or stored gt Select one of the options that includes an interval of time such as Accessed in the past gt Select Accessed or Stored The text in the Time pull down list changes to reflect your selection X The clock icon and Accessed Modified icon are activated ye gt Select the clock icon to launch the Period of Timeks window and then enter a period of time in terms of years months days hours minutes AND OR seconds The period of time you enter is displayed in the pull down list Refine your file selection criteria further by specifying a minimum or maximum file size associated with the policy If you enter a file size in the text box and select Minimum file size the policy manipulates only files that are larger than the size you have specified If you enter a number and select Maximum file size the policy manipulates only files that are smaller than the size specified gt If you want data to be processed according to maximum or minimum files size enter the files size select the unit of measurement bytes KB MB GB and then select Maximum or Minimum
334. ow where you can add a new license by activating a product key or import a license file Select an installed license from the group and then click the Delete button to remove the license from the Vault A Once the Add or Delete button is clicked the changes are immediate You can add the same license as many times as you like but the Vault Admin just overwrites the license file so only one instance is displayed in the Installed Licenses group Activate Free License If your product comes with bundled licenses and no licenses display in the Installed Licenses group then an Activate Free License button displays enabled in the Vault Properties Click this button to install and activate any free licenses in the bundle automatically without having to type in a product key Once activated they appear in the Installed Licenses group a If you are having problems activating your license visit the Buffalo website for manual activation Security Logs Notifications Diagnostics General Device Database license Summary Storage Capacity Unlimited Camera Capacity 10000 cameras Product Type Surveillance Platform Type any Expiration 2011 03 24 11 42 21 Host Id 22159694F Installed Licenses Serial Type Capacity Expiration Product Type A tr et betes e OO nag tiny Nt trig tip lt gt Hx Activate Free License 4 a e Add license and activate product key Connected to Internet Once you have received your produc
335. plete gt lt none gt lt not selected gt Axis Front Parking AXIS 210 milestone 192 168 3 13 Axis 21 lt not complete gt lt none gt lt not selected gt Axis Lobby AXIS 210 milestone 192 168 3 13 Axis 21 lt not complete gt lt none gt lt not selected gt lt gt a ee ee ee ee aa a G gt Ora ot Minas Ge gt Click to add a new camera configuration The Add New Camera window appears Camera Information Camera Type IP camera v Name l Description Camera Pool lt none gt z Manufacturer Generic Model Generic Video Capture URL rtsp Jl Test V Live View URL rtspiff Test 7 Management URL http Test User Name Password Alternative Frame Size 0 aiio Enable PTZ Enable stream over TCP Recording Computer lt not selected gt eaaa te Mt A a a aa a a Active OK Cancel Help if aR POS POP PO Pe A A aS gt Select Milestone managed camera from the Camera Type drop down list The relevant fields are displayed Camera Information Camera Type EESnGneucrcchencel Name l Description Camera Pool lt none gt J Target Camera Server Address User Name Camera Video Type MJPEG Recording Computer lt notselected gt v Active
336. policy in Basic Mode manually as explained below Also if you want to set up and define additional recording configuration options you can use the Advanced Models of the Camera Policies application To create a recording policy Standard Mode 1 Launch the Camera Policies 49 application 2 The Camera tablio should already have focus Select the video recording or capturing options you desire 3 Select the Scheduling tabl124 to choose whether to schedule recurring jobs or individual jobs 4 Click bd to save all policy settings and implement the recording policy To create a recording policy Advanced Mode 1 Launch the Camera Policies 4s application 2 The Camera tabho should already have focus Select the video recording or capturing options you desire 3 Select the Processing tabli2 to define video and file processing options 4 Select the Destination tabh2 to define the Vault media and or storage pool to which video will be recorded or captured 5 Select the Scheduling tabli28 to choose whether to schedule recurring jobs or individual jobs 6 Select the Advanced tabh3 to set options such as Pre Process Commands Log Files Location etc 7 Click H to save all policy settings and implement the recording policy Create a Recording Policy LS This procedure assumes that you are using the standard mode for Camera Policies If you are using Advanced Models you can configure numerous additional opti
337. pository lf your camera manufacturer or model are not found on the network the wizard cannot be used and you must add it manually as described below A To be able to view and record live video feeds you must ensure that RTSP is enabled on your IP camera See your camera s documentation for details on enabling RTSP To learn how to view live feeds see the section titled Search for amp Export Surveillance Video Files gt View Live Camera Feeds ks Lf This procedure assumes that you are using the standard mode for Camera Policies If you are using Advanced Models1 see Add an IP Camera Advanced Modeles To add an IP Camera Configuration gt From the toolbar at the top of the Camera Policies 49 application click Camera Configurations window File Edit Tools Help ld Save ae Add gt 4 Delete om to open the te Camera Name Manufacturer Video Capture URL Status Camera Pool Recording Computer Description Arecont Vision ts 6 sdp lt not complete gt lt none gt lt not selected gt Arecont Office Arecont Vision AYZ155DN rtsp 192 168 1 231 h264 lt not complete gt lt none gt lt not selected gt a AYS AVS Uriel Mpix 133 rtsp 192 168 5 238 mpeq4 lt not complete gt lt none gt lt not selected gt Axis 210 Rear View milestone 192 168 3 13 Axis 21 lt not complete gt lt none gt lt not selected gt Axis Front Parking AXIS 210 rtsp 192 168 5 226 mpeg medi
338. r of characters gt ophilia such as haemophilia hemophilia or h 1230phelia behavi r substitutes for all names containing behavi lt any character or number of characters gt r such as behaviour behavior or behavi123 zr patent substitutes for only all names containing patent lt a character or any number of characters gt such as patents patentable patented patent123 and so on patent jpg substitutes for only all names containing patent lt a character or any number of characters gt jpg such as patents jpg patentable jpg patented jpg patent123 jpg etc jpg substitutes for only all names containing lt any character or set of characters gt jpg Substitutes for any single character and can be combined to denote multiple characters If used in a pathname it cannot replace a forward slash Use for specific alternative spellings substitutes for a single character substitutes for two characters 22 substitutes for three characters and so on Only names with characters equal to the number of used are processed For example cell substitutes for all names containing cell lt one additional character gt For example cells and cello but not cell You can use within or at the end of a phrase For example xl substitutes for only names containing xl lt a third character gt such as xls xlr and so on wom n substitutes for only names containing wom lt a third character gt n such as woman or women ca
339. r 266 Migrates 061 media 262 264 Egar 161 add new 251 Peplicare 161 catalog 207 monitor jobs 335 concepts 207 Erase 257 N header 207 label 207 Name 262 load 251 252 253 254 naming conventions in Windows physical 207 unsupported 14 purging 208 Network Activity retention 208 Mini Vault Stats 335 virtual 207 Move Vault Symbols 335 Media in Drive 266 symbols 336 Media Name 128 178 192 Vault Stats 335 Prepare Media 236 244 network protocol requirements 340 Vault Admin 264 New 273 Media Off line 262 Nominal 338 Media On line 262 Mini Vault Stats 338 Media Preparation Time Notifications 229 Prepare media at next use 240 247 Prepare media now 240 247 0 Media Request 338 Mini Vault Stats 338 ui offline files Media Speed 129 179 193 include 202 Media Tracking Options Do not track media any longer 256 257 Track media after unloading 256 257 Media Type 128 179 192 262 Hard disk 239 240 Tape 239 240 Media Updating Options Optical devices message 233 Do not update media 257 Options overview Update media if needed 257 Vault Admin 259 Message Detail Vault Admin Actions 234 offline media 48 On selected days each week 130 194 On specific dates amp times 195 on media catalog 207 Opening a Buffalo Surveillance Server GUI in UNIX 13 Options Vault Admin Address Format 260 Message Type Communications Timeout 260 Vault Admin Actions 233 Override original file permissions 122 Microsoft Exchange Server 47 160 Owner
340. r Remove Vaults vite py IMPORTANT NOTE If you are using the Buffalo Surveillance Server Vaults and media are preconfigured and prepared automatically there is no need to perform any Vault operations The information in this Vault Admin section is provided for information only Since your Buffalo Surveillance Server clients are already configured for use upon installation this section deals only with the addition and removal of Vaults wile if you want to change Vault settings including security logs notifications diagnostics memory allocation for devices database optimization parameters and licensing after you have installed a Vault see the section titled Vault Properties 214 A You must have administrative rights to add a Vault All devices running the Buffalo Surveillance Server must be time synchronized If they are not unexpected results may occur Add Vaults Overview Work through the following steps to add Vaults to your Information Repository gt Add Vaults B48 See Add a Hard Disk Vaultk4 Add a Tape Libraryks or Add a Standalone Tape Driveb7 gt Reboot the computer with added Vaults To rename a Vault use Vault Admino4 gt Actions gt Change Vault s Properties 21 gt Prepare mediak34 using Vault Admin 204 Vault Considerations Vaults are installed on computers to control and manage storage devices The computer hosting a Vault needs adequate resources to operate and manage the stora
341. r Vaults and media are preconfigured and prepared automatically there is no need to perform any Vault operations The information in this Vault Admin section is provided for information only Use the Buffalo Surveillance Server Add or Remove Vault Wizard to add a Buffalo Surveillance Server hard disk Vault to the Information Repository This section leads you through the Add or Remove Vault Wizard in advanced user mode Unless you are an advanced user and have clearly defined reasons for changing the default values it is best to use default values leaving advanced user mode unchecked After adding a Vault see the Vault Admin Prepare Mediak34 section to add media to your Vault and Information Repository a All devices running the Buffalo Surveillance Server must be time synchronized If they are not unexpected results may occur SEK py If you are running the wizard in standard mode some of the windows shown below will not be included ite if you want to change Vault settings including security logs notifications diagnostics memory allocation for devices database optimization parameters and licensing after you have installed a Vault see the section titled Vault Properties 214 gt LaunchI 34 the Add or Remove Vault Wizard The Welcome window appears Welcome Welcome to the Add or Remove Vault Wizard This wizard helps you add a new vault to or remove an existing vault from your computer You must run
342. ration The Instructions page will appear AXISA AXIS 211 Network Camera Live View Setup Help gt Basic Configuration Event Instructions An Event Type is a configuration that describes how and when the AXIS 211 Network Camera will perform certain actions Event types may be set up as Scheduled or as Triggered gt Video amp Image gt Live View Config 3 S Event types are often set up to upload Motion JPEG images to a specified destination E k but they can also send email activate output ports and send various types oi Event Configuration notification messages Event types are configured in the Event Types menu Instructions Event Servers Many event types require an Event Server for their function These servers are used vent Servers to receive uploaded Motion JPEG images or event notification messages Configuration Event Types is performed in the Event Servers menu Motion Detection Port Status Ak Aanandita aa aah nnn sh hn ll gt Select Motion Detection The Motion Detection Page will appear AXIS a AXIS 211 Network Camera Live View Setup Help gt Basic Configuration Motion Detection 2 2010 Motion Detection gt Video amp Image Add Window gt Live View Config 0 Event Configuration Instructions Event Servers Event Types Motion Detection Port Status Include Exclude SoleraTec_me Object Size History gt System Options
343. rbon fib substitutes for only names containing carbon fib lt two characters gt such as carbon fiber or carbon fibre vite py See Advanced Wildcard Functionality for a complete list of and more complete information about wildcards Destination Tab Define Data Destinations After you have defined your policy criteria use the Destination tab to define criteria to determine in what Vaults media and or storage pools your data will be stored Read this section before you set Vault Media Name Storage Pool Media Type and Media Speed parameters Vault lt any gt x Media Name as z Storage Pool lt any gt me Media Type Media Speed lt any gt lt any gt v a a A L U If you leave any field set to the default lt any gt the Buffalo Surveillance Server will use all of the parameters for the given field in the Information Repository For example if you leave Vault set to lt any gt the Buffalo Surveillance Server will use all of the Vaults in your Information Repository choosing the one with the most free space that is most readily available for any given job a If you wish to create a new name for any parameter you may not use the following names already used by the Information Repository unnamed any new entry Only lt any gt lt unnamed gt lt new entry gt and or the names of Vaults storage pools media media types and media speeds that are already implemented in the Informatio
344. re a Vault means to lock it so w no further media can be added Shut Down Vaults 18 take a Vault off line Take Vaults off line m before performing any type of maintenance to the hardware where a Vault resides Icon Action ce Change Vault s Propertiesl214 Define Vaults devices databases licensing diagnostics notifications logs and security for Vaults Ea Run a Vault Checkupl234 Quickly check general Vault health c Load Reload or Re index Medials Bring previously prepared as media back on line Prepare Mediak3 or Prepare Existing Medial243 Prepare new or previously used media Unload Medial25 Media can be removed from the Information Repository or labeled as off line and be tracked by the Information Repository Erase Medias Remove all data from a unit of media without reformatting the media Refresh Update the view of the currently displayed data Secure or Unsecure Vault py IMPORTANT NOTE If you are using the Buffalo Surveillance Server Vaults and media are preconfigured and prepared automatically there is no need to perform any Vault operations The information in this Vault Admin section is provided for information only To ensure Information Repository protection Vaults are normally run in a secured mode When in a secured mode a Vault s media cannot be manipulated Media cannot be imported or exported copied reformatted or even relabeled In Vaults equipped with storage
345. re to stream data over a TCP connection rather than over a default HTTP connection Displays the computer that captures a video feed from your camera Select the clip duration and set the cache folder More information below Additional Target Camera fields for cameras managed by Milestone or OnSSI Field Server Address User Name Password Video Type Set Video Recording Options What it does The host name or IP address of the image server from which you want to extract video The user name for a user who has rights to access the camera whose video you want to extract This must be a Basic User If the camera requires a user name and password to be accessed this is the password This field works in conjunction with User Name MJPEG stores video in the same format in which it was stored in the VMS and takes the same amount of space H 264 is a loss less format that takes 30 to 70 less storage space Note Video Recording Option fields are available in Advanced Model5 only gt Set the following options for existing and newly added cameras Field What it does Clip Duration When you capture video feeds the Buffalo Surveillance Server parses them into individual files This field enables you to choose the size of these files and therefore the duration of individual videos Shorter videos smaller files enable the Surveillance Video Managerk7 to retrieve files for review more quickly and c
346. rest lf for example you select a Media Speed of S8 the Buffalo Surveillance Server will write only to media that runs at the speed associated with S8 Likewise if you select only a Storage Pool or Media Name the Buffalo Surveillance Server will send the files to only the storage pool or media that you select Similarly if you select only a Vault the Buffalo Surveillance Server will choose the best unit of media within the Vault and the data will not have Storage Pool metadata In general the Buffalo Surveillance Server will use the most readily available Vault and or media with the most available free space Select a parameter from the field that best meets the data s requirements and then select available parameters from the remaining fields When you select a parameter from Vault Media Name or Storage Pool the Buffalo Surveillance Server will limit the options available in the remaining fields to only those commensurate with the parameter you have selected You can assign several units of media to a single storage pool See Prepare Media Storage Poolle3 for more information about Storage Pools To return the tab to a state where you can choose any parameter from any field select lt any gt in the Vault field Create a new entry or new entries for Vault Media Name and or Storage Pool gt Use the pull down control for Vault Media Name and or Storage Pool and then select lt new entry gt A window will appear in
347. rmal Closes the Vault and all current connections e restart executes a normal shutdown and then restarts the Vault emergency Closes the Vault immediately Displays status information of current Vault Sets the communication timeout value Valid values e 1 10 where 0 is the shortest 9 is the longest and 10 is never Unloads media for the selected Vault Valid arguments e media name e media tracking lt yes no gt e if keeping track enter storage location e update the media if needed lt yes no gt Displays a list of registered Vaults Run the canned Vault exercises Argument Description Valid arguments e storage pool scale factor minimum file size maximum file size maximum sleep time check file lt yes no gt stop test on error lt yes no gt time to run lt hh mm ss gt Search for Review and Export Surveillance Videos and View Live Feeds SVM The Surveillance Video Manager SVM application enables powerful searching reviewing and exporting of video that is being managed in the Information Repository including metadata to any computer in your network It also enables you to view live video feeds s from configured RTSP enabled IP cameras While very powerful the Surveillance Video Manager is very easy to use Overview This section outlines the main parts of the application window Buffalo Surveillance Server jobs feature two phases Search
348. rmation about creating storage pools using Vault Admin gt Click the pull down control arrow and from the list that appears select a storage pool or select lt new entry gt to add a new storage pool name Media Type You can determine the types of media your policy will use by specifying a media type For example if Hdisk is an option and you select it only Hdisk media will be utilized This setting is useful for processing data of lower importance or less rigorous recovery time objectives py You can set either Media Type or Media Speed but not both pe Although only Hdisk media will be used the names displayed in the other fields will not change gt Click the pull down control arrow under the Media Type label and select the media type Only the media types that are available for the parameters you have chosen in the Vault Media Name or Storage Pool fields will be displayed If no Vault media or storage pool is chosen only the media types from media available within the Information Repository will be displayed Media Speed Storage technologies supported by the Buffalo Surveillance Server are categorized by their performance The Media Speed setting is useful for processing data of lower importance or less rigorous recovery time objectives Media Speed enables you to specify what media will be used based on media performance For example if S4 is an option and you select it only S4 media will be utilized pe
349. rocesses Token Value src_storage_pool lt character string gt src_ Vault_name lt character string gt src_volume_format src_volume_name start_days lt mtwtfss gt start_time lt hh mm ss gt Description Hdisk hard disk 8mm Eight millimeter tape Dds Digital data storage Dit Digital linear tape Ait Advanced intelligent tape SuperAit Super advanced intelligent tape Lto Linear tape open Vxa Exabyte Vxa tape Travan Travan tape MagOptical Read write optical NullDevice unspecified Default unspecified Specifies the source storage pool Default any Specifies the source Vault Default any Currently not supported Currently not supported Used only in the policy file Specifies the days on which the job will run Use to indicate days that job will not run For example if the job is to run on Thursday you would enter t 1 Default mtwtfss Used only in the policy file Specifies the time the job should start for each defined start day in start_days Default 0 0 0 midnight Token Value stop_time R lt yyyy gt lt mm gt lt dd gt lt hh gt lt mm gt lt ss gt summary lt Boolean gt throttle lt number gt type lt alpha gt vcs lt alpha gt lt number gt version lt number gt volume_use Description Used only in the policy file Specifies the date and time
350. running Camera Polices and have appropriate permissions Because recording policies are implemented across the entire Information Repository another user can change policies while you are working in Camera Policies To ensure that you are viewing the most current list of policies use AN If multiple people in your organization create or modify camera configurations or recording policies it is recommended that they not attempt to make their changes at the same time Doing so may cause someone s work to be unintentionally overwritten Camera Policies Advanced Mode When you initially install the Camera Policies application it is set in Standard Mode This lets you set up and connect RTSP enabled IP cameras and schedule jobs quickly and easily You can quickly create a recording policy by configuring IP cameras and setting the options in the Camera and Scheduling tabs of the Camera Policies application To capture video from VMS systems such as Milestone or OnSSI you must use the Advanced Mode of Camera Policies You may also want to use Advanced Mode to access additional more advanced options for direct connect IP cameras a Video capture from VMS systems may not be available depending on your hardware device and depending on your product license Compared to Standard Mode Advanced Mode displays several additional fields on the Camera tab and Camera Configuration window as well as additional tabs for setting Processing De
351. rveillance Server will be permitted to use for temporary files The working cache should be large enough to hold multiple large video files The default size is 100 GB wi T pe This setting can be changed with Vault Admin gt Vault Properties gt Devices 21A at a later time gt Click Next gt If the tape library was not able to provide the identification for its tape drives the screen below appears If the device was able to identify its tape drive then the next wizard window appears ewe all The chosen tape library does not support automatic detection of its tape drives The following drives require identification Drives to identify Drive 1 lt not selected gt vv Drive 2 lt not selected gt vv T y am 5 ltl kaasih meshelllete o gt 2 diem Maid Be le a a a Fe ee aay ell Field Directions Drives to identify gt Identify each drive by selecting it from the associated Drive 1 drop down list Drive 2 etc gt Click Next gt The Database window advanced mode only appears This is the database that keeps track of Vault contents information and metadata Define where the Vault database resides the time of day for database optimization how many database files can be opened simultaneously and how much virtual memory the database can use These options are detailed below i Database Where will the database be stored C Program Files Database2 3 At w
352. rveillance Server will process data only from media with an S8 speed rating Likewise if you select only a Storage Pool or Media Name the Buffalo Surveillance Server will process only files from the storage pool or media that you select Similarly if you select only a Vault the Buffalo Surveillance Server will process data only from the Vault that you select including all of the media and storage pools within the Vault Select values from every field for a more focused process When you select a value from Vault Media Name or Storage Pool the Buffalo Surveillance Server limits the options available in the remaining fields to only those commensurate with the value you have selected A single storage pool may comprise several units of media and or Vaults Create a new entry or entries for Vault Media Name and or Storage Pool gt Use the pull down control for Vault Media Name and or Storage Pool and then select lt new entry gt A window appears into which you can enter the new name for the field Enter the new Vault Media Name or Storage Pool and click OK The new entry appears in the field s pull down list A Although you can enter a new name here it is a placeholder that cannot be used to run jobs until you have actually created and configured the Vault media storage pool in the VaultAdmin application If you try to run a job with a Vault media or storage pool that has not yet been created using VaultAdmin the jo
353. ry load balanced The Completeness and Accuracy of Stored Files As a job is running the Buffalo Surveillance Server continually verifies the completeness and accuracy of the stored files Most products with data verification features require the data to be read from the media that it is stored upon and compared to the original data on the client computer While data verification is imperative this method is very resource intensive and time consuming In contrast the Buffalo Surveillance Server uses a cyclic redundancy check CRC as the files are written to storage media If you are using policies to run jobs and an error or abnormal event occurs that prevents targeted files from being processed clients add the filename to an internal retry list At the end of the normal job and after the user defined delay time the client again attempts to process the files that could not be processed on the first pass If a file cannot be processed during the retry session the failure will be logged to a retry file and report Any instance of videos that are not processed is included in the Information Repository s error logs When a subsequent job starts the Buffalo Surveillance Server looks for the retry file and the videos slated for retry are added with first priority to the list of videos to be captured Refresh your view of policies in the Information Repository Because all Data Service policies are implemented across the entire Information R
354. ry unit of media that you want to use for that purpose See Prepare Media Storage Pool for information about creating storage pools using Vault Admin gt Click the pull down control arrow and from the list that appears select a storage pool or select lt new entry gt to add a new storage pool name Media Type You can determine the types of media your policy will use by specifying a media type For example if Hdisk is an option and you select it only Hdisk media will be utilized This setting is useful for processing data of lower importance or less rigorous recovery time objectives py You can set either Media Type or Media Speed but not both pe Although only Hdisk media will be used the names displayed in the other fields will not change gt Click the pull down control arrow under the Media Type label and select the media type Only the media types that are available for the parameters you have chosen in the Vault Media Name or Storage Pool fields will be displayed If no Vault media or storage pool is chosen only the media types from media available within the Information Repository will be displayed Media Speed Storage technologies supported by the Buffalo Surveillance Server are categorized by their performance The Media Speed setting is useful for processing data of lower importance or less rigorous recovery time objectives Media Speed enables you to specify what media will be used based on media performanc
355. s it sometimes creates temporary files These enable Buffalo Surveillance Server to work more quickly and efficiently and are especially important when you are clipping video files Temporary files are kept in the working cache lf you do not want to use the location chosen by Buffalo Surveillance Server you can chose an alternate location by clicking lt Browse we f This setting can be changed with Vault Admin gt Vault Properties gt Devices 214 at a later time This setting defines how much working cache space Buffalo Surveillance Server will be permitted to use for temporary files The working cache should be large enough to hold multiple large video files The default size is 100 GB wtf Y pe This setting can be changed with Vault Admin gt Vault Properties gt Devices 213 at a later time gt Click Next gt The Database window advanced mode only appears This is the database that keeps track of Vault contents information and metadata Define where the Vault database resides the time of day for database optimization how many database files can be opened simultaneously and how much virtual memory the database can use These options are detailed below i Database Where will the database be stored C Program Files Database2 At what time daily do you want the database optimized Hv v am iy How many database files can be opened at a time 100 How much virtual memory can the databa
356. s Policies window displays all of the Data Service policies implemented across the Information Repository Consequently if two or more users attempt to modify Data Service policies simultaneously a conflict will occur and only the changes by one of the users will be saved The Data Service Policies window is divided into two main frames the right frame contains the tabs you will need to populate to create a policy and the left frame provides an overview of all of the data service policies in the Information Repository Overview information includes Policy Name policy Host data Source and a policy Description The Data Service Policies menu bar includes the following File Includes commands for importing and exporting data service configuration cfg files as well as saving settings for policies you have created or modified Edit Includes commands for adding editing and deleting policies View Includes commands for refreshing the policies with the latest versions and turning on and off popup tips which you can hover over for more information about the fields in the tabs in the right frame and the policies in the left frame The Data Service Policies toolbar includes the following buttons Saves all policy settings x Adds a new policy Deletes the selected policy A J Refreshes the view so that the latest version of each policy is displayed File Edit View Help seve fhau beete QY Refresh Policy Name
357. s always remain on line even when original files are taken off line managed data remains fully searchable Media Media refers to containers within Buffalo Surveillance Server Vaults on which data is stored There are various types of media including hard disk tape CD DVD and Blu ray Hard disks are sometimes referred to as virtual media CD DVD and Blu ray are sometimes referred to as optical media Tape is sometimes referred to as physical media Metadata Catalog Metadata is data about data It is structured data which describes the characteristics of a data asset In can include information such as how and when and by whom a particular set of data was collected and how the data is formatted Metadata catalogs reside in Vaults and servers and contain metadata files The Vault uses a portion of its host computer s hard disk to house the primary working copy of the metadata catalog This catalog will grow in direct relation to the amount of data stored in the Vault s a Fa I The ratio between the size of the metadata catalog and the Vault s data store is an average of 1 This can vary based on the length of a file s pathname of origin and the average file size For example small files with long pathnames will result in a higher catalog to data store ratio than large files with short pathnames The metadata catalog is replicated for safety and redundancy Every unit of media used to store data is equipped with the m
358. s beyond its reasonable control including but not limited to acts of God 7 EXPORT CONTROL REGULATIONS Licensee acknow ledges and agrees that none of the Softw are Documentation or underlying information or technology may be installed or otherw ise exported or reexported a into or to a national or resident of Cuba lan North Korea Sudan Syria and any other country to which the U S has embargoed goods or b to anyone on the U S Treasury Department s List of Specially Designated Nationals or the U S Commerce Department s Table of Denial Orders Licensee further represents and warrants that it is not located in under the control of or a national or resident of any such country or on any such list and will not transfer the Softw are to any of the foregoing 8 U S GOVERNMENT RESTRICTED RIGHTS The Softw are is provided w ith RESTRICTED RIGHTS The use duplication or disclosure by the Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in subdivision c 1 ii of The Rights in Technical Data and Computer Softw are clause at 52 227 7013 9 INCLUDED SOFTWARE This product can be configured to use QuickTime softw are Copyright 2009 Apple Inc All rights reserved This product can be configured to use VLC media player softw are Copyright VideoLAN team All rights reserved This product uses w xWidgets softw are Copyright 1998 2005 Julian Smart amp Robert Roebling et al This product can be configured to use FFmpeg softw ar
359. s for each camera to add When you use Camera policies 49 to add a Buffalo Surveillance Server supported RTSP enabled IP camera the Buffalo Surveillance Server automatically configures camera settings and preserves motion detection metadata along with captured video This data is then used by the Surveillance Video Manager SVM application to create histograms of detected motion See the section titled Motion Detection Camera Configurationh4 for information about supported cameras and configuration Search Results window From the Add New Camera window click the Find Cameras button for the Search Results window to appear showing a list of cameras found on the network The camera list is pulled from a pre populated list of manufacturers If your camera is not on the list select the Show all devices check box for any additional cameras on the network and other devices to display If your camera still does not display you can add it manually in Camera Configurations In the Search Results window cameras in use appear grayed out and available cameras for configuration have an asterisk in the first column Select a camera and click OK or double click the camera item for the camera information to configure TP Address Manufacturer Model 192 168 1 13 AXIS Q6032 i 192 168 1 55 px4 Web 192 168 1 11 hp LaserJet 192 168 1 57 Canon Mx870 v Show all devices i Ce J Cenc ef Add an IP Camera Advanced Mo
360. s option sends the output to the on screen window associated with the running processes To enable this option in Windows you need to configure Vault service on Windows to open a window on the desktop for diagnostic messages For directions see the section titled Configure Vault Service on Windows to Open a Window on the Desktop for Diagnostic Messages a If you select this option a window will appear to display Vault activity If you close this window you will stop the Vault The Buffalo Surveillance Server will not operate without running Vaults On a Windows OS this option sends the output information to an on screen window that is opened by the process On a UNIX OS this option sends the output to the computer s console window To enable this option in Windows you need to configure Vault service on Windows to open a window on the desktop for diagnostic messages For directions see the section titled Configure Vault Service on Windows to Open a Window on the Desktop for Diagnostic Messages A If you select this option a window will appear to display Vault activity If you close this window you will stop the Vault The Buffalo Surveillance Server will not operate without running Vaults This field will be pre populated with con to indicate output messages to console Overwrite this value in the Enter Pathname text box beneath Where Messages Will Be Sent type the path including filename to where you want
361. s processes and select the network transmission protocol that best suits the files being processed To get up to a 20 increase in performance it is generally best to leave this option checked However depending on your particular network configuration you may find that you can get better performance by un checking this option If your Information Repository seems to be slower than you would expect run a few timed tests to see which setting will work best for your Information Repository gt To enable this feature check Enable transmission optimization Maintain Client Vault Connection Vault connection sharing determines how many files are sent from the source Vault to the destination Vault in a single connection The higher the number of files or bytes transferred the longer the connection between the source and destination Vault will be maintained Access to a particular Vault resource Such as one drive of a multi drive storage device used by a process on one client will be restricted and inaccessible to other clients in the network for the duration of the connection To understand how this setting can affect a configuration imagine an environment where a single Vault with a single tape drive is used to service several Buffalo Surveillance Server clients When a client is configured with connection sharing set to 250 files and several other clients are configured to start jobs at the same time no client can connect until the first cl
362. s storage library gt Select a unit of media from the Choose media pull down list which will display all of the media in the storage device gt Leave Force Re Index set to Only re index if needed Buffalo Surveillance Server will index the media only if necessary gt Click OK to complete the process A new unit of media will appear in the media list 204 Reload Media As long as you are tracking media your Vault will display the media even if the media has been unloaded from the storage device Reloading media means to add it to the storage device after it has been taken off line If you are using tapes or glass media insert the media into its storage device If you are using virtual media you will not physically handle the media Use the Reload Selected Media window to load tape media such as tapes that are outside of a storage device into a Vault or to re index hard disk media The Reload Selected Media window is almost identical to the Load Media window gt In the left frame of the Vault Adminkod main window click in front of the Vault B into which you wish to load media gt Click and highlight Be Media gt Right click the particular unit of media that you want to reload and select Reload Media The Reload Media window will appear It looks just like the Load Media window except for the header and the available fields in which you can modify values General Information Media Location Med
363. s with Unsupported naming characters that are unreadable by Windows Explorer conventions in Windows These files are also unreadable by Buffalo Surveillance Server clients Questions For any questions that are not answered in this help resource please contact us 11 Getting Started This section presents information to help you get started quickly and easily and give you an overview of Buffalo Surveillance Server functionality See Quick Start for IP Camera Users 16 to perform the basic steps required to implement the In using Buffalo Surveillance Server set up an IP camera to record and store video and search for captured video footage See Quick Start for VMS System Users 27 to implement the Buffalo Surveillance Server begin to record and store video from your VMS system and search for captured video footage See How Tol34 for high level step by step directions covering several frequently needed tasks For in depth information on any given task go to the respective section in this guide a This software has a product license associated with it For more information see Product Licensingbaa Quick Start for IP Camera Users You can quickly and easily set up the Buffalo Surveillance Server and your RTSP enabled IP cameras to begin to record store and manage surveillance video The brief steps below show you how to get started They explain how to set up a camera configuration and begin to record video and then s
364. se in quotation marks For example corporate compliance 4 Second Quarter 2007 Boolean operators allow terms to be combined through logic operators AND OR NOT and are supported as Boolean operators vite pe Boolean operators must be ALL CAPS OR Wildcard Description OR links two terms and finds a matching document when either of the terms exist in a document can be used in place of OR OR is the default conjunction operator This means that if there is no Boolean operator between two terms OR is assumed For example to search for documents that contain corporate compliance or just compliance you would use corporate compliance OR compliance The quotes indicate a single phrase AND AND matches documents where both terms exist anywhere in the text of a single document amp amp can be used in place of AND For example to search for documents that contain corporate compliance and Second Quarter 2007 you would use corporate compliance AND Second Quarter 2007 The quotes indicate a single phrase plus symbol requires that the term after exist somewhere in a single file For example to search for files that must contain compliance and may contain corporate you would use corporate compliance NOT NOT excludes documents that contain the term after NOT exclamation point or minus symbol can be used in place of NOT For example to search f
365. se use 1068 lt Back Next gt Cancel P dr Prd ctl gt Enter or select the following in the Database window Field Where will the database be stored At what time daily do you want the database optimized How many database files can be opened ata time How much virtual memory can the database use Meaning This field enables you to set the location on the hard disk where the database will be stored This option enables you to set how often the database will be optimized To ensure that Buffalo Surveillance Server and your Information Repository continue to function optimally the database for every Vault is optimized daily This option enables you to limit how many files may be open simultaneously Having more files open enables Buffalo Surveillance Server to search faster However more files require more Information Repository resources This option enables you to limit how much virtual memory the database will use For best Information Repository performance choose a value that does not exceed 75 of the physical memory on the computer gt Click Next gt The Logs window advanced mode only appears Use to define to where activity and error logs are written O Logs Activity Log V Enable activity logging Where should the activity log be stored C Program Files Logs VaultSycActivity2 log How large can the activity log grow 50 00MB Overwrite the ac
366. ser Preferences to launch the User Preferences window gt Select or enter values in the fields listed below Field Details When checked tool tips appear in the window whenever you Enabl I ti able toot ipa hover the mouse cursor over a button field or other control Load images When checked thumbnail images are loaded as you scroll immediately when down the Search Results pane If de selected thumbnail scrolling images load only when scrolling stops Preferred format for Select the type of time code that displays in the Media embedded time Viewer display Field Cache folder Cache size Clear cache when exiting Preferred viewer Searching Options Details Define the folder where Buffalo Surveillance Server caches search results Similar to the cache of a web browser the cache stores found thumbnails low resolution proxy videos and other associated files and enables you to replay already found videos more quickly Define the size of the cache where Buffalo Surveillance Server caches thumbnails low resolution proxy videos and associated files When full contents will be overwritten in the order of oldest to newest vite py If unsure about cache size leave it set to the default value If you find that Buffalo Surveillance Server often needs to retrieve videos from storage rather than from the cache increase the cache size Select for Buffalo Surveillance Server
367. sets exported to policy files can be used Create name and use any file naming convention for policy files and be sure to keep track of where policies are exported to if it is a location other than the default location the user s home directory NIL Before restoring a set of policies to a computer that currently has policies set up be sure to delete all of the current policies before importing other policies otherwise imported policies are added to current policies A Data Service policies are incompatible with other client policies and vice versa If you try to import a Data Service policy into a non Data Services policies client or vice versa you will get an error message and no policies are added Import Policies When you import policies they are added to the policies that are already in the policy editor gt In the Policy Editor menu click File gt Import from The Import From window appears Lookin Poices QB ES fe Recent Desktop My Documents 3s My Computer File name SamplePolicy cfa v D My Network Files of type Configuration files cfg v gt If you are not importing policies from your local computer navigate to the networked computer that contains the policies that you need gt Select the policy file that contains the policies that you want to use gt Click Open The policies in the configuration file are implemented Export Policies gt Create po
368. several units of media which may reside in several different Vaults together for use by a single policy For example if you want to have the Monday night backup write to several units of media you would create a Monday night backup storage pool and assign to it every unit of media that you want to use for that purpose To assign a unit of media to a storage pool select a storage pool from the pull down list or enter the name of the storage pool for example Monday night backup This value defines the amount of storage space you want to make available for the Information Repository on the given unit of media It enables you to limit how much physical space on a single hard disk the Information Repository will use For example if the given unit of media has a physical capacity of 100 GB you can limit the amount available to the Information Repository to say 50 GB by entering 50 If you enter a value greater than the amount of space actually available Buffalo Surveillance Server will nevertheless recognize and use only as much space as is physically available This feature enables you to search the content of files in the Information Repository With this feature activated you can run content specific searches For example you can find all content containing the phrase 1Q2006 If not selected you will not be able to search for content in your Information Repository Enabling this feature will increase the size of your metadata
369. shooter aA Troubleshoot Device usage Use this device enable gt Under Device Usage click the down arrow and select Do not use this device disable gt Click OK The Tape Drive Properties window closes and the icon for the device in the right pane of Computer Management should now have superimposed upon it 29 Quantum SDLT 220 Tape Drive The tape drive is now disabled Remove a Vault eS IMPORTANT NOTE If you are using the Buffalo Surveillance Server Vaults and media are preconfigured and prepared automatically there is no need to perform any Vault operations The information in this Vault Admin section is provided for information only Use the Buffalo Surveillance Server Add or Remove Vault Wizard to remove hard disk based Vaults tape library Vaults and single tape drive Vaults from your Information Repository This section leads you through the Add or Remove Vault Wizard wet e py When you remove a Vault the data in the Vault is not erased and your license file is not effected gt LaunchI34 the Add or Remove Vault Wizard The Welcome window appears Welcome Welcome to the Add or Remove Vault Wizard This wizard helps you add a new vault to or remove an existing vault from your computer You must run this wizard with administrative rights To continue click Next thts cert ctor ttl ret inthe ttn ote gt Click Next gt The Add or Remove window will appear Q S A
370. sing date range 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 Start 2010 02 04 00 00 00 End 2010 02 04 23 59 59 Searching Buffalo Surveillance Server enables you to create focused search requests Define fewer search parameters for a broader set of results Define more parameters for the system to return more relevant search results gt To search for video captured on a particular date or between particular dates and times select Search using date range Selecting Search using date range activates the calendar control pI Sa eS When activated the calendar control is interactive for you to select start and end dates and times to search As shown above the top of the calendar control displays the months and dates The bottom half of the calendar control features start and end times gt Use the calendar to select a search date range Click the start date and select Start Date click the end date and select End Date Start and end date can be the same gt Use the calendar to select a search time range within selected search dates gt Click the start date and select Start Time Cancel gt Select a start time and then click OK gt Click the end date and select End Time Select Search End Time 59 F Cancel gt Select an end time and then click OK ae q by To search all stored video regardless of date and time de select the Search using
371. ssword database gt Click Refresh to update the list of cameras associated with the server and then select the camera with video to capture into the Buffalo Surveillance Server gt Click OK to close the dialog box gt In Video Type select the format the extracted video should be stored e MJPEG stores video in the same format it was stored in Milestone and takes the same amount of space e H 264 is a loss less format that takes 30 to 70 less storage space gt Leave the Active check box selected so the camera can be used in the policy to create in the next step gt Click OK to close the Add New Camera dialog box gt Click bd to save the new camera configuration and add it to the Information Repository gt Repeat the steps above to add the configurations for each camera with video to capture into the Buffalo Surveillance Server Information Repository Create a recording policy to record and store video gt In the toolbar of the Camera Policies window click Add l gt In the Create a Policy dialog box enter a Policy Name and Description select the host select the Active check box and click OK Policy Name Description f i Source f Surveillance Camera f Active a aie ee men Men The policy is displayed in the left pane of the Camera Policies window gt In the Camera tab of the Camera Policies window select
372. stination and other Advanced options See image below Camera Processing Destination Scheduling Advanced Camera Information Camera Areconti Active v Recording Computer Video Recording Options Clip Duration 5 minutes he Cache Folder Default Location To enable Advanced Mode select Enable Advanced Mode from the View menu on the main Camera Policies window wus K py If you turn Advanced Mode on it remains that way until you disable it ay If you set an advanced option and later want to change it you must be in Advanced Mode in order to access the option Keep in mind that some Buffalo Surveillance Server users in your network may be using Standard Mode and thus might not be easily able to see that you have made a change in an advanced setting In the following sections it is assumed that you are using Camera Policies in basic mode Additional options available only in Advanced Mode are noted as such Add Modify or Delete Camera Configurations The Buffalo Surveillance Server enables you to view live feeds from RTSP enabled IP cameras and record video directly from RTSP enabled IP cameras Before you can do this you will need to add cameras to your Information Repository and configure them When you add cameras the Buffalo Surveillance Server tracks them and they are listed on the Camera tab of every Camera Policies application on any networked computer comprised by the Information Reposi
373. sting Media window will be based on the media type in use by the Vault you selected If the Vault is being prepared for tape media the Prepare Existing Media window will display options for tape media If the Vault is being prepared for hard disk media the Prepare Existing Media window will display options for disk media General Information 3 General Information Media Name Media Name Description Barcode ID Storage Pool lt unnamed gt v Size GB Content Searching Digital Fingerprinting File De duplication Description V Enable Security Storage Pool Owner lt unnamed gt j j name Domain Users ESC PIETE Content Searching Digital Fingerprinting File De duplication v Rights Name Type Enable Ful Control Everyone Everyone Security Owner name Domain Users ESC HEH Media Location When to Prepare Additional Permissions 7 Prepare media at next use Rights Name Type rul Control Everyone Everyone OK Cancel Media Location When to Prepare Prepare media at next use VY Prepare Existing Media Prepare Existing Media window for hard disk media window for tape media gt In the Prepare Existing Media window enter values in the fields listed below Only Media Name and Size are required The names you enter for Media Name and Storage Pool appear in the Source tab of Data Service Policies 175 as well as the Destination tabs of Camera po
374. streams and 10 MB of cache the Vault will set aside 100 MB of total virtual memory for caching data A selection of 10 MB is usually sufficient Field When storing data how many files will be kept in a directory Where will media be stored by default Where can temporary files be stored How much disk space can be used for storing temporary files Meaning Data is stored in files in the Vault More files enable you store more data per unit of media but more files also slow down Information Repository performance Choose a value that meets but does not exceed your needs The following table details the number of files that correlates with each value Value Number of Files 50 125 billion 100 250 billion 150 375 billion 200 500 billion 300 750 billion 400 1 trillion 500 125 trillion Default location defines where by default media will be stored and managed Wherever in Buffalo Surveillance Server there is an option to use a default location Buffalo Surveillance Server will use the default location This setting enables you to define where the working cache will be located The default location is lt install dir gt WorkingCache When Buffalo Surveillance Server is processing files it sometimes creates temporary files These enable Buffalo Surveillance Server to work more quickly and efficiently and are especially important when you are clipping video files Temporary files are kept in the working cac
375. t the client computer network address will be displayed e host the client computer name will be displayed along with domain and subnet names e full The client s host name and port number will be displayed Shows valid usage for commands You can use only one command at a time Sets the pathname for Information Repository license Valid values e pathname the new pathname to the license file Loads the media for the selected Vault Argument media mstat lt name gt name lt name gt prepare lt arguments gt Description Arguments for a tape Vault with a mailslot e load from mail slot lt yes no gt e if loading from mailslot mailslot loc e if not loading from mailslot storage loc Arguments for a tape Vault with no mailslot e storage loc e force reindex of media lt yes no gt Arguments for a hard disk Vault e media name e media in default location lt yes no gt e if not in a default location pathname e force reindex of media lt yes no gt Lists the media for the selected Vault Displays media status e name the name of the media for which status will be displayed Sets the name for the Vault Valid values e name the new name for the Vault Prepare media for the selected Vault Arguments for a tape Vault with a mailslot e media name Barcode ID description storage pool content searching lt yes no gt file de duplication lt yes
376. t Vault Properties gt Security 223 gt Remove Vaults 384 See Removing Vaults from the Information Repository Ba gt Reboot the computer to which you have added Vaults Add or Remove Vault Wizard Use the Buffalo Surveillance Server Add or Remove Vault Wizard to add or remove a Buffalo Surveillance Server hard disk Vault standalone tape Vault or tape library Vault This section leads you through the first few windows of the Add or Remove Vault wizard in advanced user mode Unless you are an advanced user and have clearly defined reasons for changing the default values it is best to use default values leaving advanced user mode unchecked After adding a Vault see the Vault Admin Prepare Mediales4 section to add media to your Vault and information repository ote Af you are running the wizard in standard mode some of the windows shown below will not be included gt LaunchI34 the Add or Remove Vault Wizard The Welcome window appears Welcome j Welcome to the Add or Remove Vault Wizard This wizard helps you add a new vault to or remove an existing vault from your computer You must run this wizard with administrative rights To continue click Next T EE O O ttl ti O EEE gt Click Next gt The Add or Remove window appears ae wile if there are four Vaults installed on the computer where the wizard is run from then Add new Vault to this computer is disabled In
377. t Query block Query block statements describe the controls that will appear on the application These can include any number of string fields check boxes spin controls pathname fields and choice controls Each Block can have any number of Query blocks Its best to ensure that the IngestMdExt block and SearchMdExt contain the same Query blocks since the Buffalo Surveillance Server will search for only ingested metadata However if you prefer the Query blocks contained in SearchMdExt can be limited to a subset of those you have in IngestMdExt In this case you will be able to search only based on the Query blocks listed in SearchMdExt a lf a Query block contains an error the entire metadata extension block IngestMdExt or SearchMdExt will be ignored Metadata Extension Block Structure The following example is only for the sake of illustration Note that tokens can not be used in Query blocks indiscriminately Each Query block supports only specific tokens See Valid Token Values for Query Blocks below for details Blocks The following are the Blocks used in MetadataExtensions cfg Block Identifier IngestMdExt SearchMdExt ModMdExt Description Identifies the beginning of the metadata extensions block for Buffalo Surveillance Server ingesting and capturing applications May not contain a SearchMdExt block or ModMdExt block Required Identifies the beginning of the metadata extensions block for Buffalo Survei
378. t key and you are connected to the Internet follow the steps below to activate your license gt Open the Vault Admin application In the left pane of the Vault Admin 204 main window select the Vault lE to modify gt Click eg to launch the lt Vault Name gt Properties window or right click the Vault name and select Properties The Properties window features several tabs each responsible for some aspect of Vault functionality It opens to the General tab gt Select the License tab gt Click the Add button When the Add window appears select Activate Product Key and type the product key into the required text box Activate product key Product Key For Activation o cane Heb Add license and activate product key Not connected to Internet If you have received a product key and are not connected to the internet follow these steps gt Find a computer with internet access gt Go to Buffalo s website and locate the product key activation page gt Type your Host Id e mail and product key The Host Id is located in Buffalo Surveillance Server from the lt Vault Name gt Properties gt License tab as shown in the image below The product will run for up to two hours regardless of license status so you still have access to the Vault Admin You may need to reboot your computer to initiate the product General Device Database License Security Logs Notifications Diagnostics Summary
379. t location Dynamic Resource Allocation Any network computer with Buffalo Surveillance Server installed has access to any storage resource accessible by the network This makes it possible to build an Information Repository using as many storage devices as you need based on whatever storage media and drive technology you want Flexible parameters are available to build configurations that can send stored files to different storage devices based on the storage performance and longevity requirements of the files Embedded Time Display The embedded time display i e time code system assigns a number to each frame of video analogous to the way film is manufactured with edge numbers to enable each frame to be uniquely identified Time data is coded in digits in the form HH MM SS in the range 00 00 00 to 23 59 59 When available Buffalo Surveillance Server also enables you to view and use other units of measurement such as frame number Frame Frame refers to a section of a GUI window that is set apart by borders or a single image comprised in a video Header In the context of data storage a header is an area on media in which the parameters assigned during preparation of the media are stored The information contained in the header includes access control lists ACL storage pool information media size type etc Host Host refers to the computer from which files originate or the computer on which a policy resides Indexi
380. t looks as follows When do you want to record video Always On what days of the week At what time Start Stop Length E asin enn Amante tinea Dat fi atatnnntihnn trate Manhatten sth Aten tehihn Patina omnften antenna Option 2 On selected days each week This option enables you to schedule video recording or capture on particular days at specific times When you select this option the scheduling tab looks as follows When do you want to record video On selected days each week x On what days of the week Sunday Monday Tuesday Wednesday Thursday Friday Saturday At what time Start 00 00 Stop 00 00 nextday Length 24hours 0 minutes E Aten E N E E E E A N gt Adjacent to the On what days of the week text box click to set the days of the week on which you want to record or capture video The Daysks window appears Select the days you want video to be recorded or captured gt Adjacent to the Start time pull down list click the down arrow and select a start time gt Adjacent to the Stop pull down list click the down arrow and select a stop time Once you have selected start and stop times the Length field displays the total number of hours video will be recorded or captured per day Advanced Tab Set Advanced Capturing Options Note This tab is only displayed if you are using Advanced Models In the Advanced tab set log report and performance options
381. ted as wildcards When you search for metadata however wildcards are recognized Consequently if metadata that you ingest contains characters that are normally interpreted as wildcards when you search for metadata you need to use the escape character to denote that the wildcard is intended literally not as a wildcard For example if you ingest 16 37 as metadata and you then want to search for this expression you would search using 16 13 wile The search type options will be identical to those you defined in the ModMdExt block see details below Create a MetadataExtensions cfg You can create MetadataExtensions cfg using any text editor Once created it needs to be added to the following path lt install dir gt Config MetadataExtensions cfg is block structured text file At the end of this section you will find a sample MetadataExtensions cfg You can implement the file as is at the path noted above to see how it works or modify the file to meet your own criteria and then implement it MetadataExtensions cfg comprises three Blocks IngestMdExt SearchMdExt and ModMdExt which comprise one or more Query blocks each py Pay particular attention to braces there needs to be an opening brace after IngestMdExt and a closing brace after its last Query block an opening brace after SearchMdExt and a closing brace after its last Query block and an opening brace after ModMdExt and a closing brace after its las
382. ted to usage on hard disk based media only but can be used on all supported media including tape and optical devices For hard disk Vaults use Data Service Policies hed to define file retention rules to remove duplicated data or to retain source data indefinitely or for a pre defined period of time Furthermore the same retention rules can be used even if files are never copied or moved This allows data to be erased after a pre defined period Using Vault Admin you can erase mediales Erasing allows the Buffalo Surveillance Server to overwrite erased files When you erase tape media the Buffalo Surveillance Server delays the actual event until just before the media is to be re used This enables you to manage many units of media without having to wait for the typically long delays associated with the loading and positioning of media In cases where you need to ensure that an erase operation executes without delay you can override the delay and execute format erasel257 immediately Actions py IMPORTANT NOTE If you are using the Buffalo Surveillance Server Vaults and media are preconfigured and prepared automatically there is no need to perform any Vault operations The information in this Vault Admin section is provided for information only From the Actions menu or tool bar of Vault Admin 204 do the following Icon Action Em Launches Mini Vault Stats s38 for monitoring basic Vault activity Secure Unsecure Vaultl209 To secu
383. th and usability of the media Storage Pool The name of the storage pool if any to which the media belongs Total Errors tape media only The number errors the selected media unit has generated Total Loads tape media only The number of times the selected media unit has been loaded into a drive Type The storage device technology utilized by the media hard disk tape etc Drives This view displays a list of drives in the Vault that you select and after you select a particular drive the specific details about the drive gt In the left frame of the Vault AdminkoF main window click the Plus icon to the left of the Drives icon a under a Vault E to expand the list of the drives within a Vault Entire Network Drive Type Location Current I O Rate Media in Drive EB Armold_HardDisk Virtual 1 HardDisk 1 0 Bytes sec Reference_1 L Information yirtual 10 HardDisk 10 0 Bytesjsec Empty Current Clients virtual 2 HardDisk 2 0 Bytesjsec Empty r A ial yitual 3 HardDisk 3 0 Bytes sec Empty Virtual 1 Virtual 4 HardDisk 4 0 Bytes sec Empty Vitual 2 Virtual 5 HardDisk 5 0 Bytes sec Empty Virtual 3 Virtual 6 HardDisk 6 0 Bytes sec Empty gt Virtual 4 virtual 7 HardDisk 7 0 Bytes sec Empty Virtual 5 SVirtual 8 HardDisk 8 0 Bytes sec Empty Virtual 6 Virtual 9 HardDisk 9 O Bytes sec Empty Virtual 7 Virtual 8 Virtual 9 POPC i cE LS RN Frey apna O
384. that case delete a Vault before adding a new one Q o Add or Remove What task do you want to complete Add a new vault to this computer O Remove an existing vault from this computer Run this wizard in advanced user mode lt Back Next gt Cancel ON dct ti nt tate te inate tit ttt gt Select Add a new Vault to this computer or Remove an existing Vault from this computer Select Run this wizard in advanced mode if you are an advanced user and want to set parameters instead of using default settings gt If you are removing a Vault go to Removing Vaults from the Information Repository s otherwise see the next step gt Click Next gt The Description window appears f ge lt gt Description What type of device will be used to store the data Hard Disk v What is the name of this vault lt Back Il Next gt Cancel EO OOO eave gt Enter the following in the Description window Field Directions What type of device will Select Hard Disk Tape Library or Standalone Tape be used to store data Drive What is the name of this gt Enter a name for the Vault Vault gt Click Next gt gt Go to Add a Hard Disk Vaultls5h Add a Tape Librarylseh or Add a Standalone Tape Driveb7 in this guide depending on what type of Vault you are adding Add a Hard Disk Vault py IMPORTANT NOTE If you are using the Buffalo Surveillance Serve
385. the camera added Camera Processing Destination Scheduling Advanced Camera Information ACTiLobby 2 Active Target Camera Video Recording Options Clip Duration s minutes SA Cache Folder Default Location gt In the Scheduling tab leave the defaults so video feeds are recorded continuously When do you want to record video Always On what days of the week At what time Start Length SMR eta nate Aah enn Malan Ate Nae AAMT AB Ann Amt t am MEE Rana ha Minit Ma Aen MDEA o nA Amaan Mette fb gt Click Save to save the policy Wait for your video feed to be recorded and processed Search for and review recorded video Install Buffalo Surveillance Server clients on other computers After creating a recording policy wait about 15 minutes to allow the system time to record a 5 minute clip process and store it and make it available for searching gt From the suite of Buffalo Surveillance Server applications on your O computer open Surveillance Video Manager gt Click the Search button on the lower left The search results pane in the middle of the screen displays the video clip that was just recorded gt Also select the camera whose video you want to search gt Click More Search Options to see more criteria to narrow search results Refer to the section on Searching for Reviewing a
386. the camera name is displayed in the title bar of the view frame gt To view the feed from an additional camera repeat the step above View feeds from a camera pooll4h Change save or delete a live view layouth43 View feeds from a camera pool Camera pools are virtual groupings of cameras that users can define For example you might have a camera pool called Doors that includes all of the cameras that are videotaping the doors of your establishment It is often useful to see at a glance the live feeds from all of the cameras that belong to a certain pool The Live Viewer lists camera pools as well as individual cameras so that you can easily see the live feeds from all of the cameras that belong to a particular pool A You will only see live feeds from cameras that are configured with the live view option enabled To view live feeds from a camera pool gt Launch the Live Viewerks directly or from the menu bar of the Surveillance Video Manager select Tools gt Live Viewer The Live Viewer window opens with frames for four camera views by default The title bar of each view frame reads Not in Use as no cameras have been selected yet gt Click the Pools folder on the top right The names of the camera pools are displayed gt Select the pool whose feeds you want to view and drag it into a view frame Live views of the cameras contained in that camera pool will be displayed in the viewer window The camera name for each
387. the media unit was formatted for use by the Buffalo Surveillance Server Date Time Last Accessed Information about the last time the media unit was accessed for use by the Information Repository Date Time Last Written Information about the last time data was written to the selected media unit Description The description entered in the Prepare Medial23 window File De duplication Indicates whether de duplication is enabled Free Space The amount of space on the media unit that is available for use Garbage Space The amount of space on the media unit that is used by data that is eligible to be purged from the Information Repository Home Location tape media only The slot in a drive to which media is assigned Media Name The name of the media unit selected The media name is part of the media label Owner Displays the user logged onto the Information Repository during the media format for this media unit Pathname hard disk media only The directory pathname of the subdirectory where the media unit s space actually resides Random Access Indicates if random access of the media is permitted Size The capacity of the media unit selected Speed A performance rating utilized by Buffalo Surveillance Server by which different types of media are rated by their access and read write performance Hard disk is considered the highest performance media and DDS 2 tape is currently the lowest performing media Status The overall heal
388. the network more frequently Vault Expires Fast Clears view of inactive Vault quickly Client Expires Fast Clears view of inactive client quickly Key Symbols Colors and Data Movement Direction The following table details what the various colors of lines and shapes mean in Network Activity Object Meaning The hand is displayed when the cursor is hovered over a Vault label f gt Right click to open Mini Vault Stats 338 or standard Vault Stats gt Double click to open Mini Vault Stats ls Right click and hold the application s title bar to freeze the current image of network activity red circle A Vault in the Information Repository yellow circle A client in the Information Repository red line pulsing The Information Repository is waiting for offline media and operator intervention is required white line pulsing esa teen Repository is waiting for a connection slot The client is waiting for a unit of media to be moved into a reen line pulsin Ei l ne g P 9 drive This is mostly seen with tape and optical libraries white line stationary ee and the connection is idle waiting blue line stationary The client status is unknown Object green line moving blue line moving Meaning The Information Repository is transferring data The direction of line s movement indicates the direction the data is moving A media operation is in progress Load unload prepare erase etc Mini
389. the window disappear and then reappears ita oO if you select Computer Console or Window ina Windows environment configure Vault service on Windows to open a window on the desktop for diagnostic messages For directions see section Configure Vault Service on Windows to Open a Window on the Desktop for Diagnostic Messages Once configured Vault activity displays A If you close a window or console the Vault stops Buffalo Surveillance Server does not operate without running Vaults File causes events to be logged to a file Type the path where you want events logged If a window or console is open when changing the mode of output to File the console or window closes However the Vault continues to run gt Click OK to save the new settings Diagnostics Use the Diagnostics tab to enable diagnostic logging for the selected Vault When you enable diagnostics the Buffalo Surveillance Server creates diagnostics logs for all Vault activity for the selected Vault Diagnostic logging is optional Because diagnostic logging significantly impacts system performance it is disabled by default When enabled diagnostic logging is set to output to a window or console by default If you restart the Vault and return to this tab it will be set to the default Disabled a If you use diagnostic logging to assist in the resolution of problem conditions be aware that it will seriously impact Information Repository performance This is a
390. tical devices ipa storage device itself CD ROM devices Provides information about the inner workings of the storage device itself DVD devices Provides information about the inner workings of the storage device itself Provides information about the inner workings of the Hard disk devices HE storage device itself Database subsystem For use only by Buffalo Surveillance Server engineers RPC mechanism For use only by Buffalo Surveillance Server engineers Lock subsystem For use only by Buffalo Surveillance Server engineers gt Select Message Detail The Buffalo Surveillance Server lets you choose a level of detail to include in your diagnostic logs Use the combo box menu in the Message Detail section and select from the available list Message Detail Results Provides only high level overview information about the Short issues being tracked For example the General Vault feature only contains client connection names Provides more detail about the issue being tracked For example the General Vault feature provides additional Standard information about the client connections including times connection types and so on The Standard option is the level preferred by Buffalo Surveillance Server engineers Provides a full set of details It is usually reserved to Extended assist in resolving complex issues in low level Information Repository functions gt Click OK to save your changes Vault Checkup Use the Vault C
391. tion proxy videos and any other related files in the Information Repository Select to display a storyboard strip in the Media Viewer The storyboard displays still images from the video Click an image to jump to that point in the video Select to vew advanced information such as camera URL run time size and frame size in the Search Results pane for each video clip gt Click Save to save your settings when finished View Live Video Feeds You can access the Buffalo Surveillance Server Live Viewer from the Tools menu of the Buffalo Surveillance Server Surveillance Video Manager application In the Buffalo Surveillance Server Live Viewer application view live video feeds directly from RTSP enabled IP cameras Before seeing live feeds cameras must be configured in the Camera Policies application as part of your Information Repository To be able to view live feeds in the Live Viewer select the Live View URL check box and enter the URL when adding the camera configuration a To be able to view and record live video feeds you must ensure that RTSP is enabled on your IP camera See your camera s documentation for details on enabling RTSP a Most cameras can manage a single live feed while video streams are being captured More than a single live feed on any given camera affects performance The Live Viewer window is divided into two main areas the panel on the right side contains controls to select the cameras whose feeds you
392. tivity log when it reaches maximum size Error Log Where should the error log be stored C Program Files Logs VaultSvc2 log No create a new activity log when the maximum size is reached Browse Browse S eT PE rara met OO ae ere De ae cal mY e r gt Enter or select the following in the Logs window Field Enable activity logging Where should the activity log be stored Meaning and Directions This checkbox will enable activity logging and the activity log fields listed below If unchecked Buffalo Surveillance Server will not create activity logs Buffalo Surveillance Server supports event auditing providing a security audit trail through activity logs Activity logs include following events Vault start Vault stop file read file write file create file delete media load media unload and media erase For these events the following information is recorded name and IP of the user who executed the event and the date and time the event was executed Activity logging is optional Buffalo Surveillance Server creates activity logs in tab delimited format Consequently logs can be imported into any application that supports the tab delimited format such as Microsoft Excel This field defines to where your activity logs will be written gt Use lt Browse to launch the Activity Log Location window Then select a location Field How large can the activi
393. to which you can enter the new name for the field that you have select Enter the new Vault Media Name or Storage Pool and then click OK The new entry will appear in field s pull down list A mis method is recommended only for special circumstances If you try to run a job with a Vault or media that is not actually running in the Information Repository the job will fail lt any gt will divide the names of Vaults media and storage pools already implemented from the names that you have added for Vaults media and storage pools that have not yet been implemented In other words the names above lt any gt represent Vaults media or storage pools actually running in your Information Repository The names below the divider are the ones that you have entered that do not yet have hardware implemented in the Information Repository These will not be saved if they are not selected when you save the policy us v py Limitations to adding a new name for Vault Media Name or Storage Pool If you enter a new name for a Vault Media Name and Storage Pool options will be limited to lt any gt and lt new entry gt New entries in Media Name or Storage Pool do not limit options in the remaining fields If you add a wildcard for example Ac the wildcard will appear beneath lt any gt even thought there may be Vaults in the Information Repository the wildcard comprises A When entering pathnames or pathname searching p
394. to empty the cache when the application closes Select the type of video viewer a To play back videos in the Buffalo Surveillance Server media viewer you will need VideoLAN s VLC media player VLC 1 1 11 or Apple QuickTime version 7 free or Pro installed on your computer If you are viewing primarily MPEG 4 videos which are commonly used for surveillance video VLC is best a Be sure to restart the Surveillance Video Manager if you change the preferred viewer Search the ingest server for video files such as preview images low resolution proxies companion files or other related files Select search options Search for preview images or Search for low resolution proxies if your ingest server supports preview images or low resolution proxies Video surveillance files typically do not have other related files associated with them Ube py Searches with multiple search options selected can be time intensive because several passes through the ingest server are taking place Field Enable Storyboard Enable advanced user mode Details gt Select Search for preview images to perform an exhaustive search and return all preview images gt Select Search for low resolution proxies to perform an exhaustive search and return all low resolution proxy videos gt Select Search for related files to perform an exhaustive search and return all related files including high resolution originals preview images low resolu
395. to the right are for the RTSP URL of the camera that enables you to manage your camera This is an http address provided by the manufacturer You can test the URL you have entered by clicking Test If the test fails ensure you have entered the correct URL and that your camera and camera manufacturer support on line camera management If the camera requires a user name and password to be accessed this is the username This field works in conjunction with Password If the camera requires a user name and password to be accessed this is the password This field works in conjunction with User Name The height and width in pixels of video images Use this field if you want to define a frame size that is different from the camera s default The first field is for width the second field is for height PTZ stands for pan tilt zoom This setting enables the pan tilt and zoom functionality for the camera when PTZ functionality is supported by the camera For PTZ to work this option must be selected Causes the RTSP capture to stream data over a TCP connection rather than over a default HTTP connection Select from the drop down list a computer that captures a video feed from your camera Determines whether the camera is active or inactive To capture video and view live feeds this option must be selected If this box is not checked any policy that uses this camera will not run gt When finished selecting options and e
396. token value pair can be specified multiple times to include multiple file filters Default any Currently not supported gen_low_res_proxy lt Boolean gt gen_preview_image lt Boolean gt gen_video_components lt Boolean gt host_Id lt character string gt include_ offline job_type lt alpha gt list_pn lt pathname gt local_only lt Boolean gt Enables the Buffalo Surveillance Server to generate low resolution proxy videos at capture ingest Valid values true false Default true Enables the Buffalo Surveillance Server to generate preview image thumbnails at capture ingest Valid values true false Default true Enables the Buffalo Surveillance Server to capture ingest video files so they are readable by Buffalo Surveillance Server search applications Valid values true false Default false Where the tap service will run Default blank Currently not supported Specifies the job type Valid values e backup e collapse e move Default backup Specifies the filename to which all report information is written Supports token substitution Default path for the configuration file is R Logs P log Default path for the command line dev tty Specifies that the file to be ingested must reside on the local computer localize lt Boolean gt lock_vault low_res_proxy_quality lt setting gt obj_type lt character strin
397. tops after the running Restart transaction completes all database transactions and performs any cleanup activity required but does not remove media from the drive Use only for emergencies The emergency shutdown behaves as if removing power from the host computer A Emergency Vault restarted after an emergency shutdown may report connection timeouts incomplete database translations and other items gt Click OK to complete the process Manage Vault Properties py IMPORTANT NOTE If you are using the Buffalo Surveillance Server Vaults and media are preconfigured and prepared automatically there is no need to perform any Vault operations The information in this Vault Admin section is provided for information only After Vault installation use Vault Properties to change Vault settings These include security logs notifications diagnostics memory allocation for devices database optimization parameters and licensing gt Open the Vault Admin application In the left pane of the Vault Admin 204 main window select the Vault a to modify General gt Click m to launch the lt Vault Name gt Properties window or right click the Vault name and select Properties The Properties window features several tabs each responsible for some aspect of Vault functionality It opens to the General tab gt Select a tab from those listed below Generall213 Rename the Vault and view the Vault type and status information includ
398. torage devices to your network to increase retention migrate and replicate your video assets and add even more cameras The system will automatically take advantage of the new storage resources Replication and migration of video files to additional storage mediums while fully managing the storage location of these video files allows for rapid search and retrieval of relevant video scenes regardless of how long ago they occurred The solution also enables the user to fully manage and track video feeds even when those video feeds have been migrated to secondary storage Don t just export your video files to some other media keep total control of all of your video feeds for as long as you want them us XE f This guide documents the Buffalo Surveillance Server and avoids documenting OS procedures Software License Agreement The Softw are Programs Utilities and documentation provided by Buffalo under the name of Buffalo Surveillance Server are licensed only on the condition that you referred to as YOU or Licensee agree with Buffalo referred to as Company to the terms and conditions set forth below PLEASE READ THIS LICENSE AGREEMENT CAREFULLY BEFORE DOWNLOADING OR USING THE SOFTWARE OR DOCUMENTATION BY CLICKING ON THE ACCEPT BUTTON OPENING THE PACKAGE DOWNLOADING THE PRODUCT OR USING THE EQUIPMENT THAT CONTAINS THIS PRODUCT YOU ARE CONSENTING TO BE BOUND BY THIS AGREEMENT IF YOU DO NOT AGREE TO ALL
399. tory py To learn how to view live feeds see the section titled Search for amp Export Surveillance Video Files gt View Live Camera Feeds ks The Camera Configuration window displays a list of the camera configurations that have been created and are available for use by recording policies It displays the camera name manufacturer and model capture URL status camera pool recording computer and a description The toolbar at the top has buttons for saving adding and deleting configurations In addition you can edit an existing configuration by selecting it right clicking and selecting Edit Adding a camera configuration is the first step in using the Camera Policies application to directly record video if you have RTSP IP enabled cameras or capture video from a VMS system a Video capture from VMS systems may not be available depending on your hardware device and depending on your product license If you want to record video from an IP camera the quickest and easiest way to do it is to use the Add Camera Wizardls53 If you are a more advanced user you need to configure a VMS managed camera you will do it by using the Add button in the Camera Configurations window shown below File Edit Tools Help a Save Ga Add x Delete Camera Name Manufacturer Model Video Capture URL Status Camera Pool Recording Computer Description a Arecont Vision AV rtsp 192 16 JEZEN lt not complete gt lt not selected gt t
400. trieval Options to Export to Rimage gt Set the criteria for the following fields Field Meaning and Directions Define where files are exported to gt Select the Rimage option Export Destination vite EN When Rimage is selected the fields available change to support Rimage A user defined field that associates a name with the job Job name The name entered here appears in job logs gt Type a job name Define how selected data is arranged when exported There are three options How to name files Active for only Different Location and Export to Rimage Field Email address for job completion notice Disc type Number of copies Disc Labeling Meaning and Directions Include full original pathnames This option recreates the source file structure The exported data and its file structure matches the file structure of the source from which the files originated For example if the directory structure on the source is C Accounting Marketing the directory structure on the exported data will be C Accounting Marketing Include pathnames starting at selected items This option creates only the directory structure of the files selected for export For example if the source directory structure is C Accounting Marketing and you select Marketing the retrieved data includes only Marketing and the files beneath it Accounting are not included Si
401. ty log grow Overwrite the activity log when it reaches maximum size Where should the error log be stored Meaning and Directions This option defines the maximum size to which the activity log will be permitted to grow It is important to limit the size of the activity log because it may be difficult to find needed the information in an overly large activity log This option enables you to overwrite the existing activity log Overwriting the activity log prevents activity log proliferation If you select No for this option a new activity log will be created whenever the current activity log reaches the maximum size you defined in the previous field Error logs are created only when a Buffalo Surveillance Server Vault encounters a problem Error logs include warning and Vault start and Vault stop information Buffalo Surveillance Server supports error logging for every Vault in your Information Repository and error logging is always enabled This field enables you to define where error logs will be stored Where activity logs record all Buffalo Surveillance Server activity error logs record only events that have gone wrong Be sure to remember where you are storing your error logs so that you can refer to them should an error condition occur during Buffalo Surveillance Server processing gt Use lt Browse to launch the Error Log Location window Then select a location gt Click Next gt The Notif
402. uffalo Surveillance Server processing gt Use lt Browse to launch the Error Log Location window Then select a location gt Click Next gt The Notification window appears Use to define where e mails about Information Repository events are sent and where Buffalo Surveillance Server events should be logged Q Notification Email Notification Enable email notifications Event Logging Where should events be logged Computer Console aai a anhaa iiair Mie E N OE E lt Back Next gt Cancel peura 7 ny int sah tana gt Enter or select the following in the Notification window Field Enable email notification Who should receive email notifications What is the name or IP the address of your mail server Where should events be logged advanced mode only Meaning and Directions Enable optional email notifications and the email notification fields listed below When enabled receive an email whenever an event occurs of interest for managing a Vault These events include Vault start Vault stop media requests etc and are the same as those recorded for notifications Type the email address of the user receiving email notifications about Buffalo Surveillance Server events The address of your mail server Use either IP address or computer name gt Click Send Test Email to test the path A Buffalo Surveillance Server does not test valid
403. uffalo Surveillance Server software being used by the Vault Status The status of the Vault regarding serious error conditions or media requests Total Drives The total number of storage media drives within the Vault s storage device vite py It is important to note that hard disk Vaults are mapped differently than other Vault storage devices The Vault drive to physical drive representation may be a one to one mapping or may be virtualized so that the ratio may be higher or lower Total Errors A cumulative list of errors since the Vault has been on line This number is reset whenever the Vault is restarted Total Media The amount of media being tracked and managed by the Vault Includes all on line and off line media being tracked Total Media Off line Includes only formatted media that is housed outside the Vault s storage device and that is still being tracked by the Information Repository Total Media On line Includes only formatted media housed within the Vault s storage device that is being tracked by the Information Repository Total Robotic Arms The number of robotic devices within the Vault s storage device that are used to move media from storage slots to drives and back Hard disk based Vaults usually have as many robotic arms as drives Other storage devices like tape based devices usually have only one robotic arm Total RPC Calls In The number of remote procedural calls that have been made to the Vault since
404. ulated with a value BlankValueOk false Description phisik is eh Senos cre eNe Wwescweijpedcoim elan Query Name Name3 Type Choice Label Sample Choice Label DefaultValue 2 BlankValueOk Enue Description This is a sample of the Description field Choice Sample Choice Choice Sample Choiice Choice Sample Choice Query Name Name 4 Type Checkbox Label Sample Checkbox Label Der antie anie true Description Phistis alsamp leror eNe N Descrip oniu eld Query Name Name5 Type Spin Label Sample Spin Label DefaultValue 26 Description This is a sample of the Description field LowerLimit 0 UpperLimit 100 This is the cllosing brace for the ModMdExt block Processing Tab Set Processing Options for Recording or Capture Note This tab is only displayed if you are using Advanced Models The Processing Tab enables you to set video and file processing options for your recording policy Process video components Generate low resolution proxy and Generate preview image This feature enables video files to be captured so that they are viewable by the Buffalo Surveillance Server It also enables you to choose to have Buffalo Surveillance Server generate low resolution companion files and preview images when video data is being captured Because of their relatively small sizes low resolution companion files and preview images enable you to search for needed video files and clips within
405. ule On what days of the week Sunday Monday Tuesday Wednesday Thursday Friday Saturday At what time Start 00 00 w Stop 00 00 next day Y Length 24 hours 0 minutes gt Use the check boxes to select the days to record video gt Use the Start and Stop drop down lists to set the beginning and ending times for the period to record When you make your selections the length of the time period is indicated gt Click Next After scheduling to record video the Recording Computer screen appears Recording Computer What computer will be used for recording video Select Computer v gt Select the computer for recording video from the drop down list gt Click Next The Ready to Add window appears Ready to Add Review the summary below before clicking Next to add the camera Camera name Rear Entrance Description Panasonic camera at back door onto Ash Street Manufacturer Panasonic Model BL C1114 IP Address 126 34 52 88 User Name lt Empty gt Password lt Empty gt Schedule M W F 07 00 00 10 00 00 Recording Computer Diego gt Review the information To change anything use the Back button to go to the appropriate wizard screen gt Click Next The List of Cameras Added window appears u e List of Cameras Added Rear Entrance at 126 34 52 88 scheduled on M W F 07 00 00 10 00 00
406. ultAdminCl LS This section is intended for advanced Buffalo Surveillance Server users Use the command line interface ONLY if you are an advanced Buffalo Surveillance Server user and are familiar with command line environments Otherwise use a Buffalo Surveillance Server application Buffalo Surveillance Server Command Line Applications Overview Buffalo Surveillance Server command line applications provide an alternative way for users to execute much of the functionality that can be executed using Buffalo Surveillance Server applications Because Buffalo Surveillance Server command line application functionality is similar to application functionality you can gain a better understanding of the dynamics of each command line application by referring to the user s guide section for the application that performs the same operations as the command line in which you are interested To see a list of available options use lt executable name gt usage in any of the command line executables About VaultAdminCl Use VaultAdminCl to manage media and Vaults in your Information Repository gt To execute Vault Admin tasks 204 ensure that the folder to which you have installed the Buffalo Surveillance Server is in your command path open a command prompt and run VaultAdminCl at the command line As needed use the commands listed below See Vault Admin Manage Vaults ko4 for documentation covering Vault Admin tasks Command Line Options As nee
407. urveillance Server Once inside the Buffalo Surveillance Server Information Repository take advantage of management migration replication search and archiving capabilities a Video capture from VMS systems may not be available depending on your hardware device and depending on your product license The Camera Policies application controls all reporting scheduling and network bandwidth utilization Each Camera Policies client that is implemented runs independently and manages all error logging job operation completion times and other information for its own computer platform and file systems Any Camera Policies client can see and capture video data from any configured RTSP enabled IP or VMS managed camera Load Balancing You can denote a specific storage pool as part of the destination criteria for jobs The Buffalo Surveillance Server s clients locate the Vault or Vaults that contains the denoted storage pool and stores the defined files to it If there are multiple Vaults with media belonging to the storage pool defined for the initial job clients pick the one with the most available free space on it This keeps the entire Information Repository load balanced The Completeness and Accuracy of Stored Files As a job is running the Buffalo Surveillance Server continually verifies the completeness and accuracy of the stored files Most products with data verification features require the data to be read from the media that it is st
408. utomatically look for the Storage Pools that comprise the media If the Buffalo Surveillance Server cannot find storage pools that comprise the media that you have selected the Storage Pool field will display lt any gt Storage Pool Storage Pools are groupings of media utilized for a particular purpose A typical example of storage pooling is the utilization of several units of media for a single policy For example if you want to have the Monday night backup write to several units of media you would use a Monday night backup storage pool and assign to it every unit of media that you want to use for that purpose See Prepare Media Storage Pool for information about creating storage pools using Vault Admin gt Click the pull down control arrow and from the list that appears select a storage pool or select lt new entry gt to add a new storage pool name Media Type You can determine the types of media your policy will use by specifying a media type For example if Hdisk is an option and you select it only Hdisk media will be utilized This setting is useful for processing data of lower importance or less rigorous recovery time objectives py You can set either Media Type or Media Speed but not both pe Although only Hdisk media will be used the names displayed in the other fields will not change gt Click the pull down control arrow under the Media Type label and select the media type Only the media types that are
409. w Or gt If you want to overwrite an already existing log file use lt Browse to find the file Filename Field Variables The file path can include a literal file name or a combination of variables that will generate filenames for reports Variables make it much easier to distinguish between reports and to find particular reports For example if you enter a path with a literal file name C Program Files BUFFALO Logs Job_Report log the system will generate the report destination folder Logs if it does not already exist and a report named Job_Report log Similarly if you enter a literal file name say DataErrors log a log named DataErrors log will be generated On the other hand if you enter a path with variables Separated by an underscore for the file name say R Logs P_from_ H_on_ D_at_ T the system will generate the report destination folder Logs and a report named Monday Night Set_from_Rex lt host name gt _on_ lt date gt _at_ lt time gt where policy name host name date and time are populated with the actual details from your Information Repository and job Following are the variables you can enter in the order you prefer When using multiple variables separate them from each other with an underscore _ Variable Description P or Pn Policy Name H or Hn Host Name D Date yyyy mm dd Dy Year Dm Month Dd Day T Time hh mm Th Hour Tm Minute Ts Second R or Rn
410. whether videos already on the target computer will be overwritten gt Select an option When to overwrite AN existing files pe If a file that is being exported already resides in the directory on the target computer to which you want to export it there will be a conflict and the file will not be exported The target computer is the computer to which files are to be exported When you have selected several clips captured from the How to export the selected Same camera Buffalo Surveillance Server can export video them as discrete videos or as a single video gt Select an option gt After setting the parameters click Start Export to export videos Buffalo Surveillance Server begins to export files and a job status box appears in the Job Status pane While the job is running Stop is active If you click Stop while Buffalo Surveillance Server is exporting files the export is stopped and not all of the files in the Export Queue are exported However files that have already been completely exported will remain on the target computer Click Dismiss to close the job status box Problems Exporting Click View to open a log file that details the export job and what may be causing problems sty Dy To ensure that viable data on networked computers is not accidentally overwritten existing files on networked computers are not overwritten If an export job is unsuccessful as indicated by zero files being retrieved
411. with the Buffalo Surveillance Server job If you select Yes the Durationbs window will appear I Option 3 On specific dates and times This option enables you to create jobs that will run on specific dates and times You can add as many jobs as you wish When you select this option the scheduling tab will look as follows When should the job run On specific dates amp times On which date and at what time Pe Cee we ee Se erat Se oan Should the job be stopped before it is completed No SS Ae AA PERN lt gt To Add scheduled run Dates and Times click Add to add dates and times at which the job will run First the Datebs window will appear Select a date After you select a date the Times window will appear Select a time gt To Delete scheduled run dates and times select date and time settings and then click Delete to remove the setting gt To Edit scheduled run dates and times delete the entry that you want to change and then Add a new run date and time gt Determine whether the job should be stopped before it is completed Set a job to stop before it is completed if another process will otherwise conflict with the Buffalo Surveillance Server job If you select Yes the Durations window will appear Advanced Tab Set Advanced Data Service Options After you have defined a schedule there are several options under Data Service Policies s Advanced tab that enable you to further
412. xport Camera Configurations This overview is intended for advanced users It provides directions for exporting and importing camera configurations and it details the format of the file that is created whenever you export camera configurations from Camera Policies While it is best to use Camera Policies to change your camera configurations you can also do so by creating and importing a specially formatted file Export Current Camera Configurations to a File gt From the menu at the top of the Camera Policies application select Tools gt Camera Configurations The Camera Configurations window appears gt From the menu at the top of the Camera Configurations window select File gt Export to The Export to window appears The default file name is Cameras cfg You can use whatever filename you wish gt Select the location to which you want to export the file and then click Save The file is saved to the location you selected Import a Configuration From a File gt From the menu at the top of the Camera Policies application select Tools gt Camera Configurations The Camera Configurations window appears gt From the menu at the top of the Camera Configurations window select File gt Import from The Import from window appears gt Navigate to the file location where you have saved your camera configurations file select it and then click Open The camera configurations from the file are added to the Camera Configuratio
413. xport Job Configuration gt To enable export to Rimage select Tools gt Rimage Configuration The Rimage Configuration window appears Browse older Browse Browse Browse User Assigned Merge Fields ields 4 Cancel gt Check Enable Rimage export to enable this feature The fields in the window will become active gt Enter values in the fields listed below Field Details Local View Export folder Local View Network Publisher Orders folder Remote View Export folder The view of the export folder on the Buffalo Surveillance Server client computer from the Buffalo Surveillance Server client computer Client computer refers to the computer on which the Buffalo Surveillance Server client is running The Network Publisher Order Files folder resides on the Rimage computer This is the Buffalo Surveillance Server client computer s view of the export folder on the Rimage computer Client computer refers to the computer on which the Buffalo Surveillance Server client is running The view of the export folder on the Buffalo Surveillance Server client computer from the Rimage computer This is the export folder on the client computer on which Buffalo Surveillance Server is running The path you enter needs to indicate how this folder is viewed by the Rimage system Field Remote View Disc label User Assigned Merge fields Number of fields Save configuration for all users
414. xportExtension Required This identifies the beginning of the ExportExtension block This is the opening brace for the ExportExtensilon block Label Sample Value for the How do you want to export the retrieved files Eire lak Description This is a sample of the description field for the Label Command echo 1 2 3 4 5 SP SU command that will be executed ole M D T Required this is the Query Name Namel Type String Label Sample String Label DefaultValue This field can be left blank or pre populated BlankValueOk false Description This is a sample of the Description field Ouery Name Name2 Type Pathname Label Sample Pathname Label DefaultValue This field can be left blank or pre populated BlankValueOk false Description This is a sample of the Description field Query Name Name3 Type Choice Label Sample Choice Label DefaultValue 2 BlankValueOk true Description This is a sample of the Description field Choice Sample Choice Choice Sample Choice Choice Sample Choice Query Name Name4 Type Checkbox Label Sample Checkbox Label DefaultValue true Description This is a sample of the Description field Monitor the Information Repository Network Activity amp Vault Statistics Network Activity graphically represents in real time each client and Vault in the network
415. y Create Modify or Delete Policies in Data Service Policies Policies define what data will be moved and how it will be moved They define process parameters that include the media data source and data destination values Every policy that you create using Data Service Policies must be for migrating duplicating or purging files To meet complex ILM needs you would create several policies each one responsible for one part of the overall data movement process The policy name that you create appears in the left half of the application window in the policy selection frame and is saved as part of the active configuration If at any time after you add a policy you find that the policy no longer meets your needs you can always modify or delete it by following the directions below wile N Once a policy is created that meets your requirements be sure to back it up by exporting it This enables you to easily restore import lost or corrupted policies See Import or Export Policies for directions at ae a py Duplicate policy names are permitted gt For directions on policy creation see Create a Policy he gt For directions on policy modification see Modify a Policy hed gt For directions on policy deletion see Delete a Policy 63 Create a Policy gt Click to create a new policy The Create a Policy window appears Policy Name Description Policy Type Migrate O Duplicate O Purge meanen be
416. you run Erase Selected Mediaks and media is reused and files are Purge overwritten In contrast files on hard disk media are purged immediately a Do not run purge policies on critical data that you might want to preserve Once data is purged it is gone forever gt Ensure the policy is active or de select the Active check box if you do not want the policy to run When the Active check box is de selected the A symbol is superimposed over the policy icon in the Policy Name pane gt Click OK The window closes the policy name and description appear in the Policy Name pane gt Modify the parameters as needed on each tab for the policy See the subsequent sections for details gt Click H to save all policy settings and implement the policy Delete a Selected Policy You can delete a policy that no longer meets your needs or you can de activate a policy at present and re activate it at a later time when needed To delete a policy gt In the Policy Name pane click the policy to delete gt Click x i gt Click kd to save all policy settings and implement the policy wile oe if you delete a policy while a job is running based on that policy the job will stop as soon as it is finished processing the current file To make an active policy inactive gt In the Policy Name pane double click the policy gt In the Modify Selected Policy window de select the Active check box Import or Export Data
417. you search for metadata however wildcards are recognized Consequently if metadata that you ingest contains characters that are normally interpreted as wildcards when you search for metadata you need to use the escape character to denote that the wildcard is intended literally not as a wildcard For example if you ingest 16 37 as metadata and you then want to search for this expression you would search using 16 13 py The search type options will be identical to those you defined in the ModMdExt block see details below Create a MetadataExtensions cfg You can create MetadataExtensions cfg using any text editor Once created it needs to be added to the following path lt install dir gt Config MetadataExtensions cfg is block structured text file At the end of this section you will find a sample MetadataExtensions cfg You can implement the file as is at the path noted above to see how it works or modify the file to meet your own criteria and then implement it MetadataExtensions cfg comprises three Blocks IngestMdExt SearchMdExt and ModMdExt which comprise one or more Query blocks each ae s q SN Pay particular attention to braces there needs to be an opening brace after IngestMdExt and a closing brace after its last Query block an opening brace after SearchMdExt and a closing brace after its last Query block and an opening brace after ModMdExt and a closing brace after its last Query block Query

Buffalo OP-LP-CAM1

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents